PRIMARY CLARIFIERS NO. 1 AND 2 MODIFICATIONS AT THE ...

SIGNATURE PLACE II, 14785 PRESTON ROAD, SUITE 950 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75254 • P. 972.239.9949 • F. 972.239.9117 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers/00_00_01

TBPE No. F-882

PRIMARY CLARIFIERS NO. 1 AND 2 MODIFICATIONS AT THE ROWLETT WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FINAL SUBMITTAL

JULY 2019

July 2019 10925A10

TBPE No. F-882

CITY OF GARLAND


STRUCTURAL

July 2019 10925A10

CITY OF GARLAND

PRIMARY CLARIFIERS NO. 1 AND 2 MODIFICATIONS

AT THE ROWLETT WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

07/15/2019

ELECTRICAL

Division 26 Specifications

13717 Neutron Road Dallas, Texas 75244 TBPE No. F-2593

July 2019 01_11_00-i 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers/

CITY OF GARLAND


TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION NO. TITLE

01_11_00 SUMMARY OF WORK

01_14_00 WORK RESTRICTIONS

01_29_73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

01_29_77 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

01_32_18 PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

01_33_00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01_35_16 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

01_35_21 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

01_41_00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

01_45_00 QUALITY CONTROL

01_45_24 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

01_50_00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01_60_00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01_73_29 CUTTING AND PATCHING

01_75_17 TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP

01_77_00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01_78_23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01_81_01 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA

01_81_02 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA

01_81_04 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

SECTION NO. TITLE

03_60_01 BASIN BOTTOM GROUT

July 2019 01_11_00-ii 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers/

DIVISION 05 – METALS

SECTION NO. TITLE

05_05_24 MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY

05_12_05 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05_50_00 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION NO. TITLE

06_80_17 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

SECTION NO. TITLE

09_96_01 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

SECTION NO. TITLE

23_05_94 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION NO. TITLE

26_00_00 ELECTRICAL – GENERAL PROVISIONS

26_05_19 WIRES AND CABLES (1000 VOLT MAXIMUM)

26_05_26 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM

26_05_29 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE

26_05_33 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS

26_05_50 NEMA FRAME INDUCTION MOTORS, 1000 VOLTS AND BELOW

26_41_19 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

SECTION NO. TITLE

46_05_10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

46_43_20 CIRCULAR PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT

July 2019 01_11_00-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/01_11_00 (BidSet)

SECTION 01_11_00

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Identification and summary description of the Project, the Work, location, Owner-furnished products, activities by others, coordination, and early occupancy by Owner.

B. Related section: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as

binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of

subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor’s Work.

3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_14_00 - Work Restrictions – Work Restrictions.

1.02 THE WORK THE PROJECT

A. The Work consists of replacing the mechanisms at Primary Clarifiers No. 1 and 2 at the Rowlett Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant. This construction is including, but not limited to: 1. Field verifying all dimensions and materials of the existing facility and

equipment as shown in the Record Drawings. 2. Demolishing the existing system and installing two new primary clarifier

mechanisms. 3. Removal and salvaging of the existing odor control covers and duct work to be

reinstalled on the new primary clarifier mechanism. 4. Repair and reconstruction of existing improvements affected by the Work, and

incidentals for complete and usable facility.

B. Except as specifically noted otherwise, provide and pay for: 1. Insurance and bonds. 2. Labor, materials, and equipment. 3. Tools, equipment, and machinery required for construction. 4. Utilities required for construction. 5. Temporary facilities including sheeting and shoring. 6. Traffic control and dust control measures. 7. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of

the Work.

C. Secure and pay for all permits including OSHA excavation permits, Department of Transportation permits, government fees, and licenses.


D. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, orders, and other legal requirements of public authorities having bearing on the performance of the Work.

1.03 LOCATION OF PROJECT

A. The Work is located at the Rowlett Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant, 2500 E Centerville Road, Garland, TX 75040.

1.04 OWNER ASSIGNED SUBCONTRACTORS

A. Assignment of subcontractors by Owner is not anticipated.

1.05 ACTIVITIES BY OTHERS

A. Owner, utilities, and others may perform activities within Project area while the Work is in progress. 1. Schedule the Work with Owner, utilities, and others to minimize mutual

interference.

B. Activities by others which may affect performance of work include: 1. Ongoing Plant Operations. 2. Unanticipated Plant Maintenance.

C. Cooperate with others to minimize interference and delays: 1. When cooperation fails, submit recommendations and perform Work in

coordination with work of others.

1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.

B. Obtain construction schedules from each subcontractor, and require each subcontractor to maintain schedules and coordinate modifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_14_00

WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements for sequencing and scheduling the Work affected by existing site and facility, work restrictions, and coordination between construction operations and plant operations, including: 1. Access to site. 2. Use of site. 3. Use of premises. 4. Scheduling inspection and construction of one unit at a time.

B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as



3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_11_00 – Summary of Work. b. Section 01_35_21 – Selective Site Demolition. c. Section 01_35_16 – Alteration Project Procedures. d. Section 01_50_00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls. e. Section 01_75_17 – Commissioning and Process Start-up.

1.02 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. Wastewater projects: 1. Impairing the operational capabilities of the Rowlett Creek Wastewater

Treatment Plant will result in serious environmental damage and monetary fines.

2. Conduct commissioning and process start-up activities as specified in Section 01_75_17 in a manner that will not impair the operational capabilities of essential elements of the treatment process or reduce the capacity of the entire treatment plant below levels sufficient to treat the quality of raw wastewater to the water quality limitations specified in the discharge permit.

3. The status of the treatment plant shall be defined as "operational" when it is capable of treating the entire quantity of wastewater received to the water quality limits specified in the discharge permit.

B. Work sequence and constraints: 1. Utilize description of critical events in work sequence in this Section as a

guideline for scheduling and undertaking the Work.


2. Work sequence and constraints presented do not include all items affecting completion of the Work, but are intended to describe critical events necessary to minimize disruption of the existing facilities and to ensure compliance with permit requirements.

3. Work sequence and constraints presented represent one possible way of executing the Work, but the Contractor is expected to undertake the Work in whatever manner they believe to be best.

C. Instrumentation and controls process performance testing: 1. After the Process Operational Period, test PCIS system as specified in

Section 01_75_17.

1.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION OF PLANT AND MAINTAINING CONTINUOUS OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Facilities or conditions required to keep the existing plant operational include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Electrical power including transformers, distribution wiring, and motor control

centers. 2. Protection of existing equipment. Such protection shall include, but is not

limited to, provision of shrouds during sandblasting and coating of structural columns and beams. All protective items provided shall maintain operability of equipment and safe working conditions for plant operations and maintenance personnel.

3. Maintain access for trucks to load dewatered solids for conveyance offsite. 4. Lighting. 5. Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning in existing MCC rooms. 6. Instrumentation, meters, controls, and telemetry equipment. 7. Safety equipment and features. 8. Non-potable water service. 9. Natural gas service.

B. Conduct the Work and provide temporary facilities required to keep the existing plant continuously operational.

1.04 SHUTDOWN AND CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS

A. Execute the Work while the existing facility is in operation as specified in Section 01_35_16.

B. Shutdown activities: 1. Scheduling:

a. Shutdown activities must be coordinated with Plant Staff. Submit notification of required shutdowns of existing facilities at least 7 days prior to the planned date of shutdown, unless specified otherwise herein.

2. Unplanned shutdowns due to emergencies are not indicated in this Section. 3. Only one unit can be out of service at at time for inspection, demolition, and

construction.

C. Comply with all additional constraints identified elsewhere in this Section and other Contract Documents.


D. Indicate required shutdowns of existing facilities or interruptions of existing operations on Progress Schedule. Shutdowns will be permitted to the extent that existing operation of the plant will not be jeopardized and identified constraints are satisfied.

E. Minimize shutdown times by thorough advanced planning. Have required equipment, materials, and labor on hand at time of shutdown.

F. Where required to minimize treatment process interruptions while complying with specified sequencing constraints, provide temporary pumping, power, lighting, controls, instrumentation, and safety devices.

G. Organize work to be completed in a minimum number of shutdowns.

H. Final determination of the permitting of shutdowns will be the sole judgment of the Owner.

I. Owner maintains the ability to abort on the day of the scheduled shutdown.

J. Unit process availability work limitations: 1. Shutdowns and tie-ins or other activities that disrupt plant operations are

prohibited unless the following unit process availability conditions exist and unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.

1.05 METHOD OF PROCEDURE (MOP)

A. MOP Instructions: See Appendix A.

B. Prepare MOP for the following conditions: 1. Shutdowns, diversions, and tie-ins to the existing facility. 2. Process start-up activities. 3. Power interruption and tie-ins. 4. Switch over between temporary and permanent facilities, equipment, piping,

and electrical and instrumentation systems. 5. Process constraints requiring interruption of operating processes or utilities.

C. Other Work not specifically listed may require MOPs as determined necessary by the Contractor, Owner, or Engineer.

D. Submit Baseline Schedule with proposed MOPs.

E. Submit MOP Log at construction progress meetings.

F. No consideration will be given to claims of additional time and cost associated to preparing MOPs required by the Owner and Engineer to complete this work in a manner that facilitates proper operation of the facility and compliance with effluent discharge criteria.

G. Where required to minimize treatment process interruptions while complying with specified sequencing constraints, provide temporary pumping, power, lighting, controls, instrumentation, and safety devices.


1.06 COMPLIANCE WITH NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM PERMIT

A. The existing facility is operating under the terms of a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System permit issued by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). This permit specifies the water quality limits that the plant must meet prior to discharge of effluent. A copy of the existing permit is on file for review at the RCWWTP and DCWWTP Administrative Offices.

B. Perform work in a manner that will not prevent the existing facility from achieving the finished water quality requirements established by regulations.

C. Bear the cost of penalties imposed on the Owner for discharge violations caused by actions of the Contractor.

1.07 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS

A. Provide safe, continuous access to process control equipment for plant operations personnel.

1.08 UTILITIES

A. Provide advance notice to and utilize services of Dig Tess (1-800-DIG TESS) for location and marking of underground utilities operated by utility agencies other than the Owner.

B. Maintain electrical, telephone, water, gas, sanitary facilities, and other utilities within existing facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when necessary.

1.09 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.

B. Obtain construction schedules from subcontractors and suppliers, and assume responsibility for correctness.

C. Incorporate schedules from subcontractors and suppliers into Progress Schedule to plan for and comply with sequencing constraints.

1.10 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Where proper execution of the Work depends upon work by others, inspect and promptly report discrepancies and defects.

1.11 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The purpose of this section is to present pertinent information that will assist the Contractor in preparing his approach to work. Concurrent activities are not identified. This work sequence described herein is provided only as a guide to how the work may be performed; The Contractor is ultimately responsible for how the work is performed, and it is expected that the Contractor may have approaches different than described herein. However, Contractor shall comply with all work restrictions and constraints identified.


1.12 TEMPORARY SERVICES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT

A. As specified in Section 01_50_00.



END OF SECTION


APPENDIX A “Method of Procedure” (MOP)

Instructions and Forms

Definition and Purpose

“Method of Procedure” (MOP) is a detailed document submitted by the Contractor to request process shutdown(s), utility tie-in(s), work in areas that may risk unanticipated outages, or flow diversions to accommodate site construction activities during a project. Such activities may include (but are not limited to) new tie-ins to utilities or structures, mechanical modifications to process piping or equipment, demolition, bulkhead installation, and cleaning processes.

The MOP provides a detailed plan to the Owner and Engineer that describes specific aspects of the work including purpose, time of execution, and anticipated impacts on treatment processes. The MOP also includes contingency measures and provisions for rapid closure in the event that shutdown or work progress difficulties are encountered. Information from relevant trades associated with the requested shutdown, diversion, or tie-in is also included.

The Owner should use the information within the MOP to define operational procedures and methods to safely and successfully assist the Contractor.

MOP Process Summary

WHO STEP TIMING

Contractor 1. Identify MOPs needed on MOP Log and Baseline Schedule.

7 days prior to Preconstruction Scheduling Meeting

Contractor, Owner, Engineer

2. Pre-MOP Meeting. More than 28 days prior to work

Contractor 3. Submits MOP. No later than 28 days prior to work

Owner 4. Reviews MOP.

Owner 5. MOP finalized. 7 days prior to work

Contractor 6. Complete Readiness Checklist. 5 days prior to work

Contractor 7. Complete Safety Checklist. Just prior to commencing work

Contractor 8. Complete Work.

Contractor 9. Update MOP Log and Progress Schedules. Monthly


MOP Process Detail

STEP 1. Identifies MOPs needed on MOP Log and Baseline Schedule.

Contractor submits a preliminary list of anticipated project MOPs on MOP Log. MOPs identified but not limited to those shutdowns, diversions, or tie-ins described in the Contract Documents. Incorporate MOPs as tasks in Baseline Schedule. Date scheduled MOPs to coincide with the appropriate construction activities.

STEP 2. Pre-MOP Meeting.

Contractor requests a Pre-MOP Meeting with the Owner and Engineer to discuss the nature of the shutdown, diversion, or tie-in, and to gather the information necessary to complete the MOP Form. The pre-MOP meeting may be waived by the Owner or Engineer if the work is deemed to be minor.

STEP 3. Submits MOP.

Contractor completes the MOP Form and submit 3 copies for approval to the Owner’s Project Manager (OPM).

STEP 4. Reviews MOP.

OPM distributes MOP Form for review by the Owner’s Construction Coordinator, O&M Representative, and Engineer’s Project Representative. Review MOP Form for completeness, accuracy, compliance with both the construction schedule, constraints defined in contract documents, and to ensure that the requested work does not negatively impact plant operations or other concurrent project activities. Additional information may be requested to better understand the nature of and method for completing the Work.

STEP 5. MOP finalized.

Once the MOP is agreed to by all parties, the MOP will be finalized by signature. Copies are distributed to the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor.

STEP 6. Complete Readiness Checklist.

Contractor verifies everything is ready for the work.

STEP 7. Complete Safety Checklist.

Contractor ensures safety.

STEP 8. Complete work.

Contractor complete work.

STEP 9. Update MOP Log and Progress Schedules.

Contractor updates MOP Log weekly and distributes at the regularly scheduled construction progress meetings.


METHOD OF PROCEDURE

(MOP) FORM Owner: Date:

Contractor: Carollo Project No.:

Project Name: Submittal No.:

Submittal Title: Spec/Dwg. Reference:

MOP # Task Title (Provide <10 word title): Submittal Date: (No later than 28 days prior to work) SCHEDULE OF WORK ACTIVITY START: (Date/Time) END: (Date/Time) REQUESTOR: PRIMARY POINT OF CONTACT: PHONE/PAGER: SECONDARY POINT OF CONTACT: PHONE/PAGER: NOTIFY Control Room, Phone Security, Phone BUILDING: LOCATION OF WORK FLOOR/LEVEL: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: (Provide sufficient details on process isolation, work sequencing, and safety (i.e., control of significant hazards unique to the work) to demonstrate an understanding of the work and how it will be completed within the constraints, and its impact on the processes and facility.) Task Summary: Processes Affected: Trades Affected:

WORK PLAN: Work Sequencing: Process Isolation: Spill Prevention Plan: Contingency Plans:

CRITICAL EQUIPMENT/TOOLS: (pumps and discharge hoses with correct fittings, blind flanges and pipe plugs, no-hub fittings, properly sized electrical service components, generators, portable lighting, chlorine for potable water pipe breaks, etc.)

Acoustic Ceiling/or Walls Access Excavation Permit Lock Out/Tag Out

Chemical Use Approval Fire Sprinkler Impairment Life Safety Systems

Confined Space Permit Flammable Materials Roof Protocol

Critical Lift Plan Flush / Discharge Work After Dark

Energized Electrical Work High Pressure Test

Elect. Panel Schedules Hot Work/Open Flame EXISTING SERVICE(S) AT RISK:

Breathing Air Elect Normal Process Access Telephones

Chemical Distribution Fire Protection Safety Showers UPS

City Water HVAC SCADA VAX/DATA

Communication Inert Gas Security

Domestic Drain Instrument – Air Solvent Drain

Elect-Bus Duct Life Safety System Specialty Gases

Elect Emergency Natural Gas Storm Drain REVIEWER’S INSTRUCTIONS / COMMENTS:

PREJOB BRIEFING MUST BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK: Full Name (printed) Signature Phone Date Submitted By System Owner Reviewer (if needed) Reviewer (if needed) Reviewer (if needed)


READINESS CHECKLIST (5 days prior to work)

Checklist provided as a guide but is not all inclusive. 1. Confirm all parts and materials are on site:

2. Review work plan:

3. Review contingency plan:


SAFETY CHECKLIST (Just prior to commencing work)

Checklist provided as a guide but is not all inclusive. 1. Location awareness:

a. Emergency exits: b. Emergency shower and eyewash: c. Telephones and phone numbers: d. Shut-off valve: e. Electrical disconnects:

2. Inspect work area: a. Take time to survey the area you are working in. Ensure that what you want to do will

work. Do you have enough clearance? Is your footing secure? Do you have adequate lighting and ventilation? Are surrounding utilities out of the way for you to perform your work?

3. MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets): a. Understand the chemicals and substances in the area you are working in by reading

the MSDS. 4. Lockout/Tagout Procedure:

a. Lockout/tagout energy sources before beginning work. b. Make sure all valves associated with the work are locked out and tagged out on each

side of the penetration. c. Make sure the lines are depressurized.

5. Overhead work: a. Use appropriate personal protective equipment; i.e., safety harness, lifeline, etc. b. Select appropriate tie-off points; i.e., structurally adequate, not a pipe or conduit, etc. c. Spotter assigned and in position. d. Pipe rack access; i.e., check design capacity, protective decking or scaffolding in

place, exposed valves or electrical switches identified and protected. 6. Safety equipment:

a. Shepherd's hook. b. ARC flash protection. c. Fire extinguisher. d. Other: .

7. Accidents: a. Should accidents occur, do not shut off and do not attempt to correct the situation,

unless you are absolutely positive that your action will correct the problem and not adversely affect other people or equipment.

8. Review process start-up documents: a. In the event the system is shutdown, the Control Center should have a working

knowledge of the process start-up procedures in order to deal effectively with unforeseen events.

9. Evacuation procedures: a. Do not obstruct evacuation routes. b. Take time to survey the area for evacuation routes.


Method of Procedure (MOP) Log Sample

MOP Number TaskP Title

Date Requested

Date Approved

Date Work Planned

Work Completed

(yes/no)

001

002

003


SECTION 01_29_73

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements for preparation, format, and submittal of Schedule of Values.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_32_18 – Progress Schedules and Reports. b. Section 26_00_00 – Electrical - General Provisions.

1.02 PREPARATION A. Print out Schedule of Values from accepted Preliminary or Baseline Schedule

submitted and accepted under Section 01_32_18.

B. Schedule of Values shall be a listing of all cost loaded, onsite construction activities from the progress schedule, listed in numerical order, showing that the sum total of all cost loaded activities equals the value of Contract.

C. When the schedule is changed or revised to include added or deleted work, the Schedule of Values shall also be revised such that the sum total of all cost loaded activities continuously equals the current Contract value.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Schedule of Values for the Preliminary Schedule in accordance with the requirements in Article "Preliminary Schedule", Section 01_32_18.

B. Submit Schedule of Values for the Baseline Schedule in accordance with the requirements in Article "Baseline Schedule", Section 01_32_18.

C. Submittal of the Schedule of Values is a condition precedent to the issuance of any payment under this Contract.


1.04 SAMPLE SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Following is the minimum acceptable form for Schedule of Values:

MINIMUM SCHEDULE OF VALUES

NO. DESCRIPTION OF ITEM LUMP SUM COST

1. Mobilization.

2. Demolition

3. Primary clarifier equipment.

4. Removal and reinstallation of odor control cover and duct work.

15. Electrical work schedule of values as specified in Section 26_00_00.

19. Start-up and demobilization

20. Miscellaneous work items and other prices not included in previous items and necessary to complete the Work.

TOTAL LUMP SUM BID

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_29_77

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment.

1.02 FORMAT

A. Develop satisfactory spreadsheet-type form generated by downloading cost data from the Progress Schedule.

B. Fill in information required on form.

C. When Change Orders are executed, add Change Orders at end of listing of scheduled activities: 1. Identify change order by number and description. 2. Provide cost of change order in appropriate column.

D. After completing, submit Application for Payment.

E. Owner will review application for accuracy. When accurate, Owner will submit for processing of payment.

F. Execute application with signature of responsible officer of Contractor.

1.03 SUBSTANTIATING DATA

A. Provide Substantiating Data with cover letter identifying: 1. Project. 2. Application number and date. 3. Detailed list of enclosures. 4. For stored products with item number and identification on application,

description of specific material, and proof of insurance coverage for offsite stored products.

5. Submit “certified” payroll.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit two (2) copies of Application for Payment and Substantiating Data with cover letter.

1.05 PAYMENT REQUESTS

A. Prepare progress payment requests on a monthly basis by the 25th day of each month. Base requests on the breakdowns of costs for each scheduled activity and the percentage of completion for each activity.


B. Indicate total dollar amount of work planned for every month of the project. Equate sum of monthly amounts to Lump Sum Contract Price.

C. Generate Progress Payment request forms by downloading cost data from the schedule information to a spreadsheet type format. Identify each activity on the Progress Schedule that has a cost associated with it, the cost for each activity, the estimated percent complete for each activity, and the value of work completed for both the payment period and job to date.

D. Prepare summary of cost information for each Major Item of Work listed in the Schedule of Values. Identify the value of work completed for both the payment period and job to date.

E. Submit progress payment requests at progress meetings.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_32_18

PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Preparation, submittal, and maintenance of computerized progress schedule and reports, Contract time adjustments, and payment requests, including the following: 1. Preliminary Schedule. 2. Baseline Schedule. 3. Monthly Schedule Updates. 4. Weekly Summary Schedule. 5. Schedule of Submittals. 6. Manpower Schedule. 7. Equipment Schedule. 8. Commissioning and Process Start-up Schedule. 9. As-built Schedule.

1.02 SCHEDULER

A. Designate, in writing and within 5 calendar days after Notice of Award, person responsible for preparation, maintenance, updating, and revision of all schedules.

B. Qualifications of scheduler: 1. Authority to act on behalf of Contractor. 2. 5 years verifiable experience in preparation of complex construction schedules

for projects of similar value, size, and complexity. 3. Knowledge of critical path method (CPM) scheduling utilizing Primavera

Project Planner or SureTrak or Microsoft Project software.

1.03 SCHEDULING FORMAT AND SOFTWARE

A. Schedule format: Utilize CPM format.

B. Prepare computerized schedule utilizing Primavera P6 Professional or Microsoft Project, most current version.

1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING MEETING

A. Owner will conduct Preconstruction Scheduling Meeting with Contractor’s Project Manager, General Superintendent, and scheduler within 7 calendar days after Notice To Proceed. This meeting is separate from the Preconstruction Conference Meeting and is intended to cover schedule issues exclusively.

B. At the meeting, review scheduling requirements. These include schedule preparation, reporting requirements, updates, revisions, and schedule delay analysis. Present schedule methodology, planned sequence of operations, cost and resource loading methodology, and proposed activity coding structure.


C. Naming convention: Name schedule files with the year, month and day of the data date, revision identifier, and a description of the schedule: 1. Example 1: 2014_07_30 rev 1 draft baseline schedule.xer. 2. Example 2: 2014_09_30 rev 2 sep final update.xer.

D. Filing: Post submitted files to Owner’s construction document control system.

1.05 SCHEDULE PREPARATION

A. Preparation and submittal of Progress Schedule represents Contractor's intention to execute the Work within specified time and constraints. Failure to conform to requirement may result in termination for cause as specified in the General Conditions.

B. Contractor's bid covers all costs associated with the execution of the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule.

C. During preparation of the preliminary Progress Schedule, Owner will facilitate Contractor's efforts by being available to answer questions regarding sequencing issues, scheduling constraints, interface points, and dependency relationships.

D. Prepare schedule utilizing Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM).

E. Prepare schedule utilizing activity durations in terms of working days. Do not exceed 15 working day duration on activities except concrete curing, submittal review, and equipment fabrication and deliveries. Where duration of continuous work exceeds 15 working days, subdivide activities by location, stationing, or other sub-element of the Work. Coordinate holidays to be observed with the Owner and incorporate them into the schedule as non-working days.

F. Failure to include an activity required for execution of the Work does not excuse Contractor from completing the Work and portions thereof within specified times and at price specified in Contract. Contract requirements are not waived by failure of Contractor to include required schedule constraints, sequences, or milestones in schedule. Contract requirements are not waived by Owner’s acceptance of the schedule. In event of conflict between accepted schedule and Contract requirements, terms of Contract govern at all times, unless requirements are waived in writing by the Owner.

G. Reference schedule to working days with beginning of Contract Time as Day "1".

H. Should Contractor submit a Baseline Schedule showing project completion more than 20 working days prior to Contract completion date, Owner may issue Change Order, at no cost to Owner, revising time of performance of Work and Contract completion date to match Contractor’s schedule completion date. Adjust Contract milestone dates, if any, accordingly.

I. Contract float is for the mutual benefit of both Owner and Contractor. Changes to the project that can be accomplished within this available period of float may be made by Owner without extending the Contract time, by utilizing float. Time extensions will not be granted nor delay damages owed until Work extends beyond currently accepted Contract completion date. Likewise, Contractor may utilize float to offset delays other than delays caused by Owner. Mutual use of float can


continue until all available float shown by schedule has been utilized by either Owner or Contractor, or both. At that time, extensions of the Contract time will be granted by Owner for valid Owner-caused or third party-caused delays which affect the planned completion date and which have been properly documented and demonstrated by Contractor.

J. Non-sequestering of float: Pursuant to float sharing requirements of Contract, schedule submittals can be rejected for use of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic, special lead or lag logic restraints, extended activity durations or imposed dates.

K. Interim milestone dates, operational constraints. In event there are interim milestone dates and/or operational constraints set forth in Contract, show them on schedule. Do not use Zero Total Float constraint or Mandatory Finish Date on such Contract requirements.

L. Schedule windows for Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed equipment or materials: Immediately after Award of Contract obtain from Engineer anticipated delivery dates of Owner furnished equipment or materials. Show these dates in the schedule in same manner indicated by Engineer.

1.06 NETWORK DETAILS AND GRAPHICAL OUTPUT

A. Produce a clear, legible, and accurate calendar based, time scaled, graphical network diagram. Group activities related to the same physical areas of the Work. Produce the network diagram based upon the early start of all activities.

B. Include for each activity, the description, activity number, estimated duration in working days, total float, and all activity relationship lines.

C. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence in which Work is planned to be accomplished. Incorporate the basic concept of the precedence diagram network method to show how the start of 1 activity is dependent upon the start or completion of preceding activities and its completion restricts the start of following activities.

D. Indicate the critical path for the project.

E. Delineate the specified contract duration and identify the planned completion of the Work as a milestone. Show the time period between the planned and Contract completion dates, if any, as an activity identified as project float unless a Change Order is issued to officially change the Contract completion date.

F. Identify system shutdown dates, system tie-in dates, specified interim completion or milestone dates and contract completion date as milestones.

G. Include, in addition to construction activities: 1. Submission dates and review periods for major equipment submittals, shoring

submittals, and indicator pile program: a. Shoring reviews: Allow 4-week review period for each shoring submittal. b. Pile indicator program: Allow 3-week review period for analysis of

program.


2. Any activity by the Owner or the Engineer that may affect progress or required completion dates.

3. Equipment and long-lead material deliveries over 8 weeks. 4. Approvals required by regulatory agencies or other third parties.

H. Produce network diagram on 22-inch by 34-inch sheets with grid coordinate system on the border of all sheets utilizing alpha and numeric designations.

I. Identify the execution of the following: 1. Mobilization. 2. All required submittals and submittal review times. 3. Equipment and materials procurement/fabrication/delivery. 4. Excavation. 5. Metal fastenings, framing, structures, and fabrications. 6. Finishes including coating and painting. 7. Process equipment, including identification of ordering lead-time, factory

testing, and installation. 8. Trenching, pipe laying, and trench backfill and compaction. 9. Piping, fittings and appurtenances, including identification of ordering and

fabrication lead time, layout, installation and testing. 10. Electrical work including lighting, heating and cooling, and special systems,

including identification of ordering lead-time. 11. Instrumentation and controls, including identification of ordering lead-time. 12. Preliminary testing of equipment, instrumentation, and controls. 13. Commissioning Phase:

a. Source Testing. b. Owner Training. c. Installation Testing. d. Functional Testing.

14. Process Start-up Phase: a. Process Start-up. b. Process Operational Period. c. Instrumentation and Controls Performance Testing.

15. Substantial completion. 16. Punch list work. 17. Demobilization.

1.07 SUBMITTAL OF PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit preliminary and baseline schedule.

B. Submit, on a monthly basis, updated schedules as specified.

C. Submit final schedule update as specified.

D. Submit revised schedules and time impact analyses as specified.

E. Submit schedules in the media and number of copies as follows: 1. 3 sets of the CPM network and/or bar chart (as specified by the Owner) on

D-size sheets. Color-coding to be specified by the Owner. 2. 3 sets of Tabular reports listing all activities sorted numerically identifying

duration, early start, late start, early finish, late finish, total float, and all predecessor/successor information.


3. 2 sets of CPM Schedule data electronic files in a native backed-up file (.xer) stored on CD/DVD.

1.08 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

A. Submit Preliminary Schedule within 14 calendar days after Notice To Proceed. Include a detailed plan of operations for first 90 calendar days of Work after receipt of Notice to Proceed.

B. Meet with Owner within 7 calendar days after receipt of Preliminary Schedule to review and make necessary adjustments. Submit revised preliminary schedule within 5 calendar days after meeting.

C. Incorporate unchanged, the Accepted Preliminary Schedule as first 90 calendar days of activity in Contractor’s Baseline Schedule.

D. Update monthly during first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

1.09 BASELINE SCHEDULE

A. No more than 30 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, submit the Baseline Schedule for all Work of the project. Show sequence and interdependence of all activities required for complete performance of all Work, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed and concluding with date of final completion of Contract.

1.10 WEATHER DAYS ALLOWANCE

A. Include as a separate identifiable activity on the critical path, an activity labeled "Weather Days Allowance." Insert this activity at the end of the schedule.

B. Insert an activity in critical path to reflect weather day occurrences when weather days are experienced and accepted by Owner. Identify this activity as a weather delay.

C. Reduce duration of Weather Days Allowance activity as weather delays are experienced and inserted into the schedule. Remaining weather days in Weather Day Allowance at completion of project is considered float.

D. Weather conditions that prevent or inhibit the Contractor’s performance of the Work and affect the Critical Path indicated on the Schedule shall be referred to as a Weather Day. A Weather Day is defined as the Contractor being unable to perform at least 4 hours of work on the Critical Path. The Contractor shall provide a written notice to the Owner of the occurrence of a weather day within 2 days after the onset of such weather and shall describe in reasonable detail the type of weather encountered and the Work interfered with or interrupted. A schedule update will not suffice as a written notice. The Owner will determine if the weather day constitutes a use of a portion of the Weather Day Allowance. After use of all the Weather Day Allowance, the Owner will determine if the Contractor is entitled to an extension of the Contract Time due to weather conditions. Weather days are considered excusable delay as defined in this Section.


1.11 REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF SCHEDULES

A. Owner will review Baseline Schedule, Schedule Updates, Schedule Revisions, and Time Impact Analyses to ascertain compliance with specified project constraints, compliance with milestone dates, reasonableness of durations and sequence, accurate inter-relationships, and completeness.

B. Owner will issue written comments following completion of review of Baseline Schedule within 21 calendar days after receipt.

C. Written comments on review of Schedule Updates and Schedule Revisions and Time Impact Analyses will be returned to Contractor within 14 calendar days after receipt by Engineer.

D. Revise and resubmit schedule in accordance with Owner's comments within 7 calendar days after receipt of such comments, or request joint meeting to resolve objections.

E. If Owner requests a meeting, the Contractor and all major subcontractors must participate in the meeting with Owner. 1. Revise and resubmit schedule within 7 calendar days after meeting.

F. Use accepted schedule for planning, organizing, and directing the work and for reporting progress.

G. Owner’s submittal review response: 1. When schedule reflects Owner's and Contractor's agreement of project

approach and sequence, schedule will be accepted by Owner. 2. Owner’s submittal review response for schedule submittal will be “Receipt

Acknowledged - Filed for Record” including applicable comments.

H. Acceptance of the schedules by the Owner is for general conformance with the Contract Documents and for Owner’s planning information, and does not relieve the Contractor of sole responsibility for planning, coordinating, and executing the Work within the contract completion dates. Omissions and errors in the accepted schedules shall not excuse performance less than that required by the Contract Documents. Acceptance by the Owner in no way constitutes an evaluation or validation of the Contractor’s plan, sequence or means, methods, and techniques of construction.

1.12 SCHEDULE UPDATES

A. Any update: 1. Prepare update using most recent accepted version of schedule including:

a. Actual start dates of activities that have been started. b. Actual finish dates of activities that have been completed. c. Percentage of completion of activities that have been started but not

finished. d. Actual dates on which milestones were achieved. e. Update activities by inputting percent complete figures with actual dates. f. Use retained logic in preparing Schedule Updates. g. When necessary, input remaining durations for activities whose finish

dates cannot be calculated accurately with a percent complete figure only.


h. Revisions to the schedule may be included that have been previously approved as specified in this Section under Revisions to Schedule.

B. Monthly updates: 1. Submit written narrative report in conjunction with each Schedule Update

including descriptions of the following: a. Activities added to or deleted from the schedule are to adhere to cost and

other resource loading requirements. 1) Identify added activities in manner distinctly different from original

activity designations. b. Changes in sequence or estimated duration of activities. c. Current or anticipated problems and delays affecting progress, impact of

these problems and delays and measures taken to mitigate impact. d. Assumptions made and activities affected by incorporating change order

work into the schedule. 2. Submit updated schedule and materials specified under Submittal of Progress

Schedules, 5 calendar days before the monthly schedule update meeting. 3. Since Monthly Schedule Update is the application for progress payment

required as specified in Section 01_29_77 - Applications for Payment, submittal and acceptance of the monthly Schedule Update is a condition precedent to the making of any progress payments.

C. Monthly progress meeting: 1. Update the schedule prior to monthly progress meeting.

a. Identify overall progress of each Major Item of Work in the Summary Schedule.

b. If there are significant changes to the schedule, submit a written report at the progress meeting.

2. Should monthly Schedule Update show project completion earlier than current Contract completion date, show early completion time as schedule activity, identified as “Project Float”.

3. Should monthly Schedule Update show project completion later than current Contract completion date, prepare and submit a Schedule Revision in accordance with the Revisions to Schedule.

1.13 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULE

A. Submit Revised Schedule within 5 calendar days: 1. When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities indicates an

overrun of the Contract Time or milestone dates by 20 working days or 5 percent of the remaining duration, whichever is less.

2. When delays in submittals, deliveries, or work stoppages are encountered making necessary the replanning or rescheduling of activities.

3. When the schedule does not represent the actual progress of activities. 4. When any change to the sequence of activities, the completion date for major

portions of the work, or when changes occur which affect the critical path. 5. When Contract modification necessitates schedule revision, submit schedule

analysis of change order work with cost proposal.

B. Create a separate submittal for Schedule Revisions. 1. Comply with schedule updates as specified in this Section. 2. Do not submit with Schedule Updates.


C. Schedule Revisions will not be reflected in the schedule until after the revision is accepted by the Owner. 1. This includes Schedule Revisions submitted for the purpose of mitigating a

Contractor-caused project delay (Recovery Schedule).

1.14 MONTHLY SCHEDULE

A. Submit to Owner, at every monthly progress meeting, a 4-Week Look-Ahead Schedule showing the activities completed during the previous week and the Contractor’s schedule of activities for the next 4 weeks.

B. Use the logic and conform to the status of the current progress schedule when producing a Monthly Schedule in CPM schedule or a bar chart format. 1. In the event that the Monthly Schedule no longer conforms to the current

schedule Contractor may be required to revise the schedule as specified in this Section.

C. The activity designations used in the Monthly Schedule must be consistent with those used in the Baseline Schedule and the monthly Schedule Updates.

D. Contractor and Engineer must agree on the format of the Monthly Schedule.

1.15 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES

A. Contract Time will be adjusted only for causes specified in Contract Documents. 1. Non-excusable delay: Non-excusable delays include actions or inactions of the

Contractor, or events for which the Contractor has assumed contractual responsibility (including actions or inactions of subcontractors, suppliers, or material manufacturers at any tier) that would independently delay the completion of the Work beyond the current Contract completion date). No time extensions will be granted for non-excusable delays.

2. Excusable delay: Events which are unforeseeable, outside the control of, and without the fault or negligence of either the Owner or the Contractor (or any party for whom either is responsible), which would independently delay the completion of the Work beyond the current Contract completion date. The Contractor is entitled to a time extension only. No other damages will be approved.

3. Compensable delay: Actions or inactions of the Owner, or events for which the Owner has assumed contractual responsibility, which would independently delay the completion of the Work beyond the current Contract completion date. The Contractor is entitled to a time extension and delay damages.

4. Concurrent delay: Concurrent delay is any combination of the above 3 types of delay occurring on the same calendar date. a. Exception to concurrent delay: Cases where the combination consists of

2 or more instances of the same type of delay occurring on the same calendar date. When one cause of delay is Owner-caused or caused by an event which is beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of either the Owner or the Contractor and the other Contractor-caused, the Contractor is entitled only to a time extension and no delay damages.

B. If the Contractor believes that the Owner has impacted its work, such that the project completion date will be delayed, the Contractor must submit proof


demonstrating the delay to the critical path. This proof, in the form of a Time Impact Analysis, may entitle the Contractor to an adjustment of contract time.

C. Time Impact Analysis: 1. Use the accepted schedule update that is current relative to the time frame of

the delay event (change order, third party delay, or other Owner-caused delay). Represent the delay event in the schedule by: a. Inserting new activities associated with the delay event into the schedule. b. Revising activity logic. c. Revising activity durations.

2. If the project schedule’s critical path and completion date are impacted as a result of adding this delay event to the schedule, a time extension equal to the magnitude of the impact may be warranted.

3. The Time Impact Analysis submittal must include the following information: a. A fragment of the portion of the schedule affected by the delay event. b. A narrative explanation of the delay issue and how it impacted the

schedule. c. A CD containing the schedule file used to perform the Time Impact

Analysis.

D. When a delay to the project as a whole can be avoided by revising preferential sequencing or logic, and the Contractor chooses not to implement the revisions, the Contractor will be entitled to a time extension and no compensation for extended overhead.

E. Indicate clearly that the Contractor has used, in full, all project float available for the work involved in the request, including any float that may exist between the Contractor's planned completion date and the Contract completion date. Utilize the latest version of the Schedule Update accepted at the time of the alleged delay, and all other relevant information, to determine the adjustment of the Contract Time.

F. Adjustment of the Contract Times will be granted only when the Contract Float has been fully utilized and only when the revised date of completion of the Work has been pushed beyond the Contract completion date. Adjustment of the Contract Times will be made only for the number of days that the planned completion of the work has been extended.

G. Actual delays in activities which do not affect the critical path work or which do not move the Contractor's planned completion date beyond the Contract completion date will not be the basis for an adjustment to the Contract Time.

H. If completion of the project occurs within the specified Contract Time, the Contractor is not entitled to job-site or home office overhead beyond the Contractor's originally planned occupancy of the site.

I. Notify Owner of a request for Contract Time adjustment. In cases where the Contractor does not submit a request for Contract Time adjustment for a specific change order, delay, or Contractor request within the specified period of time, then it is mutually agreed that the particular change order, delay, or Contractor request has no time impact on the Contract completion date and no time extension is required.


J. The Owner will, within 30 calendar days after receipt of a Contract Time adjustment, request any supporting evidence, review the facts and advise the Contractor in writing: 1. Include the new Progress Schedule data, if accepted by the Owner, in the next

monthly Schedule Update.

1.16 SUMMARY SCHEDULE

A. Provide Summary Schedule, which consolidates groups of activities associated with Major Items of Work shown on Baseline Schedule. Summary Schedule is intended to give an overall indication of the project schedule without a large amount of detail.

B. Submit updated Summary Schedule at monthly progress meetings and after each Schedule Update or Schedule Revision.

1.17 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Submittals shall include submittals required in the Contract Documents but not limited to Commissioning and Process Start-up Plans, Training Plans, test procedures, operation and maintenance manuals, shop drawings, samples, record documents, and specifically required certificates, warranties, and service agreements.

B. Preliminary Schedule of Submittals: 1. Due date: After Preliminary Schedule has been submitted and accepted by

Owner. 2. Format:

a. Include submittals anticipated in the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed using early start dates.

b. Indicate week and month anticipated for each submittal. c. Indicate “Priority” submittals where review time can impact Contractor’s

schedule. 1) “Priority” indication will not alter review times specified in Section

01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures. 2) Owner will endeavor to provide early review of “Priority” submittals

where possible. 3. Submittal of Preliminary Schedule of Submittals shall be a condition precedent

to Owner making progress payments during the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

C. Final Schedule of Submittals: 1. Due date: After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by

Owner. 2. Format:

a. Include submittals using early start dates. b. Include all submittals, including those required in the preliminary schedule

of shop drawings and sample submittals. c. Indicate week and month anticipated for each submittal. d. Indicate “Priority” submittals where review time can impact Contractor’s

schedule. 1) “Priority” indication will not alter review times specified in Section

01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures.


2) Owner will endeavor to provide early review of “Priority” submittals where possible.

3. Submittal of Final Schedule of Submittals shall be a condition precedent to Owner making progress payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.

D. Provide updated Schedule of Submittals with updated schedules if schedule revisions change listing and timing of submittals.

1.18 MANPOWER SCHEDULES

A. Due date: After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by Owner.

B. Format: 1. Schedule histogram depicting total craft manpower and craft manpower for

Contractor’s own labor forces and those of each subcontractor. 2. Submit electronically on a computer disk in Excel format, with 1 paper copy.

C. Progress payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed will not be made until manpower schedule is provided.

1.19 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. Due date: After Baseline Schedule has been submitted and accepted by Owner.

B. Format: 1. Tabular report listing each major piece of construction equipment to be used in

performing the Work. 2. Include major equipment for Contractor and each subcontractor. 3. Submit electronically on a computer disk in Excel format with 1 paper copy.

C. Progress payments after the first 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed will not be made until equipment schedule is provided.

1.20 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL

A. Proposed Commissioning and Process Start-up Schedule: 1. Due date: As specified in Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 2. Schedule requirements: As specified in Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning. 3. Owner response due within 20 calendar days of receipt. 4. Contractor responsible for updating schedule and resubmitting within

10 calendar days of receipt of Owner comments.

B. The Commissioning and Process Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule until Owner acceptance of the Proposed Commissioning and Process Start-up Schedule.

C. Commissioning and Process Start-up Schedule monthly update requirements: 1. Highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, and

remaining durations, as applicable. 2. Include activities not previously included in the previously accepted detail work

plan Commissioning and Process Start-up Schedule. 3. Change Order required for any change to contractual dates.


4. Reviews of these submittals by Owner will not be construed to constitute acceptance within the time frames, durations, or sequence of work for each added activity.

1.21 FINAL SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL

A. The final Schedule Update becomes the As-Built Schedule. 1. The As-Built Schedule reflects the exact manner in which the project was

constructed by reflecting actual start and completion dates for all activities accomplished on the project.

2. Contractor’s Project Manager and scheduler sign and certify the As-Built Schedule as being an accurate record of the way the project was actually constructed.

B. Retainage will not be released until final Schedule Update is provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_33_00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements and procedures for submittals.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_29_73 – Schedule of Values. b. Section 01_32_18 – Progress Schedules and Reports. c. Section 01_77_00 – Closeout Procedures. d. Section 26_05_50 – NEMA Frame Induction Motors, 600 Volts and Below.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Certificates: Describe certificates that document affirmations by the Contractor or other entity that the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Extra stock materials: Describe extra stock materials to be provided for the Owner's use in facility operation and maintenance.

C. Maintenance material submittals: Use this article to categorize maintenance materials submittals requiring no A/E action other than confirmation of receipt under an explanatory heading.

D. Manufacturer's instructions: Instructions, stipulations, directions, and recommendations issued in printed form by the manufacturer of a product addressing handling, installation, erection, and application of the product; manufacturer’s instructions are not prepared especially for the Work.

E. Product data: Product data usually consists of manufacturers' printed data sheets or catalog pages illustrating the products to be incorporated into the project.

F. Samples: Samples are full-size actual products intended to illustrate the products to be incorporated into the project. Sample submittals are often necessary for such characteristics as colors, textures, and other appearance issues.


G. Spare parts: Describe spare parts necessary for the Owner's use in facility operation and maintenance; identify the type and quantity here, but include the actual characteristics of the spare parts in Product as part of the specification of the product.

H. Shop drawings: Shop drawings are prepared specifically for the project to illustrate details, dimensions, and other data necessary for satisfactory fabrication or construction that are not shown in the contract documents. Shop drawings could include graphic line-type drawings, single-line diagrams, or schedules and lists of products and their application.

I. Submittals: Submittals are samples, product data, shop drawings, and others that demonstrate how Contractor intends to conform with the Contract Documents.

J. Tools: Tools are generally defined as items such as special wrenches, gauges, circuit setters, and other similar devices required for the proper operation or maintenance of a system that would not normally be in the Owner's tool kit.

1.03 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide submittals that are specified or reasonably required for construction, operation, and maintenance of the Work.

B. Provide submittal information from only 1 manufacturer for a specified product. Submittals with multiple manufacturers for 1 product will be rejected without review.

C. Where multiple submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each specification section: 1. In order to expedite construction, the Contractor may make more than

1 submittal per specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more than 1 specification section.

2. The only exception to this requirement is when 1 specification section covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section.

D. For example, circuit breakers are a component of switchgear. The switchgear submittal must also contain data for the associated circuit breakers, even though they are covered in a different specification section.

E. Edit all submittals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished.

F. Prepare submittals in the English language. Do not include information in other languages.

G. Present measurements in customary American units (feet, inches, pounds, etc.).

H. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details.

I. Indicate project designated equipment tag numbers from P&IDs for submittal of devices, equipment, and assemblies.


J. Hardcopy submittals: 1. Must be clear and legible, and of sufficient size for presentation of information:

a. Minimum page size will be 8 1/2 inches by 11 inches. b. Maximum page size will be 11 inches by 17 inches.

K. Submittals in electronic media format: 1. General: Provide all information In PC compatible format using Windows

operating system as utilized by the Engineer. 2. Text: Provide text documents and manufacturer’s literature using current

version of Adobe Acrobat (i.e. PDF extension) as utilized by the Owner. 3. Graphics: Provide all graphic submittals (drawings, diagrams) utilizing current

version of Adobe Acrobat (i.e. PDF extension) as utilized by the Owner. 4. Contractor using other software shall be required to provide to the Owner

conclusive evidence of 100 percent data transfer compatibility.

1.04 SUBMITTAL ORGANIZATION

A. Fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component.

B. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections: 1. Submittals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered

pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review.

C. Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section.

D. For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is used.

E. Consolidate electronic format submittals with multiples pages into a single file.

1.05 SUBMITTAL COVER SHEETS

A. Submittal Transmittal Form is provided in Appendix A of this Section: 1. Substitute forms require Owner approval based on forms providing the same

information, statements, and certifications. 2. Submittal Number Field: Required submittal numbering format: Section

number-sequential number-resubmittal number: a. Example: 03_20_00-002-1:

1) “03_20_00” indicates the affected specification is Section 03_20_00. 2) “002” indicates the second submittal under this section. 3) “1” indicates the first resubmittal of the Submittal 03_20_00-002.

b. Contractor may add a separate numbering scheme for Contractor’s internal use. However, all correspondence with Owner must include the required submittal numbering.

3. “From” Field: Provide name and address of company responsible for preparation of submittal. This could be General Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, etc.

4. “General Contractor Reviewer” Field: Verify that the General Contractor has reviewed the submittal by signature.


B. Contractor sign and date submittals indicating review and approval: 1. Signature indicates Contractor certifies that they have satisfied submittal

review responsibilities and constitutes Contractor's written approval of submittal.

2. Submittals without Contractor's signature will be returned to the Contractor unreviewed. Subsequent submittal of this information will be counted as the first resubmittal.

C. Attachments: 1. Specification section: Include with each submittal a copy of the relevant

specification section, including relevant addendum updates. a. Indicate in the left margin, next to each pertinent paragraph, either

compliance with a check (√) or deviation with a consecutive number (1, 2, 3).

b. Provide a list of all numbered deviations with a clear explanation and reason for the deviation.

2. Drawings: Include with each submittal a copy of the relevant Drawing, including relevant addendum updates: a. Indicate either compliance with a check (√) or deviation with a consecutive

number (1, 2, 3). b. Provide a list of all numbered deviations with a clear explanation and

reason for the deviation. c. Provide field dimensions and relationship to adjacent or critical features of

the Work or materials.

D. Contractor: Prepare submittal information in sufficient detail to show compliance with specified requirements: 1. Determine and verify quantities, field dimensions, product dimensions,

specified design and performance criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data.

2. Coordinate submittal with other submittals and with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Check, verify, and revise submittals as necessary to bring them into conformance with Contract Documents and actual field conditions.

1.06 SUBMITTAL CONTENT

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Details:

a. Fabrication drawings: drawn to scale and dimensioned. b. Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all

dimensions. c. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. d. Component layout and identification. e. Weight. f. Finish. g. Temperature limitations, as applicable. h. Nameplate information.


B. Product Information: 1. Product Data:

a. Details: 1) Supplier name and address. 2) Subcontractor name and address.

b. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance: signed by product

manufacturer along with supporting reference data, affidavits, and tests, as appropriate.

5) Manufacturer’s printed recommendations for installation of equipment.

6) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from manufacturer’s documents.

2. Completely fill out a Motor Data Sheet, as specified in Section 26_05_50, for every motor furnished: a. Submit one copy of the Motor Data Sheet to the Engineer for review as

part of the associated equipment submittal. 3. Samples:

a. Details: 1) Submit labeled samples. 2) Samples will not be returned. 3) Provide samples from manufacturer’s standard colors, materials,

products, or equipment lines: a) Clearly label samples to indicate any that represent

non-standard colors, materials, products, or equipment lines and that if selected, will require an increase in Contract Time or Contract Price.

4. Minor or incidental products and equipment schedules: a. Details:

1) Shop Drawings of minor or incidental fabricated products will not be required, unless requested.

2) Submit tabulated lists of minor or incidental products showing the names of the manufacturers and catalog numbers, with Product Data and Samples as required to determine acceptability.

C. Design calculations: 1. Details:

a. Defined in technical sections. b. Calculations must bear the original seal and signature of a Professional

Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located and who provided responsible charge for the design.

D. Qualifications Statements: 1. Details:

a. Defined in technical sections. b. Licensing documentation. c. Certification documentation. d. Education documentation.


E. Quality assurance/control submittals: 1. Mill test reports:

a. Details: 1) Submit certified copies of factory and mill test reports. 2) Do not incorporate Products in the Work which have not passed

testing and inspection satisfactorily. 3) Pay for mill and factory tests.

2. Test reports: a. Details:

1) Include the following information: a) A description of the test. b) List of equipment used. c) Name of the person conducting the test. d) Date and time the test was conducted. e) Ambient temperature and weather conditions. f) All raw data collected. g) Calculated results. h) Clear statement if the test passed or failed the requirements

stated in Contract Documents. i) Signature of the person responsible for the test.

3. Factory Acceptance Test: a. Details: Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during

test. 4. Certificates:

a. Details: Defined in technical sections. 5. Manufacturers’ field reports:

a. Details: Certificate of proper installation. 6. Field Samples:

a. Details: Defined in technical sections. 7. Test Plans:

a. Details: Defined in technical sections.

F. Project management submittals: 1. Applications for payment:

a. Details: 1) As specified in Section 01_29_77.

2. Schedules: a. Details:

1) Progress schedules: As specified in Section 01_32_18. 2) Schedule of values: As specified in Section 01_29_73. 3) Schedule of submittals: As specified in Section 01_32_18.

3. Progress reports and quantity charts: a. Details: As specified in Section 01_32_18.

1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. Contractor: Send submittal to Owner: 1. Provide number of copies of document submittal as below:

a. Total: 6 minimum except where noted. b. Owner: 4 copies. c. Contractor: Remaining copies will be returned.

2. Provide number of sample submittals as below:


a. Total: 2 minimum. b. Owner: 2. c. Contractor: None.

3. Delivery: Deliver submittals to Bill Gase at City of Garland, 2500 E Centerville Road, Garland TX, 75040, unless another mutually agreeable place is designated.

4. Timeliness: Schedule and make submissions in accordance with the requirements of the individual specification sections and in such a sequence as to cause no delay in Work.

5. Contractor assumes risk of expense and delays when proceeding with work related to required submittals without review and acceptance.

B. Owner: Review submittal and provide response: 1. Review description:

a. Owner will be entitled to rely upon the accuracy or completeness of designs, calculations, or certifications made by licensed professionals accompanying a particular submittal whether or not a stamp or seal is required by Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.

b. Owner's review of submittals shall not release Contractor from Contractor's responsibility for performance of requirements of Contract Documents. Neither shall Owner's review release Contractor from fulfilling purpose of installation nor from Contractor's liability to replace defective work.

c. Owner's review of shop drawings, samples, or test procedures will be only for conformance with design concepts and for compliance with information given in Contract Documents.

d. Owner's review does not extend to: 1) Accuracy of dimensions, quantities, or performance of equipment

and systems designed by Contractor. 2) Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures

except when specified or required by Contract Documents. 3) Safety precautions or programs related to safety which shall remain

the sole responsibility of the Contractor. e. Owner can accept or reject any exception at their sole discretion.

2. Review timeframe: a. Except as may be provided in technical specifications, a submittal will be

returned within 30 days. b. When a submittal cannot be returned within the specified period, Owner

will, within a reasonable time after receipt of the submittal, give notice of the date by which that submittal will be returned.

c. Owner’s acceptance of progress schedule containing submittal review times less than those specified or agreed to in writing by Owner will not constitute Owner’s acceptance of review times.

d. Critical submittals: 1) Contractor will notify Owner in writing that timely review of a submittal

is critical to the progress of Work. 2) Owners will provide decision on request.

a) Written agreement by Owner to reduce submittal review time will be made only for unusual situations.

b) Written rejection of request.


3. Schedule delays: a. No adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price will be allowed due to

Owner’s review of submittals, unless all of the following criteria are met: 1) Owner has failed to review and return first submission within the

agreed upon time frame. 2) Contractor demonstrates that delay in progress of Work is directly

attributable to Owner’s failure to return submittal within time indicated and accepted by Owner.

4. Review responses: 1 copy of submittal will be returned to Contractor with one of the following reviewer’s response. a. Reviewed: No corrections noted:

1) Contractor may proceed with the work described in the submittal. b. Resubmittal not required: See comments and make corrections noted:

1) Contractor shall incorporate all review comments into the work, but resubmittal of an amended submittal package is not required.

2) Resubmit only the portion of package necessary to respond to Owner’s comments.

c. Correct and resubmit: See comments and make corrections noted: 1) Contractor shall incorporate the review comments into a complete

revised package, and resubmit it for review. d. Rejected: See comments:

1) Contractor shall develop a new submittal package with materials, equipment, methods, etc. that meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

e. Receipt acknowledged: Filed for record: 1) Contractor has no further action required.

C. Contractor: Prepare resubmittal, if applicable: 1. Clearly identify each correction or change made. 2. Include a response in writing to each of the Owner’s comments or questions

for submittal packages that are resubmitted in the order that the comments or questions were presented throughout the submittal: a. Acceptable responses to Owner’s comments are listed below:

1) “Incorporated” Owner’s comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made.

2) “Response” Owner’s comment not incorporated. Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by Owner.

b. Reviews and re-submittals: 1) Suppliers shall provide re-submittals which include responses to all

submittal review comments separately and at a level of detail commensurate with each comment.

2) Supplier responses shall indicate how the supplier resolved the issue pertaining to each review comment. Responses such as “acknowledged” or “noted” are not acceptable.

3) Re-submittals which do not comply with this requirement may be rejected and returned without review.

4) Contractor shall be allowed no extensions of any kind to any part of their contract due to the rejection of non-compliant submittals.


5) Submittal review comments not addressed by the Contractor in re-submittals shall continue to apply whether restated or not in subsequent reviews until adequately addressed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the reviewing and approving authority.

c. Any resubmittal that does not contain responses to the Owner’s previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Resubmittal. No further review by the Owner will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received.

3. Re-submittal timeframe: a. Contractor shall provide re-submittal within 15 days. b. When a re-submittal cannot be returned within the specified period,

Contractor shall notify Owner in writing. 4. Review costs:

a. Costs incurred by Owner as a result of additional reviews of a particular submittal after the second time it has been reviewed shall be borne by Contractor.

b. Reimbursement to Owner will be made by deducting such costs from Contractor's subsequent progress payments.

1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Provide closeout submittals as specified in Section 01_77_00.



END OF SECTION


APPENDIX A

CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM


CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

Owner: Submittal Number:

Contractor: Package Number:

Date: Project Number:

TO: CITY OF GARLAND RCWWTP CONSTRUCTION SERVICES

From: Submittal Preparer Name & Phone #

Contact Person Name & Phone #

SPECIFICATION NO. SUBJECT OF SUBMITTAL / EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

Check Either (A) or (B):

(A) We have verified that the equipment or material contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified in the project manual or shown on the contract drawings with no exceptions.

(B) We have verified that the equipment or material contained in this submittal meets

all the requirements specified in the project manual or shown on the contract drawings except for the following deviations (list deviations):

Certification Statement: By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable accepted shop drawings and all Contract requirements. General Contractor’s Reviewer’s Signature:

Printed Name: _____________________________________

PM/CM Office Use

Date Received GC to PM/CM:

Date Received PM/CM to Reviewer:

Date Received Reviewer to PM/CM:

Date Sent PM/CM to GC:


SECTION 01_35_16

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements and procedures for performing alterations to existing facilities.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_14_00 – Work Restrictions. b. Section 01_50_00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls. c. Section 01_77_00 – Closeout Procedures.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Alterations schedule: Submit in accordance with requirements for Progress Schedules.

1.03 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES

A. Perform Work in sequences and within times specified in Section 01_14_00.

B. Submit separate detailed sub-schedule for alterations, coordinated with construction schedules. Indicate: 1. Each stage of Work and dates of occupancy of areas. 2. Date of Substantial Completion for each area of alterations as appropriate. 3. Trades and Subcontractors employed in each stage.

1.04 WORK INVOLVED WITH EXISTING OPERATING FACILITIES

A. Perform the Work while existing facility is in operation.

B. Do not jeopardize operation or materially reduce efficiency of existing facility.

C. Coordinate the Work with operation of the facility: 1. Do not begin alterations of designated portions of the Work until specific

permission has been granted in writing by Owner in each case. 2. Owner will coordinate the planned procedure with facility manager.


3. Complete as quickly as possible and with as little delay as possible, connections to existing equipment and utilities, and other operations that interfere with the operation of existing facility.

D. Operational functions of the facility that are required to be performed to facilitate the Work will be performed by facility personnel only.

E. Plant Superintendent will cooperate in every way practicable to assist in expediting the Work.

F. When necessary for the proper operation or maintenance of portions of the facility, reschedule Work operations so that the Work will not conflict with necessary operations or maintenance of the facility.

1.05 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING, AND PROTECTION

A. Assign relocation, removal, cutting, and patching to trades qualified to perform in manner which causes least damage and provide means of returning surfaces to appearance of new construction.

B. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to prevent damage to remaining existing and new construction.

C. Provide temporary enclosures as specified in Section 01_50_00 to separate construction areas from existing building and from areas occupied by Owner, and to provide weather protection.

1.06 SALVAGE MATERIALS

A. Salvage materials: Materials removed from existing facility. Coordinate with Owner which materials shall be salvaged and stored.

B. Materials designated for salvage and reinstallation: 1. Odor control equipment, including but not limited to, covers and duct work.

C. Handling and storage: 1. Prevent damage to salvaged materials during removal, handling, and

transportation of salvaged materials. 2. Prepare salvaged materials for storage. 3. Coordinate storage location with Owner.

D. Pay costs associated with salvaging materials, including handling, transporting, and storage.

1.07 PREPARATION

A. Identify existing materials which shall be patched, extended, or matched.

B. Cut, move or remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow alteration and new construction to proceed, including: 1. Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions. 2. Removal of abandoned items and items serving no useful purpose, such as

abandoned piping, conduit, and wiring.


3. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated concrete.

4. Cleaning of surfaces and removal of surface finishes needed to install new construction and finishes.

5. Disposal of items removed and not salvaged.

C. Cut and remove minimum amount of existing construction in manner which avoids damage to adjacent work.

D. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster, and metals by methods which terminate surfaces in straight line at natural points of division.

E. Perform cutting and patching as specified in Section 01_73_29.

1.08 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK

A. When new construction abuts or finishes flush with existing construction, make smooth transitions and match architecture of existing construction.

B. Match patched construction with adjacent construction in texture and appearance so that patch or transition is invisible at 5-foot distance.

C. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition is impossible, terminate existing surface in neat manner along straight line at natural line of division and provide appropriate trim.

1.09 DAMAGED SURFACES

A. Patch and replace portions of existing finished surfaces which are damaged, lifted and discolored with matching material.

B. Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching finishes.

C. Refinish patched portion of painted or coated surfaces in manner which produces uniform color and texture to entire surface.

D. When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest change of plane exceeding 45 degrees.

1.10 CLEANING

A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Sections 01_50_00 and 01_77_00.

B. Clean Owner-occupied areas daily.

C. Clean spillage, overspray and heavy collection of dust in Owner-occupied areas immediately.

D. At completion of each portion of Work, clean area and make surfaces ready for successive portions of Work.


E. At completion of alterations in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to condition suitable for use by Owner.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_35_21

SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Demolition of portions of structures.




1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings: include: 1. Demolition methods of load bearing structures signed and sealed by structural

Professional Engineer registered in state where Project is located. 2. Method of removing embedded relics and antiques.

B. Submittals for information only: 1. Permits and notices authorizing demolition. 2. Certificates of severance of utility services. 3. Permit for transport and disposal of debris. 4. Demolition procedures and operational sequence.

C. Project record documents: Include locations of service lines and capped utilities.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Dispose of debris in accordance with governing regulatory agencies.

B. Comply with applicable air pollution control regulations.

C. Obtain permits for building demolition, transportation of debris to disposal site and dust control.

1.04 PREPARATION

A. Obtain permission from adjacent property owners when outriggers, swinging cranes, and other equipment may have to traverse adjacent property.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not interfere with use of adjacent buildings. Maintain free and safe passage to and from.


B. Prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures adjacent services, sidewalks, driveways and trees. Provide and place bracing or shoring. Assume liability for movement, settlement, or collapse. Promptly repair damage.

C. Cease operations and notify Owner immediately when safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume operations until safety is restored.

D. Provide erect and maintain barricades, lighting, guardrails, and protective devices as required to protect building occupants, general public, workers, and adjoining property.

1.06 EXISTING SERVICES

A. Arrange and pay for capping and plugging utility services. Disconnect and stub off. Notify affected utility company in advance and obtain approval before starting demolition.

B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services.

1.07 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC

A. Do not close or obstruct roadways without permits.

B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private roadways.

1.08 MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools. equipment, devices, appurtenances, facilities, and services required for performing selective demolition work: 1. Primary Clarifiers No. 1 and 2.

B. Provide and maintain protective devices to prevent injury from falling objects.

C. Locate guardrails in stairwells and around open shafts to protect workers. Post clearly visible warning signs.

D. Cause as little inconvenience to adjacent occupied building areas as possible.

E. Protect landscaping, benchmarks, and existing construction to remain from damage or displacement.

F. Carefully remove designated materials and equipment to be retained by Owner or reinstalled. Deliver materials and equipment when and where directed by Owner. Store and protect materials and equipment to be reinstalled.

1.09 DEMOLITION

A. Demolish designated portions of structures and appurtenances in orderly and careful manner.

B. Assume possession of demolished materials, unless specified otherwise. Remove demolished materials from site at least weekly.


C. Prevent airborne dust. Use water or dust palliative when necessary. Provide and maintain hoses and connections to water main or hydrant.

D. Do not burn materials on site.

E. Immediately upon discovery, remove and dispose of contaminated, vermin-infested, or dangerous materials by safe means so as not to endanger health of workers and public.

F. Rough grade areas affected by demolition.

G. Remove demolished materials, tools, and equipment upon completion of demolition.

1.10 REPAIR

A. Repair damage caused by demolition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_41_00

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Regulatory authorities and codes: 1. Building code. 2. Electrical code. 3. Energy code. 4. Fire code. 5. Mechanical code. 6. Plumbing code.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. International Code Council (ICC): 1. International Building Code (IBC), 2012. 2. International Existing Building Code (IEBC), 2012. 3. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2012. 4. International Fire Code (IFC), 2012. 5. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2012. 6. International Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code, 2014.

C. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ): 1. §217 Subchapter J.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. International Code Council (ICC): 1. Building code:

a. International Building Code (IBC), 2012. b. International Existing Building Code (IEBC), 2012.

2. Electrical code: a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA 70: National Electrical

Code (NEC), 2014. 3. Energy code:

a. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), 2012. 4. Fire code:

a. International Fire Code (IFC), 2012. 5. Mechanical code:

a. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2012. 6. Plumbing code:

a. International Plumbing Code (IPC), 2012.




END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_45_00

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Quality control and control of installation. 2. Tolerances. 3. References. 4. Mock-up requirements. 5. Authority and duties of Owner’s representative or inspector. 6. Sampling and testing. 7. Testing and inspection services. 8. Contractor’s responsibilities.




1.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.

H. When specified, products will be tested and inspected either at point of origin or at Work site: 1. Notify Owner in writing well in advance of when products will be ready for

testing and inspection at point of origin.


2. Do not construe that satisfactory tests and inspections at point of origin is final acceptance of products. Satisfactory tests or inspections at point of origin do not preclude retesting or re-inspection at Work site.

I. Do not ship products which require testing and inspection at point of origin prior to testing and inspection.

1.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When Manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E 329 – Standard for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.

B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

C. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code.

D. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

E. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

1.05 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR INSPECTOR

A. Owner’s Project Representative employed or retained by Owner is authorized to inspect the Work.

B. Inspections may extend to entire or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication, and manufacture of products for the Work.

C. Deficiencies or defects in the Work which have been observed will be called to Contractor’s attention.

D. Inspector will not: 1. Alter or waive provisions of Contract Documents. 2. Inspect Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures

for construction.


3. Accept portions of the Work, issue instructions contrary to intent of Contract Documents, or act as foreman for Contractor. Supervise, control, or direct Contractor’s safety precautions or programs; or inspect for safety conditions on Work site, or of persons thereon, whether Contractor’s employees or others.

E. Inspector will: 1. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist Owner in

determining when the Work is, in general, proceeding in accordance with Contract Documents.

2. Report to Owner whenever Inspector believes that Work is faulty, defective, does not conform to Contract Documents, or has been damaged; or whenever there is defective material or equipment; or whenever Inspector believes the Work should be uncovered for observation or requires special procedures.

1.06 SAMPLING AND TESTING

A. General: 1. Prior to delivery and incorporation in the Work, submit listing of sources of

materials, when specified in sections where materials are specified. 2. When specified in sections where products are specified:

a. Submit sufficient quantities of representative samples of character and quality required of materials to be used in the Work for testing or examination.

b. Test materials in accordance with standards of national technical organizations.

B. Sampling: 1. Furnish specimens of materials when requested. 2. Do not use materials which are required to be tested until testing indicates

satisfactory compliance with specified requirements. 3. Specimens of materials will be taken for testing whenever necessary to

determine quality of material. 4. Assist Owner in preparation of test specimens at site of work, such as soil

samples and concrete test cylinders.

C. Test standards: 1. Perform sampling, specimen preparation, and testing of materials in

accordance with specified standards, and when no standard is specified, in accordance with standard of nationally recognized technical organization.

2. Physical characteristics of materials not particularly specified shall conform to standards published by ASTM, where applicable.

1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Contractor will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform Contractor quality control testing as required in the technical specifications for various work and materials.

B. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an “Owner’s independent testing firm” to perform testing and inspection as required in the technical specifications for various work and materials or stipulated in Section 01_45_24 to confirm Contractor’s compliance with Contract Documents. If Owner’s independent


testing firm is not properly certified to perform specialty inspections required by the building department, Owner will employ and pay for a quality specialty inspection firm to perform required testing and inspection.

C. The Owner’s independent testing firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Owner and requested by the Owner.

D. The qualifications of laboratory that will perform the testing, contracted by the Owner or by the Contractor, shall be as follows: 1. Has authorization to operate in the state where the project is located. 2. Meets “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory

Qualification,” published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. 3. Meets requirements of ASTM E 329. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time specialist on staff to review services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of

accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants.

6. Will submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of NBS during most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection.

E. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off-site testing inspections and source quality control as required by Owner.

F. Reports will be submitted by Owner’s independent testing firm to Owner, Contractor, and Owner in triplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Owner.

G. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm, furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Owner’s independent testing firm 48 hours prior to expected time for

operations requiring testing. 2. Make arrangements with Owner’s independent testing firm and pay for

additional samples and tests required for Contractor’s use.

H. Limitations of authority of testing Laboratory: Owner’s independent testing firm or Laboratory is not authorized to:


1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

I. Testing and employment of an Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

J. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same Owner’s independent testing firm on instructions by Owner. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price.

K. The Owner’s independent testing firm responsibilities will include: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in

performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with

specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract

Documents. 5. Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-

conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Owner. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.

L. Owner’s independent testing firm individual test reports: After each test, Owner’s independent testing firm will promptly submit electronically and three hard copies of report to Owner and to Contractor. When requested by Owner, the Owner’s independent testing firm will provide interpretation of test results. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Certified test results stamped and signed by a registered Engineer in the State

of Texas. 10. Summary of conformance with Contract Documents.

M. Owner’s independent testing firm will provide monthly report of certification to identify all work performed for special inspections and other contract requirements on this project. The following certified monthly report at a minimum will include but not limited to: 1. Results of testing. 2. Testing logs. 3. Outstanding deficiencies.


4. Various statistical data. 5. Testing curves (up to 4 types) as required by the Owner.

1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory personnel and provide access to construction and manufacturing operations.

B. Secure and deliver to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.

C. Provide to Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory and Owner preliminary mix design proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by testing laboratory.

D. Furnish electronically and 5 hard copies of product test reports.

E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to construction to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at Work site or at source of product to be

tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples.

F. Notify Owner’s independent testing firm or laboratory 48 hours in advance of when observations, inspections and testing is needed for laboratory to schedule and perform in accordance with their notice of response time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_45_24

SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: This Section describes the requirements for providing special tests and inspections




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_45_00 – Quality Control.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C 140 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry

Units and Related Units. 2. C 270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 3. C 780 – Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 4. C 1019 – Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 5. C 1314 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.

B. International Building Code (IBC).

1.03 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section describes special tests and inspections of structural assemblies and components to be performed in compliance with IBC.

B. These special tests and inspections are in addition to the requirements specified in Section 01_45_00, and by the individual Sections.

C. The Owner will employ 1 or more inspectors who will provide special inspections during construction.

1.04 INSPECTION

A. Duties of Special Inspector: 1. General: Required duties of the Special Inspector are described in IBC.


1.05 TESTS

A. Selection of the material required to be tested shall be by the Owner's Testing Laboratory and not the Contractor.

1.06 SPECIAL TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. Testing laboratory: Special tests will be performed by the Owner's testing laboratory as specified in Section 01_45_00.

B. Owner reserves the right to positive material identification tests: 1. Contractor must make materials available for testing.

C. The following types of work require special inspection as described in IBC, Refer to the following verification, testing and inspection schedules: 1. Appendix A, Cast-In-Place Concrete Special Inspection Schedule. 2. Appendix B, Essential Architectural, Mechanical And Electrical Inspection

Schedule. 3. Appendix D, Soils Verification And Inspection Schedule. 4. Appendix E, Structural Steel Special Inspection Schedule. 5. Piling, drilled piers, and caissons.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall allow time necessary for Special Inspections as listed above.

B. Sufficient notice shall be given so that the Special Inspections can be performed. This includes time for off-site Special Inspectors to plan the inspection and travel to site.

3.02 PROCEDURE

A. The Special Inspector will immediately notify the Owner of any corrections required and follow notification with appropriate documentation.

B. The Contractor shall not proceed until the work is satisfactory to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


APPENDIX A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE

Verification and Inspection Reference Standard

Frequency of Inspection

Continuous During

Task Listed

Periodic During Task

Listed

1. Inspection of reinforcing steel, including prestressing tendons, and placement.

– X

2. Inspection of reinforcing steel welding. IBC Table 1704.3, Item 5B

– –

3. Inspect bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete.

X –

4. Verifying use of required design mix. – X

5. At the time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete.

X –

6. Inspection of concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques.

X –

7. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques.

– X


APPENDIX B ESSENTIAL ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL

INSPECTION SCHEDULE



Continuous During

Task Listed


Listed

1. Suspended ceiling system including anchorage.

– X

2. Anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency standby power.

– X

3. Anchorage of other electrical or mechanical equipment over 1,000 lb. on floors or roofs.

– X

4. Anchorage of ducts greater than 6 s.f. in cross-section.

– X

5. Anchorage of pipelines greater than 8 inches in diameter.

– X

6. Steel storage racks supporting pipelines. – X

7. Chlorine cylinders and anchorage in Chemical Building.

X –

8. Elevator installation. – X


APPENDIX D SOILS VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE



Continuous During

Task Listed


Listed

1. Verify materials below footings are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity.

– X

2. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material.

– X

3. Perform classification and testing of controlled fill materials.

– X

4. Verify use of proper materials, densities, and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of controlled fill.

X –

5. Prior to placement of controlled fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly.

– X


APPENDIX E STRUCTURAL STEEL SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE


Frequency of Inspection Continuous During Task

Listed

Periodic During

Task Listed 1. Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and

washers:

a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved construction documents.

– X

b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance required.

– X

2. Inspection of high-strength bolting: a. Bearing-type connections. – X b. Slip-critical connections. X X

3. Material verification of structural steel: a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM

standards specified in the approved construction documents.

– X

b. Manufacturers' certified mill test reports. X – 4. Material verification of weld filler materials:

a. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification in the approved construction documents.

– X

b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance required.

– X

5. Inspection of welding: a. Structural steel: – –

1) Complete and partial penetration groove welds.

X –

2) Multi-pass fillet welds. X – 3) Single-pass fillet welds > 5/16". X – 4) Single-pass fillet welds < 5/16". – X 5) Floor and deck welds. – X

b. Reinforcing steel: – – 1) Verification of weldability of reinforcing steel

other than ASTM A 706. – X

2) Reinforcing steel-resisting flexural and axial forces in boundary elements of special reinforced concrete shear walls and shear reinforcement.

X –

3) Shear reinforcement. X – 4) "Form Saver" (reinforcing couplers). X –

6. Inspection of steel frame joint details for compliance with approved construction documents:

X

a. Details such as bracing and stiffening. X – b. Member locations. X – c. Application of joint details at each connection. X

7. Seismic force resisting systems identified on structural plans.

X –


SECTION 01_50_00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Furnishing, maintaining, and removing construction facilities and temporary

controls, including temporary utilities, construction aids, barriers and enclosures, security, access roads, temporary controls, project sign, field offices and sheds, and removal after construction.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_14_00 – Work Restrictions. b. Section 01_33_00 – Submittal Procedures. c. Section 46_05_10 – Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

1.02 REFERENCE

A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: For products specified to be furnished under this Section, submit product data as specified in Section 01_33_00.

B. For temporary piping systems: 1. Submit layout drawings showing proposed routing of piping, including

proposed pipe support and pipe restraint locations. 2. Submit product data for piping, fittings, appurtenances, restraints, supports,

and all other components of the temporary piping system. 3. Submit all information at least 28 days prior to when each temporary piping

system is scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment by Owner.

1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Temporary electrical power: 1. Arrange with local utility to provide adequate temporary electrical service.


2. Provide and maintain adequate jobsite power distribution facilities conforming to applicable Laws and Regulations.

3. Provide, maintain, and pay for electric power for performance of the Work.

B. Temporary electrical lighting: 1. In work areas, provide temporary lighting sufficient to maintain lighting levels

during working hours not less than lighting levels required by OSHA and state agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.

2. When available, permanent lighting facilities may be used in lieu of temporary facilities: a. Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, replace bulbs, lamps, or

tubes used by Contractor for lighting.

C. Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating: 1. Heat and ventilate work areas to protect the Work from damage by freezing,

high temperatures, weather, and to provide safe environment for workers. 2. Permanent heating system may be utilized when sufficiently completed to

allow safe operation.

D. Temporary water: 1. Pay for and construct facilities necessary to furnish potable water for human

consumption and non-potable water for use during construction. 2. Remove temporary piping and connections and restore affected portions of the

facility to original condition before Substantial Completion. 3. Pay for water used for construction prior to Substantial Completion. Owner will

provide water for 7-day final test. 4. Development of potable water supply:

a. Potable water is not available at construction site. b. Provide potable water for human consumption during construction period. c. Furnish potable water that meets requirements of Laws and Regulations.

5. Development of non-potable water supply: a. Post ample signs throughout the work area warning that plant water is not

potable. b. Non-potable water is available from hydrants or hose valves within plant

without cost. When combined demand of the Work and plant exceeds plant supply capacity, provide additional temporary supply capacity.

E. Temporary sanitary facilities: 1. Provide suitable and adequate sanitary facilities that are in compliance with

applicable Laws and Regulations. 2. At completion of the Work, remove sanitary facilities and leave site in neat and

sanitary condition.

F. Temporary fire protection: Provide sufficient number of fire extinguishers of type and capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities.

G. First aid: Post first aid facilities and information posters conforming to requirements of OSHA and other applicable Laws and Regulations in readily accessible locations.

H. Utilities in existing facilities: As specified in Section 01_14_00.


1.05 CONSTRUCTION AIDS

A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by Laws and Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property.

B. Use construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads.

C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to assure adequate load bearing capability: 1. When requested, submit design calculations by professional registered

engineer prior to application of loads. 2. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only.

D. Accident prevention: 1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and

property. 2. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations. 3. Guard machinery and equipment, and eliminate other hazards. 4. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety

inspections of the Work. 5. Before commencing construction work, take necessary action to comply with

provisions for safety and accident prevention.

E. Barricades: 1. Place barriers at ends of excavations and along excavations to warn

pedestrian and vehicular traffic of excavations. 2. Provide barriers with flashing lights after dark. 3. Keep barriers in place until excavations are entirely backfilled and compacted. 4. Barricade excavations to prevent persons from entering excavated areas in

streets, roadways, parking lots, treatment plants, or other public or private areas.

F. Warning devices and barricades: Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas and conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers: 1. Devices shall conform to minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency

which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.

G. Hazards in public right-of-way: 1. Mark at reasonable intervals, trenches, and other continuous excavations in

public right-of-way, running parallel to general flow of traffic, with traffic cones, barricades, or other suitable visual markers during daylight hours: a. During hours of darkness, provide markers with torches, flashers, or other

adequate lights. 2. At intersections or for pits and similar excavations, where traffic may

reasonably be expected to approach head on, protect excavations by continuous barricades: a. During hours of darkness, provide warning lights at close intervals.

H. Hazards in protected areas: Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard.


I. Above grade protection: On multi-level structures, provide safety protection that meets requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.

J. Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on Project site from injury, damage, or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or other agents with substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with hazards.

1.06 SECURITY

A. Make adequate provision for protection of the work area against fire, theft, and vandalism, and for protection of public against exposure to injury.

1.07 ACCESS ROADS

A. General: 1. Build and maintain access roads to and on site of the Work to provide for

delivery of material and for access to existing and operating plant facilities on site.

2. Build and maintain dust free roads which are suitable for travel at 20 miles per hour.

B. Off-site access roads: 1. Build and maintain graded earth roads. 2. Build roads only in public right-of-way or easements obtained by Owner. 3. Obtain rights-of-way or easements when electing to build along other

alignment.

C. On-site access roads: 1. Maintain access roads to storage areas and other areas to which frequent

access is required. 2. Maintain similar roads to existing facilities on site of the Work to provide

access for maintenance and operation. 3. Protect buried vulnerable utilities under temporary roads with steel plates,

wood planking, or bridges. 4. Maintain on-site access roads free of mud. Under no circumstances shall

vehicles leaving the site track mud off the site onto the public right-of-way.

1.08 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Dust control: 1. Prevent dust nuisance caused by operations, unpaved roads, excavation,

backfilling, demolition, or other activities. 2. Control dust by sprinkling with water, use of dust palliatives, modification of

operations, or other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Noise control: 1. In inhabited areas, particularly residential, perform operations in manner to

minimize noise. 2. In residential areas, take special measures to suppress noise during night

hours.


C. Mud control: 1. Prevent mud nuisance caused by construction operations, unpaved roads,

excavation, backfilling, demolition, or other activities.

1.09 PROJECT SIGN

A. Provide and maintain Project identification sign consisting of painted 8-foot wide by 4-foot high exterior grade plywood and minimum 10-foot long, 4 by 4 lumber posts, set in ground at least 3 feet, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter using no more than 5 sign colors: 1. List at least the title of the Project, and names of the Owner and Contractor. 2. Contractor’s and Owner’s names shall be identified in upper right hand corner

underneath the bid number.

B. Erect Project identification sign where directed.

1.10 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. Contractor's field office: 1. Maintain on Project Site weathertight space in which to keep copies of

Contract Documents, progress schedule, shop drawings, and other relevant documents.

2. Provide field office with adequate space to examine documents, and provide lighting and telephone service in that space.

1.11 REMOVAL

A. Remove temporary buildings and furnishings before inspection for Substantial Completion or when directed.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.

C. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 24 inches and grade to match surrounding conditions.

D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.

1.12 TEMPORARY PROCESS PIPING

A. Contractor shall provide all piping, appurtenances, and other materials as required to provide temporary piping systems as specified in this Section and as needed to perform the Work.

B. Contractor shall field route piping as needed and as field conditions dictate and determine appropriate lengths of piping and quantity/type of pipe fittings needed to construct temporary piping system. Do not block access points such as stairs, doors, and walkways to existing facilities unless approved in writing by the Owner.

C. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction, changes sizes, and at ends: 1. When piping is buried, use concrete thrust block or mechanical restraints. 2. When piping is exposed or under water, use mechanical or structural

restraints.


3. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional area of the piping by the operating pressure of the piping.

D. Temporary piping systems shall be installed in a manner that will not damage existing or new facilities.

E. Unless indicated otherwise, piping material, including gaskets, shall be suitable for the process fluid requiring temporary piping.

F. After temporary piping system is no longer required: 1. Remove temporary piping system. 2. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary piping

system. 3. Restore existing facilities to original condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used. END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_60_00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Product requirements; product selection; product options and substitutions; quality assurance; delivery, handling, and storage; and manufacturer’s instructions.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_75_17 – Commissioning and Process Start-up. b. Section 01_78_23 – Operation and Maintenance Data. c. Section 09_96_01 – High-Performance Coatings.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Execution: Inclusive of performance, workmanship, installation, erection, application, field fabrication, field quality control, and protection of installed products.

B. Products: Inclusive of material, equipment, systems, shop fabrications, mixing, source quality control.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 – Drinking Water System Components. 2. 372 – Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content.

1.04 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.

B. Provide products by same manufacturer when products are of similar nature, unless otherwise specified.

C. Provide identical products when products are required in quantity.


D. Provide products with interchangeable parts whenever possible.

E. Require each equipment manufacturer to have maintenance facilities meeting the following requirements: 1. Minimum 3 years operational experience. 2. Location in continental United States. 3. Equipment and tools capable of making repairs. 4. Staff qualified to make repairs. 5. Inventory of maintenance spare parts.

1.05 LEAD LIMITS

A. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

1.06 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. When products are specified by standard or specification designations of technical societies, organizations, or associations only, provide products that meet or exceed reference standard and Specifications.

B. When products are specified with names of manufacturers but no model numbers or catalog designations, provide: 1. Products by one of named manufacturers that meet or exceed Specifications. 2. Accepted or equal.

C. When products are specified with names of manufacturers and model numbers or catalog designations, provide: 1. Products with model numbers or catalog designations by one of named

manufacturers. 2. Accepted or equal.

D. When products are specified with names of manufacturers, but with brand or trade names, model numbers, or catalog designations by one manufacturer only, provide: 1. Products specified by brand or trade name, model number, or catalog

designation. 2. Products by one of named manufacturers proven in accordance with

requirements for or equals to meet or exceed quality, appearance and performance of specified brand or trade name, model number, or catalog designation.

3. Accepted or equal.

E. When Products are specified with only one manufacturer followed by "or Equal," provide: 1. Products meeting or exceeding Specifications by specified manufacturer. 2. Accepted or equal.

1.07 SUBMITTALS 1. Calculations of the weighted average of lead content in each component that

comes in contact with water conforming to the maximum lead limits in the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

2. Certification by an independent ANSI accredited third party, including, but not limited to, NSF International, as being lead free.


1.08 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. General: Whenever a product is specified using a name of a particular manufacturer or supplier, the specific item cited shall be understood as establishing type, function, dimension, appearance, and quality desired. Other manufacturer’s products will be considered for acceptance provided sufficient information is submitted to the Owner for review to determine that the products proposed are equivalent to those named.

1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Employ entities that meet or exceed specified qualifications to execute the Work.

B. Inspect conditions before executing subsequent portions of the Work. Accept responsibility for correcting unsatisfactory conditions upon executing subsequent portions of the Work.

C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.

1.10 DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Prepare products for shipment by: 1. Applying grease and lubricating oil to bearings and similar items. 2. Separately packing or otherwise suitably protecting bearings. 3. Tagging or marking products to agree with delivery schedule or shop

drawings. 4. Including complete packing lists and bills of material with each shipment. 5. Packaging products to facilitate handling and protection against damage

during transit, handling, and storage. 6. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and

installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.

B. Mandatory requirements prior to shipment of equipment: 1. Owner accepted shop drawings. 2. Owner accepted Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in

Section 01_75_17. 3. Submit draft operations and maintenance manuals, as specified in

Section 01_78_23.

C. Transport products by methods that avoid product damage. Deliver products in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging.

D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage.

E. Upon delivery, promptly inspect shipments: 1. Verify compliance with Contract Documents, correct quantities, and

undamaged condition of products. 2. Immediately store and protect products and materials until installed in Work. 3. Acceptance of shipment does not constitute final acceptance of equipment.


F. Furnish covered, weather-protected storage structures providing a clean, dry, noncorrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment and special equipment to be incorporated into this project: 1. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the “instructions for

storage” of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc.

2. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer’s instructions for storage to the Owner prior to storage of all equipment and materials.

3. Corroded, damaged, or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project.

4. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in an application for payment.

G. Store products with seals and legible labels intact.

H. Store moisture sensitive products in weathertight enclosures.

I. Maintain products within temperature and humidity ranges required or recommended by manufacturer.

J. Maintain storage areas at ambient temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

K. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces.

L. Exterior storage of fabricated products: 1. Place on aboveground supports that allow for drainage. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. 3. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation under covering.

M. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent materials mixing with foreign matter.

N. Provide access for inspection.

O. Maintain equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation and industry standards, including oil changes, rotation, etc. Provide a log of equipment maintenance to the Owner on a monthly basis: 1. Rotation log shall include, as a minimum, the equipment identification, date

stored, date removed from storage, copy of manufacturer’s recommended storage guidelines, date of rotation of equipment, and signature of party performing rotation.

P. Protection after installation: 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from

damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed.

1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Deliver, handle, store, install, erect, or apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, Contract Documents, and industry standards.


B. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and maintained under required conditions.

C. Provide operations and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01_78_23: 1. Draft versions submitted prior to equipment shipment to project. 2. Final version submitted and accepted no later than 60 days prior to Owner

Training.

1.12 SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Provide spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools as required by Specifications.

B. Box, tag, and clearly mark items.

C. Store spare parts, maintenance products, and special tools in enclosed, weather-proof, and lighted facility during the construction period: 1. Contractor is responsible for spare parts and special tools until acceptance by

Owner. 2. Protect parts subject to deterioration, such as ferrous metal items and

electrical components with appropriate lubricants, desiccants, or hermetic sealing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Spare parts and special tools inventory list, see Appendix A: 1. Equipment tag number. 2. Equipment manufacturer. 3. Subassembly component, if appropriate. 4. Quantity. 5. Storage location.

B. Large items: 1. Weight: Greater than 50 pounds. 2. Size: Greater than 24 inches wide by 18 inches high by 36 inches long. 3. Stored individually. 4. Clearly labeled:

a. Equipment tag number. b. Equipment manufacturer. c. Subassembly component, if appropriate.

C. Smaller items: 1. Weight: Less than 50 pounds. 2. Size: Less than 24 inches wide by 18 inches high by 36 inches long. 3. Stored in spare parts box. 4. Clearly labeled:

a. Equipment tag number. b. Equipment manufacturer. c. Subassembly component, if appropriate.


D. Spare parts and special tools box: 1. Wooden box:

a. Size: 24 inches wide by 18 inches high by 36 inches long. 2. Hinged wooden cover:

a. Strap type hinges. b. Locking hasp. c. Spare parts inventory list taped to underside of cover.

3. Coating: As specified in Section 09_96_01. 4. Clearly labeled:

a. The words “Spare Parts and/or Special Tools.” b. Equipment tag number. c. Equipment manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP


3.02 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Owner may request advanced delivery of spare parts and special tools: 1. Deduct the delivered items from inventory and provide transmittal

documentation.

B. Immediately prior to the date of Substantial Completion, arrange to deliver spare parts and special tools to Owner at a location on site chosen by the Owner: 1. Provide itemized list of spare parts and special tools that matches the

identification tag attached to each item. 2. Owner will review the inventory and the itemized list to confirm it is complete

and in good condition prior to signing for acceptance.

3.03 ATTACHMENTS

A. Appendix A – Spare Parts and Special Tools Inventory List.

B. Appendix B – Sample Substitution Request Form.

END OF SECTION


APPENDIX A SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS INVENTORY LIST

[Specification Number and Title]

[Equipment Tag Number]

[Equipment Manufacturer]

Quantity Subassembly Component

Description

Manufacturer’s Part Number

Storage Location


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

Project:

To:

Re:

Substitution Request Number: From: Date: Engineer Project Number: Contract For:

Specification Title: Description:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: New product 2-5 years old 5-10 yrs old More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

Point-by-point comparative data attached – REQUIRED BY ENGINEER Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation:

Project: Architect:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: No Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM (continued)

The Undersigned certifies: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently

become apparent are to be waived. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including Engineer design, detailing, and construction costs caused by

the substitution. Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:

Telephone: Attachments: ENGINEER’s REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution accepted – Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01_33_00. Substitution accepted as noted – Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01_33_00. Substitution rejected – Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late – Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer Engineer


SECTION 01_73_29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Cutting and patching existing and new construction.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_33_00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00.

B. Cutting and patching plan: 1. Submit details of proposed construction before cutting and patching

construction commences affecting: a. Work of Owner or of others. b. Structural integrity of element of Project.

2. Cutting and patching plan shall include the following: a. Identification of Work. b. Description of affected construction. c. Necessity for cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. d. Description of proposed construction. e. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Comply with specifications and standards for products involved.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure structural integrity of affected portion of Work.

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage and persons from injury.

C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching, and maintain excavations free from water.

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, fit, and patch when required to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Remove and replace construction not conforming to Contract Documents. 3. Remove samples of installed construction as specified for testing. 4. Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of piping

and electrical conduit.

B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.

C. Openings in existing concrete and masonry: 1. Create openings by:

a. Saw cutting completely through concrete or masonry. b. Scoring edges of opening with saw to at least 1-inch depth on both

surfaces (when accessible) and removing concrete or masonry by chipping.

2. Do not allow saw cuts to extend beyond limits of opening. 3. Make corners square and true by combination of core drilling and grinding or

chipping. 4. Prevent debris from falling into adjacent tanks or channels in service or from

damaging existing equipment and other facilities.

D. Sizing of openings in existing concrete or masonry: 1. Make openings sufficiently large to permit final alignment of pipe and fittings

without deflections. 2. Allow adequate space for packing around pipes and conduit to ensure

watertightness.

E. Grouting pipes in place: 1. Sandblast concrete surfaces and thoroughly clean sand and other foreign

material from surfaces prior to placing grout. 2. Grout pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits in place by pouring grout under a

head of at least 4 inches. Vibrate grout into place. Completely fill the spaces occupied by pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits.

3. Water cure the grout.

F. Connections to existing pipes: 1. Cut existing pipe square.


2. Properly prepare the ends for the connection. 3. Repair any damage to existing lining and coating.

G. Rehabilitate all areas affected by removal of existing equipment, equipment pads and bases, piping, supports, electrical panels, electric devices, and conduits such that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains: 1. Fill areas in existing floors, walls, and ceilings from removed piping, conduit

and fasteners with non-shrink grout and finish smooth. 2. Remove concrete bases for equipment and supports by:

a. Saw cutting clean, straight lines with a depth equal to the concrete cover over reinforcement minus 1/2 inch below finished surface. Do not cut existing reinforcement on floors.

b. Chip concrete within scored lines and cut exposed reinforcing steel and anchor bolts.

c. Patch with non-shrink grout to match adjacent grade and finish. 3. Terminate abandoned piping and conduits with blind flanges, caps, or plugs.

H. Treat existing concrete reinforcement as follows: 1. Where existing reinforcement is to remain, protect, clean, and extend into new

concrete. 2. Where existing reinforcement is not to be retained, cut off as follows:

a. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, cut reinforcement flush with concrete surface at the removal line.

b. Where concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, cut reinforcement 2 inches below the surface, paint ends with epoxy, and patch holes with dry pack mortar.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_75_17

TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements for equipment and system testing and facility start-up, including the following: 1. Start-up plan. 2. Performance testing. 3. General start-up and testing procedures. 4. Functional testing. 5. Operational testing. 6. Certificate of proper installation. 7. Services of manufacturer's representatives. 8. Training of Owner's personnel.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 23_05_94 – Mechanical Equipment Testing. b. Section 46_05_10 – Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

1.02 GENERAL TESTING, TRAINING, AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS

A. Contract requirements: Testing, training, and start-up are requisite to the satisfactory completion of the Contract.

B. Complete testing, training, and start-up within the Contract Times.

C. Allow realistic durations in the Progress Schedule for testing, training, and start-up activities.

D. Furnish labor, power, chemicals, tools, equipment, instruments, and services required for and incidental to completing functional testing, performance testing, and operational testing.

E. Provide competent, experienced technical representatives of equipment manufacturers for assembly, installation and testing guidance, and operator training.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Organization chart for conducting start-up and testing. 2. Detailed start-up and testing plan with schedule, for each equipment item and

system. Submit schedules showing testing work not less than 120 days in advance of first scheduled tests. Schedules shall list each piece of equipment or component to be tested. Schedules shall include sequence and duration for all testing required including performance testing, functional testing, and operational testing.

3. An overall schedule and subsequent updates, presenting the contractor’s plan for testing the equipment and systems installed under this contract.

4. A detailed schedule establishing the expected time period (calendar dates) when the contractor plans to commence testing of the completed systems, along with a description of the temporary systems and installations planned to allow testing to take place.

5. A summary of the contractor’s Quality Assurance Manager’s qualifications. 6. The original and three copies of all records produced during the testing

program. 7. Acceptance criteria required to release equipment and systems for start-up. 8. Manufacturer’s certification of proper installation of equipment before testing

begins. 9. Operation and maintenance instruction manual for each equipment item and

system to be tested as specified in Section 01_78_23. 10. Refer to Article 1.10, Manufacturer’s Field Services, for additional

requirements. 11. Refer to other specification sections for additional requirements.

B. Test Procedures and Forms: 1. The contractor shall prepare and submit for review:

a. All testing procedures. b. All testing forms. c. Required information on all testing equipment.

2. Written testing procedures shall be submitted for initial review at least 90 days prior to the test for which the procedures have been prepared. Failure to submit complete test forms and procedures at least 90 days prior to the subject test shall result in rescheduling of the test, and any resulting delay shall be solely the responsibility of the contractor.

3. Detailed testing procedures setting forth step-by-step descriptions of the procedures proposed by the contractor for the systematic testing of all equipment and systems installed under this contract. a. Procedures shall include statement indicating test objective, test

descriptions, forms, and checklists to be used to control and document the required tests.

b. Once the detailed Test Procedures Submittals have been reviewed by the Owner and returned stamped either “no exceptions noted” or “make corrections noted,” the tests may be scheduled.

c. Upon completion of each required test, a copy of the signed-off test procedures shall be submitted as test documentation.


4. The contractor shall develop test plans detailing the coordinated, sequential testing of each item of equipment and system installed under this contract. Each test procedure shall be specific to the item of equipment or system to be tested. Generic or general test forms and procedures shall not be acceptable. Test procedures shall identify by specific equipment of tag number each device or control station to be manipulated or observed during the test procedures and the specific results to be observed or obtained. Test procedures shall also be specific as to support systems required to complete the test work, temporary systems required during the test work, Subcontractors’ and Manufacturers’ Representatives to be present, and expected test duration.

5. Test forms shall include, among other items, tag and name of equipment or device to be tested, date, names of persons conducting and witnessing (where applicable) the tests, blanks for entry of test data, description of each data item, check offs for each completed test or test step, and place for signature of person conducting tests and for the witnessing person (as applicable).

6. Test procedures and forms shall be subject to Owner’s approval. 7. Once the Owner has reviewed and taken no exception to the contractor’s test

plans, the contractor shall reproduce the plans in sufficient number for the contractor’s purposes and an additional six copies for delivery to the Owner. No test work shall begin until the contractor has delivered the specified number of final test plans to the Owner.

C. Test Reports: 1. Submit preliminary copies of test data in field report form within two days after

completion of each test. 2. Submit five bound copies of field test reports of checkout and testing of all

equipment within 30 days after completion of testing. 3. Test Reports for each phase of testing for each equipment system, shall be

submitted and approved prior to start of next test or start-up phase.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. In accordance with Specification Section 01_78_23.

1.04 START-UP PLAN

A. Submit start-up plan for each piece of equipment and each system not less than 3 weeks prior to planned initial start-up of equipment or system.

B. Provide detailed sub-network of Progress Schedule with the following activities identified: 1. Manufacturer's services. 2. Installation certifications. 3. Operator training. 4. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manual. 5. Functional testing. 6. Performance testing. 7. Operational testing.

C. Provide testing plan with test logs for each item of equipment and each system when specified. Include testing of alarms, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows, pressures, vibrations, sound levels, and other parameters.


D. Provide summary of shutdown requirements for existing systems that are necessary to complete start-up of new equipment and systems.

E. Revise and update start-up plan based upon review comments, actual progress, or to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities.

1.05 PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Test equipment for proper performance at point of manufacture or assembly when specified.

B. When source quality control testing is specified: 1. Demonstrate equipment meets specified performance requirements. 2. Provide certified copies of test results. 3. Do not ship equipment until certified copies have received written acceptance

from Owner. Written acceptance does not constitute final acceptance. 4. Perform testing as specified in the equipment sections.

C. Include costs associated with witnessing performance tests in the bid price. Include costs for 2 Owner's representative for travel, lodging, transportation to and from lodging, and 50 dollars meal allowance per person per day.

1.06 GENERAL START-UP AND TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Mechanical systems: As specified in the individual equipment Sections and Sections 23_05_94 and 46_05_10: 1. Remove rust preventatives and oils applied to protect equipment during

construction. 2. Flush lubrication systems and dispose of flushing oils. Recharge lubrication

system with lubricant recommended by manufacturer. 3. Flush fuel system and provide fuel for testing and start-up. 4. Install and adjust packing, mechanical seals, O-rings, and other seals.

Replace defective seals. 5. Remove temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign objects installed to

prevent damage during shipment, storage, and erection. 6. Check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation and for freedom of

moving parts before connecting driver. 7. Perform cold alignment and hot alignment to manufacturer's tolerances. 8. Adjust V-belt tension and variable pitch sheaves. 9. Inspect hand and motorized valves for proper adjustment. Tighten packing

glands to insure no leakage, but permit valve stems to rotate without galling. Verify valve seats are positioned for proper flow direction.

10. Tighten leaking flanges or replace flange gasket. Inspect screwed joints for leakage.

11. Install gratings, safety chains, handrails, shaft guards, and sidewalks prior to operational testing.

B. Electrical systems: As specified in the individual equipment Sections: 1. Perform insulation resistance tests on all conductors except conductors for

120 V lighting and conductors for control signals that are completely internal to electrical panels.

2. Perform continuity tests on grounding systems. 3. Test and set switchgear and circuit breaker relays for proper operation.


4. Perform direct current high potential tests on all cables that will operate at more than 2,000 volts. Obtain services of independent testing lab to perform tests.

5. Check motors for actual full load amperage draw. Compare to nameplate value.

C. Instrumentation systems: As specified in Division 26 and the individual equipment Sections: 1. Bench or field calibrate instruments and make required adjustments and

control point settings. 2. Leak test pneumatic controls and instrument air piping. 3. Energize transmitting and control signal systems, verify proper operation,

ranges, and settings.

1.07 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Perform checkout and performance testing as specified in the individual equipment Sections.

B. Functionally test mechanical and electrical equipment, and instrumentation and controls systems for proper operation after general start-up and testing tasks have been completed.

C. Demonstrate proper rotation, alignment, speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound level, adjustments, and calibration. Perform initial checks in the presence of and with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative.

D. Demonstrate proper operation of each instrument loop function including alarms, local and remote controls, instrumentation, and other equipment functions. Generate signals with test equipment to simulate operating conditions in each control mode.

E. Conduct continuous 8-hour test under full load conditions. Replace parts that operate improperly.

1.08 OPERATIONAL TESTING

A. After completion of operator training, conduct operational test of the entire facility. Demonstrate satisfactory operation of equipment and systems in actual operation.

B. Conduct operational test for continuous 7-day period.

C. Owner will provide operations personnel, power, fuel, and other consumables for duration of test.

D. Immediately correct defects in material, workmanship, or equipment that became evident during operational test.

E. Repeat operational test when malfunctions or deficiencies cause shutdown or partial operation of the facility or results in performance that is less than specified.


1.09 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION

A. At completion of Functional Testing, furnish written report prepared and signed by manufacturer's authorized representative, certifying equipment: 1. Has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated. 2. Is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 3. Is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions. 4. Operates within the allowable limits for vibration. 5. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as

part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and functioning.

6. Control logic for start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown have been tested and are properly functioning.

B. Furnish written report prepared and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor certifying: 1. Motor control logic that resides in motor control centers, control panels, and

circuit boards furnished by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor has been calibrated and tested and is properly operating.

2. Control logic for equipment start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating.

3. Co-sign the reports along with the manufacturer's representative and subcontractors.

1.10 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. General: 1. Where manufacturer’s services are specified, contractor shall furnish a

qualified Manufacturer’s Representative to provide these services.

B. Definitions: 1. For purposes of furnishing Manufacturers’ Representative services, the

following definitions shall apply: a. Manufacturer’s Representative: Authorized employee of manufacturer

who is factory trained and knowledgeable in technical aspects of their products and systems.

b. Workday or Instructor-Day: Eight (8) hours straight time on the jobsite between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, or holidays; does not include travel time. Size of manufacturer’s field services team shall not be used to reduce the specified number of days on the jobsite.

C. Field Services: 1. Contractor shall coordinate all field services with the manufacturer, the

Manufacturer’s Representative, and owner. Coordination shall begin during the preparation of equipment bids so that manufacturer can adequately determine the number of trips and Workdays that contractor will require based on contractor’s sequence for testing, start-up, and training. Contractor’s sequence will require staged testing and start-up for some equipment and systems as required in this Specification Section 01_75_17, Testing and Facility Start-Up:


a. If contractor installation of equipment is insufficiently complete to allow satisfactory completion of required field services, contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs associated with satisfactory completion of required field services.

2. Manufacturer’s Representative shall perform the following services in separate trips to the project site. Number of trips and level of effort is the minimum requirement and applies to each type of equipment furnished by manufacturer. Also, the contractor and manufacturer shall provide additional trips and effort as needed to meet required quality of Work: a. Installation Assistance: As required. b. Installation Inspection: One trip after installation for a duration as needed

but not less than 1 Workday, unless specified otherwise. c. Start-Up/Testing Assistance: One trip at start-up for a duration as needed

but not less than 2 Workdays, unless specified otherwise. The equipment shall be ready for testing prior to manufacturer representative’s arrival on the job site for testing.

d. Training: As specified in the equipment specification sections and in this Specification Section 01_75_17.

e. Final Acceptance Checkout: One trip for 1 Workday, unless specified otherwise.

3. Post Start-up Checkout: Where specified in equipment specifications, contractor shall provide the services of an authorized service representative for each manufacturer to make a final inspection after final acceptance and after the equipment and system have been in continuous operation for at least 90 days – 1 trip for 1 workday unless specified otherwise.

D. Submittals: 1. Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with General

Requirements, Section 01_75_17: a. Qualifications and experience records of each proposed Manufacturer’s

Representative who will provide field services. b. After installation inspection, each Manufacturer’s Representative shall

submit to Owner a written report certifying that the equipment is installed properly, in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

c. After start-up/testing, each Manufacturer’s Representative shall submit to Owner a written report verifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated and that it operated satisfactorily.

d. After final checkout, each Manufacturer’s Representative shall submit to Owner a written report verifying that the equipment is in proper condition for regular continuous operation.

e. After post-start-up, each Manufacturer’s Representative shall submit to Owner a written report verifying that this service has been performed and that the equipment Manufacturer’s Representative and the contractor have inspected all equipment under this contract as installed, the appropriate adjustments have been made, and the complete system is operating in conformance with the design, specifications, and manufacturer’s requirements. Notation of improper operation shall be detailed and recommendations made and attached to the report.


f. In addition to the requirements indicated, each Manufacturer’s Representative report shall include purpose of visit, work performed, findings, and corrective actions required. Reports shall be on the manufacturer’s letterhead and shall be signed by the representative. Submit each report within 10 days of visit.

E. Scheduling of Manufacturer’s Field Services: 1. The scheduling of all visits to the site by the Manufacturer’s Representative

shall be determined by contractor and approved by Owner. The Manufacturers’ Representatives’ visits specified herein are for the purpose of making equipment inspections and normal adjustments.

2. After complete installation but prior to operating or testing equipment, Manufacturer’s Representative of each item of equipment for which field services are indicated in the individual sections of the Technical Specifications shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation.

3. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall be present when the equipment is being tested and placed in operation to verify that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts, and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. During the testing, the Manufacturer’s Representative shall assist the contractor, as applicable for the type of equipment, with equipment and system adjustments and calibrations.

4. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until any and all problems are corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to owner.

5. Manufacturer’s Representatives shall resolve assembly or installation problems attributable to or associated with, their products and equipment.

6. After all acceptance tests have been completed, but prior to final acceptance, contractor shall recheck all equipment for proper alignment and adjustment, check oil levels, re-lubricate all bearing and wearing points, and, in general, assure that all equipment is in proper condition for regular continuous operation. Manufacturer’s Representative shall re-inspect the installation and operation to verify this condition.

1.11 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. Provide site-specific operations and maintenance training for items of mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment when specified in specifications for the equipment. Generally, all training will include a process overview component, operational process, maintenance, troubleshooting, and rebuilding. The owner may provide a summary of training requirements.

B. Contractor shall designate and provide a training coordinator responsible for coordinating, scheduling, and expediting training. The coordinator shall be present at all training coordination meetings with the owner’s staff, including representatives from the owner’s Operation and Maintenance Division.


C. The contractor’s coordinator shall organize and coordinate the training periods with owner personnel and manufacturer’s representatives, and shall submit a training schedule for each piece of equipment or system for which training is to be provided. Such training schedule shall be submitted not less than 45 calendar days prior to the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the current plan of operation.

D. Coordinate training sessions to prevent overlapping sessions. Arrange sessions so that individual operators and maintenance technicians do not attend more than 2 sessions per week.

E. The contractor shall use only qualified manufacturer's representatives to conduct training sessions. Submit name and qualifications of trainer not less than 30 days before scheduled training. Approval of manufacturer’s trainer by owner is required.

F. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual for specific pieces of equipment or systems in accordance with the schedule indicated in Specification Section 01_78_23 – Operation and Maintenance Data.

G. Training shall be satisfactorily completed after successful completion of Functional Testing and before beginning the Operational Testing for associated equipment: 1. Training on some minor and incidental equipment and instruments may be

allowed before Functional Testing or after Operational Testing, but only if specifically accepted in writing by the owner.

H. Provide separate training sessions for the City’s three Operation and Maintenance Staff groups listed below, during the time periods shown.

Group Day/Time

Operations Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday: 10:00 a.m. – 2:00 p.m.

Mechanical Maintenance

Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday: 10:00 a.m. – 2:00 p.m.

Electrical Maintenance Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday: 10:00 a.m. – 2:00 p.m.

I. Training sessions: Provide training sessions for equipment as specified in the individual equipment Sections.

J. For systems with multiple components, the manufacturer that has primary responsibility for the overall system shall coordinate and schedule the training for the various components. The manufacturer that has primary responsibility for the system shall provide training on the overall system, as well as the component(s) manufactured by him. In addition, training shall be furnished for each component by the component’s manufacturer.

K. Training sessions shall be conducted according to the lesson plan approved by the owner, and shall include hands-on activities, demonstration, and discussion. Simply reviewing the equipment manual does not fulfill the training requirements.

L. The contractor shall videotape and transfer onto DVD-R, all training sessions and provide three copies to the owner.


M. Training Materials: 1. All training requires specific, customized, and itemized class plans. A draft of

the training lesson plan and any books, handouts, etc. to be used for the training shall be submitted not less than 30 days before the training.

2. A complete set of any books, handouts, etc. shall be provided for each person to be trained. Each training session may have up to 10 Owner personnel.

3. Four additional copies of any books, handouts, etc. shall be provided.

N. Three electronic copies (CDs) of any handouts, slides, pictures, or other visual aids (i.e., Microsoft PowerPoint®, etc.), shall be provided to the Owner: 1. Electronic training data shall comply with the labeling, formats, file saving, and

file naming conventions and requirements for electronic Operation and Maintenance data as specified in Section 01_78_23, Paragraph 1.03.B.

1.12 RECORD KEEPING

A. Maintain and submit following records generated during start-up and testing phase of Project: 1. Daily logs of equipment testing identifying all tests conducted and outcome. 2. Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on

the job site. 3. Equipment lubrication records. 4. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements. 5. Insulation resistance measurements. 6. Data sheets of control loop testing including testing and calibration of

instrumentation devices and setpoints.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_77_00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Contract closeout requirements including: 1. Final cleaning. 2. Waste disposal. 3. Touch-up and repair. 4. Disinfection of systems. 5. Preparation and submittal of closeout documents. 6. Final completion certification.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_32_18 – Progress Schedules and Reports.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

1.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for Substantial Completion.

B. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations.

C. Use cleaning materials which are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned.

D. Prevent scratching, discoloring, and otherwise damaging surfaces being cleaned.

E. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of site work: 1. Police yards and grounds to keep clean.

G. Remove dust, cobwebs, and traces of insects and dirt.


H. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes, sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces, and fixtures and equipment.

I. Remove non-permanent protection and labels.

J. Polish waxed woodwork and finish hardware.

K. Wash tile.

L. Wax and buff hard floors, as applicable.

M. Wash and polish glass, inside and outside.

N. Wash and shine mirrors.

O. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.

P. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

Q. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters when heating, ventilation, and air conditioning units were operated during construction.

R. Clean ducts, blowers and coils when units were operated without filters during construction.

S. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps.

T. Probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like-new condition.

1.04 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris off-site: 1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from

Owner of such property.

B. Do not fill ditches, washes, or drainage ways which may create drainage problems.

C. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations.

D. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance.

E. Complete leveling and cleanup prior to final acceptance of the Work.

1.05 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR

A. Touch-up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and installations that have been damaged prior to inspection for Substantial Completion.

B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces which cannot be touched-up or repaired satisfactorily.


1.06 FINAL CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF SYSTEMS OF PLANT FACILITIES

A. Clean channels, pipe, and tanks before running of 7-day test, or before facility goes on stream when 7-day test is not required.

B. Wash, wherever practicable, or broom sweep channels, pipe, basins, reservoirs, and tanks.

C. Disinfect tanks and piping intended to carry potable water as follows or in accordance with AWWA Standards.

D. Provide ample sampling outlets in pipe for testing.

E. Fill pipe and other plant facilities with chlorine solution of sufficient strength to retain residual of not less than 10 parts per million at end of 24 hours.

F. When reservoirs and basins are too large to be economically disinfected by filling with chlorine solution, spray reservoirs and basins with solution containing 100 parts per million of chlorine.

G. After disinfection, rinse entire potable water system with potable water sufficient to reduce chlorine residual to not more than 0.6 parts per million throughout system before system is put into service.

1.07 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. Submit following Closeout Submittals upon Substantial Completion and at least 7 days prior to submitting Application for Final Payment: 1. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Warranties and Bonds. 5. Keys and Keying Schedule. 6. Evidence of Payment and Release of Stop Payment Notices as outlined in

Conditions of the Contract. 7. Release of claims as outlined in Conditions of the Contract. 8. Certificate of Final Completion.

1.08 EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF GOVERNING AUTHORITIES

A. Submit the following: 1. Certificate of Occupancy. 2. Certificates of Inspection:

a. Elevators. b. Mechanical:

1) Form U-1 "Manufacturer's Data Report for Unfired Pressure Vessels" for each pressure vessel furnished and installed.

1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at Project site, available to Owner, 1 copy of the Contract Documents, shop drawings, and other submittals in good order:


1. Mark and record field changes and detailed information contained in submittals and change orders.

2. Record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground pipes, duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference dimensions to permanent surface features.

3. Identify specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features located during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment, electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes.

4. Identify location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and routing through pull boxes and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number and size, within spare conduits and filled conduits.

5. Provide schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams. 6. Make annotations in hardcopy format with erasable colored pencil conforming

to the following color code:

Additions: Red

Deletions: Green

Comments Blue

Dimensions: Graphite

B. Maintain documents separate from those used for construction: 1. Label documents "RECORD DOCUMENTS."

C. Keep documents current: 1. Record required information at the time the material and equipment is installed

and before permanently concealing.

D. Affix civil engineer's or professional land surveyor's signature and registration number to Record Drawings to certify accuracy of information shown.

E. Deliver Record Documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor.

F. Record Documents will be reviewed monthly to determine the percent complete for the monthly pay application.

G. Updated Record Documents are a condition for Owner’s recommendation for progress payment.

H. During progress meetings, Record Documents will be reviewed to ascertain that changes have been recorded.

I. Final Schedule Submittal as specified in Section 01_32_18.

1.10 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Provide executed Warranty or Guaranty Form if required by Contract Documents.

B. Provide specified additional warranties, guarantees, and bonds from manufacturers and suppliers.


1.11 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

A. When Process Operational Test has been successfully completed, Owner will certify that new facilities can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended, therefore the Project has reached Substantial Completion: 1. Owner will submit a list of known items (punch list) still to be completed or

corrected prior to contract completion.

B. List of items to be completed or corrected will be amended as items are resolved by Contractor.

C. When all items have been completed or corrected, submit written certification that the entire work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and request final inspection.

D. Upon completion of final inspection, Owner will either prepare a written acceptance of the entire work or advise Contractor of work not complete. If necessary, inspection procedures will be repeated.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_78_23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_75_17 – Commissioning and Process Start-up.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit draft version Operation and Maintenance Manuals prior to shipping equipment to site: 1. Submit 3 hardcopy manuals for each piece of equipment or system. 2. Submit one electronic copy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.

B. Final version Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted and Owner’s acceptance no later than 60 days prior to Owner Training: 1. Submit 3 hardcopy manuals for each piece of equipment or system. 2. Submit one electronic copy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.

C. Make Owner accepted Operation and Maintenance Manuals available at project site for use by construction personnel and Owner.

1.03 PREPARATION

A. Format: 1. Provide hardcopy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring binders with

rigid covers. Utilize numbered tab sheets to organize information. 2. Provide electronic copy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in PDF Format. 3. Provide original and clear text on reproducible non-colored paper. 4. Provide dimensions in English units.

B. Contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Cover page:

a. Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name, Owner's name, appropriate date.


2. Table of Contents: a. General description of information provided within each tab section.

3. Equipment Summary Form: a. Completed form in the format shown in Appendix A. b. The manufacturer's standard form will not be acceptable.

4. Lubrication information: a. Required lubricants and lubrication schedules.

5. Control diagrams: a. Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams

for control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and connections between existing systems and new additions, and adjustments such as calibrations and set points for relays, and control or alarm contact settings.

b. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control system. c. Complete set of control schematics.

6. Programming: a. Copies of all Contractor furnished programming.

7. Commissioning and Process Start-up procedures: a. Recommendations for installation, adjustment, calibration, and

troubleshooting. 8. Operating procedures:

a. Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment under specified modes of operation.

b. Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown instructions.

9. Preventative maintenance procedures: a. Recommended steps and schedules for maintaining equipment.

10. Overhaul instructions: a. Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair and reassembly of the

equipment; safety precautions; and recommended tolerances, critical bolt torques, and special tools that are required.

11. Parts list: a. Complete parts list for all equipment being provided. b. Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished including generic title

and identification number of each component part of equipment. 1) Include bearing manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass

frequencies for every bearing. 12. Spare parts list:

a. Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and special storage precautions.

13. Drawings: a. Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts. b. Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment. c. Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings.

14. Commission and Process Start-up submittals: As specified in Section 01_75_17.




END OF SECTION


APPENDIX A EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM

1. EQUIPMENT ITEM 2. MANUFACTURER 3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(S)

(maps equipment number) 4. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT 5. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS)

NAMEPLATE DATA - Horsepower

Amperage Voltage Service Factor (S.F.) Speed ENC Type Capacity Other

7. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE

Name

Address

Telephone Number

8. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

9. LUBRICANT LIST

10. SPARE PARTS (recommendations)

11. COMMENTS


SECTION 01_81_01

PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Project design criteria such as temperature and site elevation.

1.02 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA

A. All equipment and materials for the project are to be suitable for performance in wastewater treatment plant environment and under following conditions: 1. Design temperatures are:

a. Outdoor temperatures: -4.2 degrees Celsius to 37.8 degrees Celsius. b. Indoor temperatures for the following buildings:

1) Process areas: 12.8 degrees Celsius to 5.6 degrees Celsius. 2) Electrical rooms: 12.8 degrees Celsius to 29.4 degrees Celsius.

2. Freeze-thaw conditions. 3. Moisture conditions: Defined in individual equipment sections. 4. Site elevation: Approximately 440 feet above mean sea level.


PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_81_02

SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Seismic design criteria for the following: 1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Seismic design and design of anchorage for small tanks fabricated off site and

shipped to the Project site. 3. Other structures or items as specified.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_41_00 – Regulatory Requirements. b. Section 05_05_24 – Mechanical Anchoring And Fastening To Concrete

And Masonry.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code as specified in Section 01_41_00:

B. Design spectral acceleration at short period, SDS: 0.109.

C. Design of non-structural components and their connections to structures: 1. Component amplification factor, ap: In accordance with ASCE 7, Tables 13.5-1

and 13.6-1. 2. Component response modification factor, Rp: In accordance with ASCE 7,

Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.


3. Component importance factor, Ip:

Table 1: Component importance factor, Ip

Component Description Ip

Electrical Equipment and appurtenances provided and installed under Division 26.

1.5

D. Seismic Design Category (SDC).

E. Seismic Design Category (SDC) for certification of mechanical and electrical equipment as required by ASCE 7: 1. All areas: Seismic Design Category B.

F. Design requirements: Anchorage of equipment to structures: 1. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces. Do not design or

provide connections that use friction to resist seismic loads. Resist seismic forces through direct tension and/or shear on anchors and fasteners.

2. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the mechanical and electrical equipment for designing anchors for resisting overturning due to seismic forces.

3. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the tank for resisting overturning due to seismic forces.

4. Anchoring and fastening to concrete and masonry: a. Provide anchors specified in Section 05_05_24. b. Use only cast-in anchors (anchor bolts or welded studs) for anchors at

connections that resist seismic forces. c. Do not use concrete anchors, flush shells, sleeve anchors, screw anchors,

powder actuated fasteners, or other types of post-installed mechanical anchors unless accepted in writing by the Engineer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic calculations.

B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where the Project is located.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01_81_04

WIND DESIGN CRITERIA

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Wind design criteria.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents: a. Section 01_41_00 – Regulatory Requirements. b. Section 05_05_24 – Mechanical Anchoring And Fastening To Concrete

And Masonry.


A. Design requirements: 1. Building code criteria: Design for wind in accordance with building code as

specified in Section 01_41_00: a. Occupancy category: III. b. Basic wind speed: 120 miles per hour, Allowable Wind Speed = 93 miles

per hour. c. Exposure category: C. d. Topographic factor, Kzt: 1.0. e. Wind importance factor, Iw: 1.15.

2. Resist wind forces through direct bearing on anchors and fasteners. Do not design or provide connections that use friction to resist wind loads.

3. Anchoring and fastening to concrete and masonry: a. Provide anchors specified in Section 05_05_24. b. Use only cast-in and built-in anchors (anchor bolts and welded studs) for

anchors at connections that resist wind forces. c. Do not use concrete anchors, flush shells, sleeve anchors, flush shells,

screw anchors, powder actuated fasteners, or other types of post-installed mechanical anchors unless accepted in writing by the Engineer.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and wind design calculations.


B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the state of Texas.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 03_60_01

BASIN BOTTOM GROUT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Grouting basin bottom slabs.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): 1. 310.2 – Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers,

Coatings, and Polymer Overlays.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Grout that has not bonded: Grout that, after placing and setting, has hollow sound when tapped with 4-foot long, nominal, 2-inch by 4-inch piece of lumber.

B. Jitterbug: An expanded metal or grate tamper designed for finishing concrete surfaces with a rough surface profile.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's instructions: 1. For equipment to be used in grouting basin bottom slabs:

a. Submit grout placement instructions from manufacturer of equipment designated to operate in basin.

b. Include in such instructions statements on limitations and precautions to be observed when using equipment for grout placement.


A. Pre-installation conference for grouting basin bottom slabs: Schedule meeting with Owner not less than 24 hours before planned grouting operations to discuss method of placement of grout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials for grout: 1. Cement, sand, and water: As specified below.

B. Aggregate: 1. General:

a. Provide concrete aggregates that are sound, uniformly graded, and free of deleterious material in excess of allowable amounts specified.


b. Grade aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75. c. Provide unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate that produces in place

concrete with weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot. d. Do not use aggregate made from recycled materials such as crushed and

screened hydraulic-cement concrete, brick, and other construction materials.

2. Fine aggregate: a. Provide fine aggregate for concrete or mortar consisting of clean, natural

sand or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel. b. Do not provide aggregate having deleterious substances in excess of

following percentages by weight of contaminating substances. 1) In no case shall total exceed percent listed.

Item Test Method Percent

Removed by decantation (dirt, silt, etc.)

ASTM C 117 3

Shale or Chert ASTM C 123 ASTM C 295* 1 1

Clay Lumps ASTM C 142 1

* Test Method C 123 is used to identify particles in the sample lighter than 2.40 Specific Gravity. Test Method C 295 is used to identify which of the lightweight particles are shale or chert. If the results of Test Method C 123 are less than 1 percent, Test Method C 295 is not required.

c. Except as otherwise specified, grade fine aggregate from coarse to fine in

accordance with ASTM C 33.

C. Portland cement: 1. Conform to specifications and tests in accordance with ASTM C 150, Types II

or III, low alkali, except as specified otherwise. 2. Have total alkali containing not more than 0.60 percent. 3. Exposed concrete in any individual structure: Use only one brand of portland

cement. 4. Cement for finishes or repairs: Provide cement from same source and of same

type as concrete to be finished or repaired.

D. Water: 1. Water for concrete, washing aggregate, and curing concrete: Clean and free

from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other substances.

2. Chlorides and sulfate ions: a. Water for conventional reinforced concrete: Use water containing not

more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion.


b. Water for prestressed or post-tensioned concrete: Use water containing not more than 650 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, or more than 800 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Non-shrink grout: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Five Star Products, Inc., Five Star Grout. b. BASF Construction Chemicals, Masterflow 928. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., CRYSTEX.

2. In accordance with ASTM C1107. 3. Preportioned and prepackaged cement-based mixture. 4. Contain no metallic particles such as aluminum powder and no metallic

aggregate such as iron filings. 5. Require only addition of potable water. 6. Water for pre-soaking, mixing, and curing: Potable water. 7. Free from emergence of mixing water from within or presence of water on its

surface. 8. Remain at minimum flowable consistency for at least 45 minutes after mixing

at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit when tested in accordance with ASTM C230. a. If at fluid consistency, verify consistency in accordance with ASTM C939.

9. Dimensional stability (height change): a. In accordance with ASTM C1107, volume-adjusting Grade B or C at

45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Have 90 percent or greater bearing area under bases.

10. Have minimum compressive strengths at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with ASTM C1107 for various periods from time of placement, including 5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109 as modified by ASTM C1107.

2.03 MIXES

A. Grout mixture: 1. One part portland cement and 4-1/2 parts sand, by weight. 2. Water content:

a. Sufficient to allow workability for spreading grout with screeds attached to arms of equipment mechanism.

b. Not excessive, to prevent formation of surface water, laitance, segregation, and to allow grout to stay in place after screeding.

3. Do not use admixtures.

B. Non-shrink grout: 1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions such that

resulting mix has flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by pouring.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Surface preparation: 1. Basin bottom slab surface preparation:

a. Concrete slab surfaces shall have rough texture, suitable for bonding grout.

b. During concrete placement: finish concrete surface with jitterbug. Do not provide a smooth troweled surface.

c. Roughen top of slab surface to a ICRI 310.2 surface profile of CSP-5 or rougher using one of the following methods: 1) Abrasive blasting. 2) Steel shotblasting. 3) Ultra high-pressure water jetting.

d. Clean entire slab surface as required to remove dirt, oil, curing compound, laitance, dust, and other matter that may prevent proper grout bonding.

e. Saturate concrete slabs with water for minimum of 3 days just before placing grout. At time grout is placed, concrete shall be saturated and surface damp.

B. Equipment preparation: 1. Preparation of equipment for grouting basin bottom slabs:

a. Setting the screeds: 1) Bolt nominal 2-inch by 4-inch section of lumber blades on arms of

equipment mechanism. 2) Locate leading edge of lumber approximately 2 inches in front of

blade and cut it parallel to centerline of arm. 3) Securely nail nominal 2-inch by 6-inch screed board to ends of 2 by

4 lumber, in manner such that screed runs parallel to centerline of arm.

4) Nail bent sheet metal to lower edge of screed board. 5) Ensure that bottom of screed board is 1-1/2 inches below steel

blades on arms of equipment mechanism.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Grouting basin bottom slabs: 1. Placement, general:

a. Place grout in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with limitations and precautions given in such instructions.

b. Bring promptly to attention of the Owner, conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and this Section.

2. Placing grout: a. Use grouting equipment to apply grout for basin bottom slabs. b. Perform grouting continuously without interruptions until basin slab is

covered. c. Place ring of grout approximately 3 feet wide on outer edge of slab and

gradually widened towards center following spiral pattern until basin bottom slab is covered.

d. Unacceptable placing procedure: Following procedures will not be accepted:


1) Grouting by circular sectors or "pie" sections. 2) Grouting from center outward.

e. Use finishing workers to control area immediately in front of screed boards in manner so that: 1) Grout is installed to specified thickness. 2) No low areas occur. 3) No excessive amount of grout accumulates. 4) Grout surface has uniform wood trowel finish without ridges, gouges,

or other defect. f. Coordinate grout placement rate and number of finishing workers with

travel speed of arms of equipment mechanism. g. Last grout area to be grouted in center may be finished by worker

operating from 1 of the arms. h. Use misters or means acceptable to Owner to keep grout from drying out

before start of curing. 3. Following grout placement:

a. After completion of slab grouting, allow mechanism to run continuously until there is no more danger that grout sloughing may occur.

b. Prevent dry clumps of grout or rocks from being caught under screed board and gouging finish surface of grout.

4. Corrections: a. Before grout has set:

1) Where sloughing has occurred, remove grout from sloughed areas and place grout in low areas.

2) Repair gouges in grouted surface. 5. Curing:

a. After grout has set, water cure grout for 7 days. b. Keep grout surface continuously wet for duration of curing period.

B. Tolerances: 1. For grouting basin bottom slabs:

a. Tolerance in elevation of finished grout surface: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 1) Specified tolerance is more exacting than customary industry

standards for slab finish. 2) Tolerance is required for proper operation of equipment.

b. Thickness of new grout layer: 1) Not less than 2 inches at any point. The 2 inches does not include

existing grout.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: 1. Verify grout elevation tolerance on basin bottom slabs as follows:

a. After grout has set, operate grouting equipment with blades set to clear grout surface.

b. Under these conditions, blades shall not clear grout surface by more than 1/4 inch at any point: 1) Excess clearance: Correct as specified in article titled "Adjusting" in

this Section.


3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Grouting basin bottom slabs: 1. After grout has set:

a. Where clearance between blades and grouted surface exceeds tolerance specified in this Section, grind high points in grout surface using terrazzo machine until specified tolerance is met.

b. Grout that has not bonded to concrete slab is not acceptable. Remove and replace such grout.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05_05_24

MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Cast-in anchors and fasteners:

a. Anchor bolts. b. Anchor rods. c. Concrete inserts. d. Deformed bar anchors. e. Welded studs.

2. Post-installed steel anchors and fasteners a. Concrete anchors. b. Sleeve anchors. c. Screw anchors. d. Undercut concrete anchors.

3. Appurtenances for anchoring and fastening. a. Anchor bolt sleeves. b. Isolating sleeves and washers. c. Thread coating for threaded stainless steel fasteners.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_33_00 – Submittals. b. Section 01_41_00 – Regulatory Requirements. c. Section 01_45_00 – Quality Control. d. Section 01_81_01 – Project Design Criteria. e. Section 05_12_05 – Structural Steel. f. Section 05_50_00 – Metal Fabrications.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. 355.2 – Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete &

Commentary.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. B212.15 – Cutting Tools – Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for

Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills.


C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. D1.6 – Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 29 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought,

General Requirements for. 2. A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. A 53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless. 4. A 108 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold

Finished. 5. A 123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products. 6. A 153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 7. A 193 – Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for

High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

8. A 194 – Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

9. A 240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

10. A 308 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Terne (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

11. A 496 – Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.

12. A 563 – Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 13. B 633 – Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron

and Steel. 14. B 695 – Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited

on Iron and Steel. 15. E 488 – Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements. 16. F 436 – Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 17. F 1554 – Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-ksi

Yield Strength.

E. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): 1. AC01 – Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements. 2. AC106 – Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in

Masonry. 3. AC193 – Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Built-in anchor: Headed bolt or assembly installed in position before filling surrounding masonry units with grout.

B. Cast-in anchor: Headed bolt or assembly installed in position before placing plastic concrete around.


C. Overhead installations: Fasteners installed on overhead surfaces where the longitudinal axis of the fastener is more than 60-degrees above a horizontal line so that the fastener resists sustained tension loads.

D. Passivation: Chemical treatment of stainless steel with a mild oxidant for the purpose of enhancing the spontaneous formation of the steel’s protective passive film.

E. Post-installed anchor: Fastener or assembly installed in hardened concrete or finished masonry construction, typically by drilling into the structure and inserting a steel anchor assembly.

F. Terms relating to structures or building environments as used with reference to anchors and fasteners: 1. Corrosive locations: Describes interior and exterior locations as follows:

a. Locations used for delivery, storage, transfer, or containment (including spill containment) of chemicals used for plant treatment processes.

b. Exterior and interior locations at the following treatment structures. 1) Wastewater treatment facilities

2. Wet and moist locations: Describes locations, other than “corrosive locations,” that are submerged, are immediately above liquid containment structures, or are subject to frequent wetting, splashing, or wash down. Includes: a. Exterior portions of buildings and structures. b. Liquid-containing structures:

1) Locations at and below the maximum operating liquid surface elevation.

2) Locations above the maximum operating liquid surface elevation and: a) Below the top of the walls containing the liquid; b) At the inside faces and underside surfaces of a structure

enclosing or spanning over the liquid (including walls, roofs, slabs, beams or walkways enclosing the open top of the structure).

c. Liquid handling equipment: 1) Bases of pumps and other equipment that handles liquids.

d. Indoor locations exposed to moisture, splashing or routine wash down during normal operations, including floors with slopes toward drains or gutters.

3. Other locations: a. Interior dry areas where the surfaces are not exposed to moisture or

humidity in excess of typical local environmental conditions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00. 2. Submit information listed for each type of anchor or fastener to be used.

B. Action submittals: 1. Product data:

a. Cast-in anchors. 1) Manufacturer’s data including catalog cuts showing anchor sizes and

configuration, materials, and finishes.


b. Post-installed anchors. 1) For each anchor type, manufacturer’s data including catalog cuts

showing anchor sizes and construction, materials and finishes, and load ratings .

2. Samples: a. Samples of each type of anchor, including representative diameters and

lengths, if requested by the Owner. 3. Certificates:

a. Cast-in anchors: 1) Mill certificates for steel anchors that will be supplied to the site.

b. Post-installed anchors: 1) Manufacturer’s statement or certified test reports demonstrating that

anchors that will be supplied to the site comply with the materials properties specified.

4. Test reports: a. Post-installed anchors: For each anchor type used for the Work:

1) Current ICC-ES Report (ESR)demonstrating: a) Acceptance of that anchor for use under the building code

specified in Section 01_41_00. 5. Manufacturer’s instructions.

a. Requirements for storage and handling. b. Recommended installation procedures including details on drilling, hole

size (diameter and depth), hole cleaning and preparation procedures, anchor insertion, and anchor tightening.

c. Requirements for inspection or observation during installation. 6. Qualification statements.

a. Post-installed anchors: Installer qualifications: 1) Submit list of personnel performing installations and include date of

manufacturer’s training for each.


A. Qualifications: 1. Post installed anchors shall be in accordance with building code specified in

Section 01_41_00.

B. Special inspection: 1. Provide special inspection of post-installed anchors as specified in Section

01_45_24 and this Section.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver post-installed anchors in manufacturer’s standard packaging with labels visible and intact. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Handle and store anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as required to prevent damage.

C. Protect anchors from weather and moisture until installation.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS



B. Seismic Design Category (SDC) for structures is indicated in Section 01_81_02.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. General: 1. Furnish threaded fasteners with flat washers and hex nuts fabricated from

materials corresponding to the material used for threaded portion of the anchor. a. Cast-in anchors: Provide flat washers and nuts as listed in the ASTM

standard for the anchor materials specified. b. Post-installed anchors: Provide flat washers and nuts supplied for that

product by the manufacturer of each anchor. 2. Size of anchors and fasteners, including diameter and length or minimum

effective embedment depth: Per the primary clarifier equipment manufacturer or as specified in this Section. In the event of conflicts, contact Owner for clarification.

3. Where anchors and connections are not specifically specified, their material, size and form shall be equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified.

B. Materials: 1. Provide and install anchors of materials as in this Section.

2.02 CAST-IN ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

A. Anchor bolts: 1. Description:

a. Straight steel rod having one end with integrally forged head, and one threaded end. Embedded into concrete with the headed end cast into concrete at the effective embedment depth specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer, and with the threaded end left to project clear of concrete face as required for the connection to be made.

b. Furnish anchor bolts with heavy hex forged head or equivalent acceptable to Owner. 1) Rods or bars with angle bend for embedment in concrete (i.e.: “L” or

“J” shaped anchor bolts) are not permitted in the Work. 2. Materials:

a. Type 316 stainless steel. 1) Surfaces descaled, pickled, and passivated in accordance with

ASTM A 308.Bolts: ASTM A 193, Grade B8M, Class 1, heavy hex. 2) Nuts: ASTM A 194, Grade 8M, heavy hex. 3) Washers: Type 316 stainless steel.

b. Type 304 stainless steel. 1) Surfaces descaled, pickled, and passivated in accordance with

ASTM A 308. 2) Bolts: ASTM A 193, Grade B8, Class 1, heavy hex. 3) Nuts: ASTM A 194, Grade 8, heavy hex. 4) Washers: Type 304 stainless steel.

c. Galvanized steel: 1) Hot-dip galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A 153.


2) Bolt: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, heavy hex. 3) Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade A, heavy hex. 4) Washers: ASTM F 436.

B. Anchor rods: 1. Description: Straight steel rod having threads on each end or continuously

threaded from end to end. One threaded end is fitted with nuts or plates and embedded in concrete to the effective depth specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer , leaving the opposite threaded end to project clear of the concrete face as required for the connection to be made at that location.

2. Materials: a. Stainless steel: Type 316.

1) Surfaces descaled, pickled, and passivated in accordance with ASTM A 308.

2) Rod: ASTM A 193, Grade B8M, Class 1. 3) Nuts: ASTM A 194, Grade 8M. 4) Washers: Type 316 stainless steel. 5) Plates (embedded): ASTM A 240.

b. Stainless steel: Type 304. 1) Surfaces descaled, pickled, and passivated in accordance with

ASTM A 308. 2) Rod: ASTM A 193, Grade B8, Class 1. 3) Nuts: ASTM A 194, Grade 8. 4) Washers: Type 304 stainless steel. 5) Plates (embedded): ASTM A 240.

c. Galvanized: steel. 1) Hot-dip galvanized with coating in accordance with ASTM A 153. 2) Rod: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 3) Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade A. 4) Washers: ASTM F 436. 5) Plates (embedded): ASTM A 36.

C. Concrete insert: Ductile embed. 1. Description: 1-piece, integrally hot forged sleeve for embedment in concrete.

Provided with flange for nailing to forms and female threaded coupler at the exposed concrete face, and washer-faced hex headed foot to resist pullout from concrete at the embedded end.

2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dayton Superior: F-54 Ductile Embed Insert.

3. Materials: a. Galvanized steel:

1) Hot-dip galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A 123 or A 153 where specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

2) Steel: ASTM A 29 hot rolled, Grade 1045.

D. Deformed bar anchors: 1. Description: Steel rod with rebar-like deformations along its length and welding

ferrule at one end for attachment to structural steel members (plates or shapes).

2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Nelson Stud Welding Company: D2L Deformed Bar Anchors (D2L-DBA). b. Stud Welding Products, Inc: Deformed Anchor Studs.



1) Hot dip galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A 153 where specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

2) Steel: ASTM A 496 wire deformed for concrete reinforcement.

E. Welded studs: 1. Description: Anchor with forged head for embedment into concrete on one

end, and welding ferrule for attachment to steel on the other. Welded to steel members or plates to provide anchorage for steel connections to concrete.

2. Acceptance criteria: a. Welded studs in accordance with AWS D1.1, Type B.

3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Nelson Stud Welding Company: H4L Concrete Anchors or S3L Shear

Connectors as specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer. b. Stud Welding Products: Headed Concrete Anchors (HCA) or Headed

Shear Connectors (HSC) as specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.


1) Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication with coating in accordance with ASTM A 123.

2) Steel: Carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A 108 with 50,000-pounds per square inch minimum yield strength, and 60,000-pounds per square inch minimum tensile strength.

F. Steel plates or shapes for fabrications including assemblies with welded studs or deformed bar anchors: 1. Stainless steel:Type 316L or Type 304L.

a. Plates (embedded): ASTM A 240. 2. Galvanized steel:

a. Hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. b. Steel: ASTM A 36.

2.03 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS AND FASTENERS – ADHESIVE

A. Epoxy bonding of reinforcing bars, all thread rods, and threaded inserts in concrete: As specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

2.04 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS AND FASTENERS – MECHANICAL

A. General: 1. Post-installed anchors used for the Work shall hold a current ICC Evaluation

Service Report demonstrating acceptance for use under the building code specified in Section 01_41_00. a. Conditions of use: The acceptance report shall indicate acceptance of the

product for use under the following conditions: 1) In regions of concrete where cracking has occurred or may occur. 2) To resist short-term loads due to wind forces. 3) To resist short-term loading due to seismic forces for the Seismic

Design Category of the structure where the product will be used.


2. Substitutions: When requesting product substitutions, submit calculations, indicating the diameter, effective embedment depth and spacing of the proposed anchors, and demonstrating that the substituted product will provide load resistance that is equal to or greater than that provided by the anchors listed in this Section. a. Calculations shall be prepared by and shall bear the signature and sealed

of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. b. Decisions regarding the acceptability of proposed substitutions shall be at

the discretion of the Owner.

B. Concrete anchors: 1. Description. Post-installed anchor assembly consisting of a threaded stud and

a surrounding wedge expansion sleeve that is forced outward by torquing the center stud to transfer loads from the stud to the concrete through bearing, friction, or both. (Sometimes referred to as “expansion anchors” or “wedge anchors.”) a. Do not use slug-in, lead cinch, and similar systems relying on deformation

of lead alloy or similar materials to develop holding power. 2. Concrete anchors for anchorage to concrete:

a. Acceptance criteria. 1) Concrete anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating

that the anchors have been tested and qualified for performance in both cracked and un-cracked concrete, and for short term loading due to wind and seismic forces for Seismic Design Categories A through F in accordance with ACI 355.2 and with ICC-ES AC193 (including all mandatory tests and optional tests for seismic tension and shear in cracked concrete).

2) Concrete anchor performance in the current ICC-ES Report shall be “Category 1” as defined in ACI 355.2.

b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hilti: Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor. 2) Powers fasteners: PowerStud+ SD2. 3) Simpson Strong-Tie®: Strong Bolt 2 Wedge Anchor.

c. Materials. Integrally threaded stud, wedge, washer and nut: 1) Stainless steel: Type 316. 2) Galvanized: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with

ASTM B 633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5). 3. Concrete anchors for anchorage to concrete masonry (fully grouted cells):

a. Acceptance criteria: Concrete anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating that the anchors have been tested and qualified in accordance with ICC-ES AC01, including all mandatory tests and optional seismic tests.

b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hilti: Kwik Bolt 3 Expansion Anchor. 2) Powers fasteners: Power-Stud+ SD1. 3) Simpson Strongtie: Wedge-All Anchor.

c. Materials. Integrally threaded stud, wedge, washer and nut: 1) Stainless steel: Type 316. 2) Galvanized: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with

ASTM B 633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5) or mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B 695, Class 55, Type 1.


C. Flush shells: 1. Description: Post-installed anchor assembly consisting of an internally

threaded mandrel that is forced into a pre-drilled concrete hole with a setting tool until the top of the anchor is flush with the face of the concrete. Once installed, a removable threaded bolt is installed in the mandrel.

2. Flush shell anchors are not permitted in the Work.

D. Sleeve anchors: 1. Description: Post-installed, torque-controlled anchor assembly consisting of an

externally threaded stud with a spacer sleeve near the surface of the base material, and an expansion sleeve on the lower part of the stud. The expansion sleeve is forced outward by torquing of the center stud to transfer load. a. Do not use slug-in, lead cinch, and similar systems relying on deformation

of lead alloy or similar materials in order to develop holding power. 2. Sleeve anchors for anchorage to concrete.

a. Acceptance criteria. 1) Sleeve anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating

that the anchors have been tested and qualified for performance in both cracked and un-cracked concrete, and for short term loading due to wind and seismic forces for Seismic Design Categories A through F in accordance with ACI 355.2 and with ICC-ES AC193 (including all mandatory tests and optional tests for seismic tension and shear in cracked concrete).

2) Sleeve anchor performance in the current ICC-ES Report shall be “Category 1” as defined in ACI 355.2.

b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hilti: HSL-3 Heavy Duty Expansion (sleeve) Anchor. 2) Powers fasteners: Power Bolt+ Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchor.

c. Materials: 1) Galvanized steel: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with

ASTM B 633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5). 3. Sleeve anchors for anchorage to concrete masonry (fully grouted only):

a. Acceptance criteria. Sleeve anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating that anchors have been tested and qualified for performance in masonry, including short term loading due to wind and seismic forces in accordance with ICC-ES AC01.

b. Materials: 1) Galvanized steel: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with

ASTM B 633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5).

E. Screw anchors: 1. Description: Post-installed concrete anchor that develops tensile strength from

mechanical interlock provided by creating a helical “key” that is larger than the diameter of the bolt itself along the length of the anchor shaft.

2. Screw anchors for anchorage to concrete: a. Acceptance criteria:

1) Screw anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating that the anchors have been tested and qualified for performance in both cracked and un-cracked concrete, and for short term loading due to wind and seismic forces for Seismic Design Categories A through F in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC ES AC193


(including all mandatory tests and optional tests for seismic tension and shear in cracked concrete).

2) Screw anchor performance in the current ICC-ES Report shall be “Category 1” as defined in ACI 355.2.

b. Manufacturers: Screw anchor: One of the following or equal: 1) Hilti: Hex head: HUS-EZ Screw Anchor.

a) With internally threaded head: HUS-EZ I Hanger Anchor. 2) Powers fasteners: Wedge-Bolt+.

a) With internally threaded head: Vertigo+ Rod Hanging System 3) Simpson strong-tie: Titen HD Screw Anchor.

a) With internally threaded head: Titen HD Rod Hanger. c. Materials:

1) Galvanized steel: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B 633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5); or equal.

3. Screw anchors for anchorage to concrete masonry (fully grouted only): a. Acceptance criteria:

1) Acceptance criteria. Screw anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating that anchors have been tested and qualified for performance in masonry, including short term loading due to wind and seismic forces in accordance with ICC-ES AC106.

b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Hilti: HUS-EZ Screw Anchor. 2) Simpson strong-tie: Titen HDScrew Anchor.

c. Materials: 1) Galvanized steel: Carbon steel. Zinc plated in accordance with

ASTM B 633 , minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5); or mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B 695; Class 55, Type I.

F. Undercut concrete anchors: 1. Description: Post-installed concrete anchor that develops tensile strength from

mechanical interlock provided by creation of an undercut “key” at the embedded end of the anchor. The undercut may be achieved with a special drill before anchor installation, or by the anchor itself during installation.

2. Acceptance criteria: a. Acceptance criteria:

1) Undercut concrete anchors shall have a current ICC-ES Report demonstrating that the anchors have been tested and qualified for performance in both cracked and un-cracked concrete, and for short term loading due to wind and seismic forces for Seismic Design Categories A through F in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC ES AC193 (including all mandatory tests and optional tests for seismic tension and shear in cracked concrete).

2) Undercut anchor performance in the current ICC-ES Report shall be “Category 1” as defined in ACI 355.2.

3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Hilti: HDA (carbon steel) or HAD-R (stainless steel) Undercut Anchor. b. Powers fasteners: Atomic+ Undercut Anchor. c. Simpson strong-tie: Torq-Cut Anchor. d. USP Structural Connectors: DUC-L Undercut Anchors.

4. Materials: a. Stainless steel: Corrosive, and wet and moist and locations: Type 316.


b. Galvanized: Carbon steel, zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B 633, minimum 5 microns (Fe/Zn 5).

2.05 APPURTENANCES FOR ANCHORING AND FASTENING

A. Anchor bolt sleeves 1. having inside diameter approximately 2 inches greater than bolt diameter and

minimum 10-bolt diameters long. 2. Plastic sleeves:

a. High-density polyethylene, corrugated sleeve, threaded to provide adjustment of location on the anchor bolt.

3. Fabricated steel sleeves: Construct as specified in Section 05_50_00. a. At galvanized carbon steel anchor bolts, provide galvanized carbon steel

sleeves. b. At stainless steel anchor bolts, provide stainless steel sleeves of same

Type (304 or 316) as bolt, except that sleeves shall be constructed from low carbon stainless steel for welding (304L or 316L.

4. Fabricated steel sleeves: a. Fabricate to the following dimensions unless otherwise indicated by

primary clarifier equipment manufacturer. 1) Inside diameter: At least 2 inches greater than bolt diameter. 2) Inside length: Not less than 10 bolt diameters. 3) Bottom plate:

a) Square plate with dimensions equal to the outside diameter of the sleeve plus 1/2 inch each side.

b) Thickness equal to or greater than one-half of the anchor bolt diameter.

b. Carbon steel anchor bolts: 1) Fabricated from ASTM A 36 plate and ASTM A 53, Grade B pipe. 2) Welded connections: Conform to requirements of AWS D1.1 3) Hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153.

c. Stainless steel anchor bolts: 1) Fabricated from ASTM A 240 plate and pipe. Type 304L or Type

316L to match Type of the anchor bolt. 2) Welded connections: In accordance with AWS D1.6.

B. Forged steel hardware: 1. See Section 05_12_05 for forged steel hardware connectors, including:

clevises, turnbuckles, eye bolts, eye nuts, and sleeve nuts.

C. Isolating sleeves and washers. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Central Plastics Company, Shawnee, Oklahoma. b. Corrosion Control Products, PSI Inc., Gardena, CA.

2. Sleeves: Mylar, 1/32 inch thick, 4,000 volts per mil dielectric strength, of proper size to fit bolts and extending half way into both steel washers.

3. One sleeve required for each bolt. 4. Washers: The inside diameter of all washer shall fit over the isolating sleeve

and both the steel and isolating washers shall have the same inside diameter and outside diameter. a. Proper size to fit bolts. 2 insulating washers are required for each bolt. b. Two 1/8-inch thick steel washers for each bolt.


c. G3 Phenolic: 1) Thickness: 1/8 inch. 2) Base material: Glass. 3) Resin: Phenolic. 4) Water absorption: 2 percent. 5) Hardness (Rockwell): 100. 6) Dielectric strength: 450 volts per mil. 7) Compression strength: 50,000 pounds per square inch. 8) Tensile strength: 20,000 pounds per square inch. 9) Maximum operating temperature: 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Coating for repair of galvanized surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:

a. Galvinox. b. Galvo-Weld.

E. Thread coating. For use with threaded stainless steel fasteners. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Never Seez Compound Corporation, Never-Seez. b. Oil Research, Inc., WLR No. 111.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this Work until such conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION: GENERAL

A. Where anchors and fasteners are not specifically specified, make attachments with materials specified in this Section.

B. Substitution of anchor types. 1. Post-installed anchors may not be used as an alternative to cast-in / built-in

anchors at locations where the latter are specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer .

2. Cast-in/built-in anchors may be used as an alternative to post-installed mechanical anchors at locations where the latter are specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer .

C. Protect products from damage during installation. Take special care to protect threads and threaded ends.

D. Accurately locate and position anchors and fasteners. 1. Unless otherwise indicated by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer, install

anchors perpendicular to the surfaces from which they project. 2. Install anchors so that at least 2 threads, but not more than 1/2 inch of

threaded rod, projects past the top nut.


E. Interface with other products: 1. Where steel anchors come in contact with dissimilar metals (aluminum,

stainless steel, etc.), bolt with stainless steel bolts and separate or isolate dissimilar metals using isolating sleeves and washers.

2. Prior to installing nuts, coat threads of stainless steel fasteners with thread coating to prevent galling of threads.

3.03 INSTALLATION: CAST-IN ANCHORS

A. General: 1. Accurately locate cast-in and built-in anchors.

a. Provide anchor setting templates to locate anchor bolts and anchor rods. Secure templates to formwork.

b. Brace or tie off embedments as necessary to prevent displacement during placement of plastic concrete or of surrounding masonry construction.

c. Position and tie cast-in and built-in anchors in place before beginning placement of concrete or grout. Do not “stab” anchors into plastic concrete, mortar, or grout.

d. Do not allow cast-in anchors to touch reinforcing steel. Where cast-in anchors are within 1/4 inch of reinforcing steel, isolate the metals by wrapping the anchors with a minimum of 4 wraps of 10-mil polyvinyl chloride tape in area adjacent to reinforcing steel.

2. For anchoring at machinery bases subject to vibration, use 2 nuts, with 1 serving as a locknut.

3. Where anchor bolts or anchor rods are specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer as being for future use, thoroughly coat exposed surfaces that project from concrete or masonry with non-oxidizing wax. Turn nuts down full length of the threads, and neatly wrap the exposed thread and nut with a minimum of 4 wraps of 10-mil waterproof polyvinyl tape.

B. Anchor bolts: 1. Minimum effective embedment: 10-bolt diameters, unless a longer embedment

is recommended by equipment manufacturer. 2. Where , set anchor bolts in plastic, galvanized steel or stainless steel sleeves

to allow for adjustment. Fill sleeves with grout when a machine or other equipment is grouted in place.

C. Anchor rods. 1. Install as specified for anchor bolts.

D. Concrete inserts. 1. Provide inserts with minimum clear concrete cover not less than that specified

for reinforcing bars.

E. Deformed bar anchors. 1. Butt weld to steel fabrications with automatic stud welding gun as

recommended by manufacturer. 2. Ensure that butt weld develops the full strength of the anchor.

F. Welded studs: 1. Butt weld to steel fabrications with automatic stud welding gun as

recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Ensure that butt weld develops full strength of the stud.


3.04 INSTALLATION: POST-INSTALLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS.

A. Epoxy and acrylic adhesive bonding of reinforcing bars, all thread rods, and internally threaded inserts in concrete: As specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

3.05 INSTALLATION: POST-INSTALLED MECHANICAL ANCHORS.

A. General: 1. Install anchors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, ACI 355.2,

the anchor’s ICC-ES Report. Where conflict exists between the ICC-ES Report and the requirements in this Section, the requirements of the ICC-ES Report shall control.

2. Where anchor manufacturer recommends the use of special tools and/or specific drill bits for installation, provide and use such tools.

3. After anchors have been positioned and inserted into concrete or masonry, do not: a. Remove and reuse/reinstall anchors. b. Loosen or remove bolts or studs.

B. Holes drilled into concrete and masonry. 1. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until the material has achieved its

minimum specified compression strength (f’c or f’m). 2. Accurately locate holes.

a. Before drilling holes, use a reinforcing bar locator to identify the position of all reinforcing steel, conduit, and other embedded items within a 6 -inch radius of each proposed hole.

b. If the hole depth exceeds the range of detection for the rebar locator, the Owner may require radiographs of the area designated for investigation before drilling commences.

3. Exercise care to avoid damaging existing reinforcement and other items embedded in concrete and masonry. a. If embedments are encountered during drilling, immediately stop work and

notify the Owner. Await Owner’s instructions before proceeding. 4. Unless otherwise indicated by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer, drill

holes perpendicular to the concrete surface into which they are placed. 5. Drill using anchor manufacturer’s recommended equipment and procedures.

a. Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, drill in accordance with the following: 1) Drilling equipment: Electric or pneumatic rotary type with light or

medium impact. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to prevent micro-cracking and concrete spalling during drilling process.

2) Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15. Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.

6. Drill holes at manufacture’s recommended diameter and to depth required to provide the effective embedment indicated.

7. Clean and prepare holes as recommended by the manufacturer and as required by the ICC-ES Report for that anchor. a. Unless otherwise recommended by anchor manufacturer, remove dust

and debris using brushes and clean compressed air.


b. Repeat cleaning process as required by the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

c. When cleaning holes for stainless steel anchors, use only stainless steel or non-metallic brushes.

C. Insert and tighten (or torque) anchors in full compliance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1. Once anchor is tightened (torque), do not attempt to loosen or remove its bolt

or stud.

D. Concrete anchors: Minimum effective embedment lengths unless otherwise indicated by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer:

CONCRETE ANCHORS

Nominal Diameter

Minimum Effective Embedment Length

Minimum Required Member Thickness In Concrete

In Grouted Masonry

3/8 inch 2 1/2 inch 2 5/8 inch 8 inch



3/4 inch 5 inch 5 1/4 inch 12 inch

E. Flush shell anchors: 1. Flush shell anchors are not permitted in the Work. 2. If equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions recommend the use of

flush shell anchors, contact Owner for instructions before proceeding.

F. Sleeve anchors: 1. Minimum effective embedment lengths unless otherwise indicated by primary

clarifier equipment manufacturer:

SLEEVE ANCHORS

Nominal Diameter

Minimum Effective Embedment Length

Minimum Member Thickness In Concrete

In Grouted Masonry

M8 (1/2 inch) 70 mm (2 3/4 inch) Not accepted 100 mm (8 inch)

M10 (5/8 inch) 76 mm (3 inch) Not accepted 250 mm (10 inch)


2. Install with the sleeve fully engaged in the base material.

G. Screw anchors: 1. Minimum effective embedment lengths unless otherwise indicated by primary



SCREW ANCHORS

Nominal Diameter

Minimum Effective Embedment Length Minimum Member

Thickness In Concrete In Grouted Masonry



5/8 inch 4 inch 5 inch 10 inch


2. Install screw anchors using equipment and methods recommended by the manufacturer. Continue driving into hole until the washer head is flush against the item being fastened.

H. Undercut concrete anchors: 1. Minimum effective embedment lengths unless otherwise indicated by primary


SLEEVE ANCHORS

Nominal Diameter

(bolt)

Minimum Effective Embedment Length Minimum Member

Thickness(1) In Concrete In Grouted Masonry





Notes: (1) Thickness indicated is for pre-set units If through-set units are accepted, obtain minimum member

thickness requirements from the Engineer.

2. Installations of undercut anchors shall not be allowed where edge distances are less than 12 times the nominal diameter of the anchor stud.

3. Undercut bottom of hole using cutting tools manufactured for this purpose by the manufacturer of the undercut anchors being placed.


A. Contractor shall provide quality control over the Work of this Section as specified in Section 01_45_00. 1. Expenses associated with work described by the following paragraphs shall be

paid by the Contractor.

B. Post-installed anchors: 1. Review anchor manufacturer’s installation instructions and requirements of the

Evaluation Service Report (hereafter referred to as “installation documents”) for each anchor type and material.

2. Observe hole-drilling and cleaning operations for conformance with the installation documents.


3. Certify in writing to the Owner that the depth and location of anchor holes, and the torque applied for setting the anchors conforms to the requirements of the installation documents.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Owner will provide on-site observation and field quality assurance for the Work of this Section. 1. Expenses associated with work described by the following paragraphs shall be

paid by the Owner.

B. Field inspections and special inspections: 1. Required inspections: Observe construction for conformance to the approved

Contract Documents, the accepted submittals, and manufacturer’s installation instructions for the products used.

2. Record of inspections: a. Maintain record of each inspection. b. Submit copies to Owner upon request.

3. Statement of special inspections: At the end of the project, prepare and submit to the Owner and the authority having jurisdiction inspector’s statement that the Work was constructed in general conformance with the approved Contract Documents, and that deficiencies observed during construction were resolved.

C. Special inspections: Anchors cast into concrete and built into masonry. 1. Provide special inspection during positioning of anchors and placement of

concrete or masonry (including mortar and grout) around the following anchors: a. Anchor bolts. b. Anchor rods. c. Concrete inserts (all types). d. Deformed bar anchors. e. Welded studs.

2. During placement, provide continuous special inspection at each anchor location to verify that the following elements of the installation conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. a. Anchor:

1) Type and dimensions. 2) Material: Galvanized steel, Type 304 stainless steel, or Type 316

stainless steel as specified in this Section. 3) Positioning: Spacing, edge distances, effective embedment, and

projection beyond the surface of the construction. 4) Reinforcement at anchor: Presence, positioning, and size of

additional reinforcement at anchors to be coordinated by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

3. Following hardening and curing of the concrete or masonry surrounding the anchors, provide periodic special inspection to observe and confirm the following: a. Base material (concrete or grouted masonry):

1) Solid and dense concrete or grouted masonry material within required distances surrounding anchor.

2) Material encapsulating embedment is dense and well-consolidated.


D. Special Inspections: Post-installed mechanical anchors placed in hardened concrete and in grouted masonry. 1. Provide special inspection during installation of the following anchors:

a. Concrete anchors. b. Sleeve anchors. c. Screw anchors. d. Undercut concrete anchors.

2. Unless otherwise noted, provide periodic special inspection during positioning, drilling, placing, and torquing of anchors. a. Provide continuous special inspection for post-installed anchors in

“overhead installations” as defined in this Section. 3. Requirements for periodic special inspection:

a. Verify items listed in the following paragraphs for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the Evaluation Report for the anchor being used. Observe the initial installation of each type and size of anchor, and subsequent installation of the same anchor at intervals of not more than 4 hours. 1) Any change in the anchors used, in the personnel performing the

installation, or in procedures used to install a given type of anchor, shall require a new “initial inspection.”

b. Substrate: Concrete or masonry surfaces receiving the anchor are sound and of a condition that will develop the anchor’s rated strength.

c. Anchor: 1) Manufacturer, type, and dimensions (diameter and length). 2) Material (galvanized, Type 304 stainless steel, or Type 316 stainless

steel). d. Hole:

1) Positioning: Spacing and edge distances. 2) Drill bit type and diameter. 3) Diameter, and depth. 4) Hole cleaned in accordance with manufacturer’s required

procedures. Confirm multiple repetitions of cleaning when recommended by the manufacturer.

5) Anchor’s minimum effective embedment. 6) Anchor tightening/installation torque.

4. Requirements for continuous special inspection: a. The special inspector shall observe all aspects of anchor installation,

except that holes may be drilled in his/her absence provided that he/she confirms the use of acceptable drill bits before drilling, and later confirms the diameter, depth, and cleaning of drilled holes.

E. Field tests: 1. Owner may, at any time, request testing to confirm that materials being

delivered and installed conform to the requirements of the Specifications. a. If such additional testing shows that the materials do not conform to the

specified requirements, the Contractor shall pay the costs of these tests. b. If such additional testing shows that the materials do conform to the

specified requirements, the Owner shall pay the costs of these tests.

3.08 NON-CONFORMING WORK.

A. Remove miss-aligned or non-performing anchors.


B. Fill empty anchor holes and repair failed anchor locations using high-strength, non-shrink, non-metallic grout.

C. If more than 10 percent of all tested anchors of a given diameter and type fail to achieve their specified torque or proof load, the Owner will provide directions for required modifications. Make such modifications, up to and including replacement of all anchors, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.09 SCHEDULES

A. Stainless steel. Provide and install stainless steel anchors at the following locations. 1. At locations specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

B. Galvanized: Provide and install galvanized carbon steel anchors at the following locations: 1. At locations specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05_12_05

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Structural steel shapes and plate. 2. Fasteners and structural hardware:

a. All thread rods. b. All thread rods, high-strength. c. Forged steel structural hardware. d. High-strength bolts.

3. Welding. 4. Bolting.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 05_05_24 – Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete

and Masonry. b. Section 09_96_01 – High-Performance Coatings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. 303 – Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. 360 – Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. Steel and stainless steel alloys (“types”) as indicated.

C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A5.1 – Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc

Welding. 2. A5.17 – Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged

Arc Welding. 3. A5.20 – Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding. 4. D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel. 5. D1.6 – Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.


D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 6 – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural

Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. 2. A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. A 53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless. 4. A 123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products. 5. A 153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 6. A 193 – Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting

Materials for High-Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

7. A 194 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars Subject to Restricted End-Quench Hardenability Requirements.

8. A 240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

9. A 276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 10. A 325 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 11. A 380 – Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of

Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. 12. A 489 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes. 13. A 490 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated,

150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 14. A 500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 15. A 501 – Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing. 16. A 563 – Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 17. A 992 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 18. F 436 – Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 19. F 959 – Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension

Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. 20. F 2329 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for

Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners.

E. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): 1. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts

(RCSC Specification).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Snug-tight: At bolted joints, the tightness attained with a few impacts of an impact wrench, or by the full effort of an ironworker using a spud wrench to bring the connected plies into firm contact.

B. Stainless steel related terms: 1. Descaling: Removal of heavy, tightly adherent oxide films resulting from

hot-forming, heat-treatment, welding, and other high-temperature operations.


2. Pickling: Chemical descaling of stainless steel using aqueous solutions of nitric and hydrofluoric acid, or various proprietary formulations as specified.

3. Passivation: Chemical treatment of stainless steel with a mild oxidant for the purpose of enhancing the spontaneous formation of the steel’s protective passive film.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data: 1. Compressible-washer-type direct tension indicators: Manufacturer’s detailed

installation instructions including: a. Requirements for type and frequency of pre-installation verification. b. Requirements for coordination with regular washers. c. Instructions for assembling and tightening the joint so that work

progresses from the most rigid part until the connected plies are in firm contact.

2. Stainless steel: Fabricator name and qualifications, and specifications and procedures used for pickling and passivating members.

B. Quality control submittals: 1. Submit shop drawings of members to be fabricated before starting fabrication. 2. Welder’s certificates. 3. Submit steel fabricator's AISC certification.

C. Test reports: 1. Certified copies of mill tests and analyses made in accordance with applicable

ASTM standards, or reports from a recognized commercial laboratory, including chemical and tensile properties of each shipment of structural steel or part thereof having common properties.


A. Qualifications: 1. Perform welding of structural metals with welders who have current AWS

certificate for the type of welding to be performed. 2. Steel fabricators shall be certified by the AISC or other certification as

recognized and accepted by the local building official having jurisdiction. 3. Notify Owner 24 hours minimum before starting shop or field welding. 4. Owner may check materials, equipment, and qualifications of welders. 5. Remove welders performing unsatisfactory Work, or require to requalification. 6. Owner may use gamma ray, magnetic particle, dye penetrant, trepanning, or

other aids to visual inspection to examine any part of welds or all welds. 7. Contractor shall bear costs of retests on defective welds. 8. Contractor shall also bear costs in connection with qualifying welders.

B. Certification: 1. Steel fabricators shall be certified by the AISC or other certification acceptable

to the local building official having jurisdiction.


A. Packing and shipping: Deliver structural steel free from mill scale, rust, and pitting.


B. Storage and protection: Until erection and painting, protect from weather items not galvanized or protected by a shop coat of paint.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer, materials shall conform to the following:

Item ASTM Standard Class, Grade, Type, or

Alloy Number

Steel

Plate, bars, rolled shapes (except W and WT shapes), and miscellaneous items

A 36 --

Rolled W and WT shapes A 992 Grade 50

Hollow structural sections (HSS): Round, square, or rectangular

A 500 Grade B

Round HSS A 500 Grade B

Steel pipe A 53 Grade B

Stainless steel

Plate, sheet, and strip A 240 Type 304* or 316**

Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304* or 316**

* Use Type 304L if material will be welded.

** Use Type 316L if material will be welded.

B. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.

2.02 FASTENERS AND STRUCTURAL HARDWARE

A. General: 1. Materials: Of domestic manufacture. 2. Where fasteners and hardware are specified to be galvanized, galvanize in

accordance with ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329.

B. All thread rods: 1. Stainless steel:

a. Units descaled, pickled, and passivated as specified in “Fabrication” in this Section.

b. Threaded rods and nuts to be the products of a single manufacturer/fabricator to ensure proper fit without galling. Ship threaded rods with properly fitting nuts attached.

c. Alloy as specified. 1) Alloy 316/316L:


a) Bolts: ASTM A 193, Grade B8M, Class 1, heavy hex. b) Nuts: ASTM A 194, Grade 8M, heavy hex. c) Washers: Type 316 stainless steel.

C. Anchor bolts, anchor rods, and post-installed steel anchors: As specified in the equipment sections and as specified in Section 05_05_24.

D. Forged steel structural hardware: 1. Clevises and turnbuckles: Forged steel in accordance with AISI C-1035. Eye

nuts / Eye bolts: Forged steel in accordance with AISI C-1030. a. Having geometric and strength characteristics (including proof load,

breaking strength, tensile strength, bend test, and impact strength) of eyebolts in accordance with ASTM A 489, Type 1.

2. Sleeve nuts: Forged steel in accordance with AISI C-1018 Grade 2.

E. High-strength bolts: 1. Provide high-strength bolt assembly, with nuts, hardened flat washers, and

compressible-washer-type direct tension indicatorsUncoated: a. Bolts: Plain heavy hex structural bolts in accordance with ASTM A 325

Type 1 or ASTM A 490 Type 1. b. Nuts: Heavy hex nuts in accordance with ASTM A 563, Grade C. c. Washers: Flat:

1) Adjacent to normal, oversized, and short-slotted holes: Circular and square or rectangular beveled washers in accordance with ASTM F 436.

2) Adjacent to long slotted holes: 5/16-inch thick plate washer fabricated from steel in accordance with ASTM A 36.

d. Washers: Tension indicating: In accordance with ASTM F 959.

F. Stainless steel bolts (for use in stainless steel structures): 1. General:

a. Alloy: Type 304/304L or Type 316/316L, to match alloy of structural members being connected.

b. Units descaled, pickled and passivated as specified in “Fabrication of this Section”

c. Bolts and nuts shall be the products of a single manufacturer/fabricator to ensure proper fit without galling.

2. Alloy 304/304L: a. Bolts: ASTM A 193, Grade B8, Class 1, heavy hex. b. Nuts: ASTM A 194, Grade 8, heavy hex. c. Washers: Type 304 stainless steel.

3. Alloy 316/316L: a. Bolts: ASTM A 193, Grade B8M, Class 1, heavy hex. b. Nuts: ASTM A 194, Grade 8M, heavy hex. c. Washers: Type 316 stainless steel.

4. Welded studs: As specified in Section 05_05_24.

2.03 ISOLATING SLEEVES AND WASHERS



2.04 GALVANIZED SURFACE REPAIR

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal: 1. Galvinox. 2. Galvo-Weld.

2.05 THREAD COATING

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal: 1. Never Seez Compound Corporation, Never-Seez. 2. Oil Research, Inc., WLR No. 111.

2.06 SUPPLEMENTARY PARTS

A. Furnish as required for complete structural steel erection, whether or not such parts and Work are specified.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Shop assembly: 1. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC 360 and AISC 303 unless

otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements. 2. Where anchors, connections, or other details of structural steel are not

specifically specified, their material, size and form shall be equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified.

3. Round off sharp and hazardous projections and grind smooth. 4. Take measurements necessary to properly fit work in the field. Take

responsibility for and be governed by the measurements and proper working out of all the details.

5. Take responsibility for correct fitting of all metalwork.

B. Stainless steel shapes and assemblies: 1. For structural members such as W shapes, S shapes, channels, angles, and

similar rolled shapes not available in quantity, size, and type of stainless steel specified: a. Fabricate shapes using laser-fused, full penetration welds between pieces

of plate to attain same or higher section modulus and moment of inertia as that of members indicated by the primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

b. Fabricate shapes from dual grade stainless steel. c. Fabricate beams and channels to ASTM A 6 tolerances. d. Manufacturers: The following, or equal:

1) Stainless Structurals, LLC, Jacksonville, FL. 2. Cleaning and passivation:

a. Following shop fabrication of stainless steel members and bolts, clean and passivate fabrications at point of manufacture.

b. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale and other impurities, and obtain a bright passive finished surface with no etching, pitting, frosting, or discoloration.

c. Provide quality control testing to verify effectiveness of cleaning agents and procedures and to confirm that finished surfaces are clean and passivated.


1) Conduct sample runs using test specimens with proposed cleaning agents and procedures as required to avoid adverse effects on surface finishes and base materials.

d. Following shop fabrication, clearing, and passivation of stainless fabrications is required. 1) Clean (pickle) and passivate in accordance with ASTM A 380 or A

967. 2) All fabricated stainless steel surfaces (except machined surfaces)

shall be abrasive blast cleaned with maximum 80 mesh size sand that has been certified clean and free of ferrous materials, to a uniform finish and until all heat tint and embedded iron are removed. Blasting shall be followed by testing for embedded or free iron by spraying the stainless steel with phosphoric acid. Twenty-four (24) hours after spraying the stainless steel shall be rinsed with water containing a maximum total solid content of 200 ppm and allowed to dry. Any signs of iron contamination after the stainless steel is dry shall require the phosphoric acid spraying and rinsing to be repeated until a chemically clean passive finished surface is obtained.

e. Inspect after cleaning using methods specified for “gross inspection” in ASTM A 380.

f. Improperly or poorly cleaned and passivated materials shall not be shipped and will not be accepted at the site.

C. Galvanized steel: 1. Where galvanizing is required, hot-dip structural steel after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A 123: 2. Do not electro-galvanize or mechanically-galvanize unless specified or

accepted by Owner. 3. Re-straighten galvanized items that bend or twist during galvanizing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this Work until such conditions have been corrected.

3.02 ERECTION

A. General: 1. Fabricate structural and foundry items to true dimensions without warp or twist. 2. Form welded closures neatly, and grind off smooth where weld material

interferes with fit or is unsightly. 3. Install structural items accurately and securely, true to level, plumb, in correct

alignment and grade, with all parts bearing or fitting structure or equipment for which intended.

4. Do not cock out of alignment, re-drill, re-shape, or force fit fabricated items. 5. Place anchor bolts or other anchoring devices accurately and make surfaces

that bear against structural items smooth and level.


6. Rigidly support and brace structural items needing special alignment to preserve straight, level, even, and smooth lines. Keep structural items braced until concrete, grout, or dry pack mortar has hardened for 48 hours minimum.

7. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC 360 unless otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements.

8. Where anchors, connections, and other details of structural steel erection are not specifically specified, form, locate, and attach with equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified.

9. Round off sharp or hazardous projections and grind smooth. 10. Coat steel items as specified in Section 09_96_01.

B. Stainless steel. Take all necessary precautions to avoid iron contamination of stainless steel during delivery, storage, and handling. 1. Segregate stainless steel from iron. 2. Tools and handling devices.

a. Do not use iron tools clamps, chokes, working surfaces, or brushes when fabricating, handling, and erecting stainless steel.

b. Do not use tools that have been contaminated by contact with iron. c. Use stainless steel, polymer coated, or wood tools and handling

equipment. Do not use tools that have been contaminated by contract with iron or steel.

C. Welding: General: 1. Make welds full penetration type., unless otherwise indicated by primary

clarifier equipment manufacturer. 2. Remove backing bars and weld tabs after completion of weld. Repair defective

welds observed after removal of backing bars and weld tabs.

D. Welding stainless steel: 1. General: In accordance with AWS D1.6. 2. Field welding of stainless steel will not be permitted. 3. Passivation of field-welded surfaces:

a. Provide cleaning, pickling and passivating as specified under “Fabrications” of this Section. Clean using Derustit Stainless Steel Cleaner, or equal.

E. Welding carbon steel: 1. General: In accordance with AWS D1.1:

a. Weld ASTM A 36 and A 992 structural steel, ASTM A 500 and A 501 structural tubing, and ASTM A 53 pipe with electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1, using E70XX electrodes; AWS A5.17, using F7X-EXXX electrodes; or AWS A5.20, using E7XT-X electrodes:

b. Field repair cut or otherwise damaged galvanized surfaces to equivalent original condition using a galvanized surface repair.

F. Interface with other products: 1. Where steel members and fasteners come in contact with dissimilar metals

(aluminum, stainless steel, etc.), separate or isolate the dissimilar metals with isolating sleeves and washers as specified in Section 05_05_24.

G. Fasteners: General: 1. Install bolts to project 2 threads minimum, but 1/2 inch maximum beyond nut.


2. Anchor bolts and anchor rods: Install as specified in Section 05_05_24. a. Unless otherwise specified, tighten nuts on anchor bolts and anchor rods

specified in Section 05_05_24 to the "snug-tight" condition. 3. All thread rods in drilled holes and bonded to concrete with epoxy: Install as

specified by primary clarifier equipment manufacturer.

H. Fasteners: High-strength bolts: 1. Connections with high-strength bolts shall in accordance with RCSC

Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. 2. Provide slip-critical joints at bolted connections. 3. Joints: Slip-critical.

a. Confirm that faying surfaces at connections are free of dirt and other foreign material, have been blast cleaned, and are free of coatings and inadvertent overspray in accordance with RCSC Specification.

b. Furnish hardened flat washers in accordance with ASTM F 436: 1) On outer plies with slotted holes. 2) When 1 or more plies of the connected material has a yield strength

less than 40 ksi. 3) Under element, nut, or bolt head, turned in tightening.

c. Install tension indicator washers, placed in accordance with ASTM F 959 Figure X1, to confirm adequate tightening of bolts.

d. Tighten bolts to full pretension.

I. Fasteners: Stainless steel bolts:AD2 1. Connections shall be snug-tight joints unless otherwise indicated by primary

clarifier equipment manufacturer. 2. Prior to installing nuts, coat threads of stainless steel fasteners with thread

coating to prevent galling of threads. 3. Rotate nuts using a slow, smooth action without interruptions. Avoid over-

tightening.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05_50_00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Aluminum grating stair tread. 2. Aluminum stair nosing. 3. Cast iron stop plank grooves. 4. Concrete inserts. 5. Handrails and guardrails. 6. Ladders. 7. Manhole frames and covers. 8. Metal gratings. 9. Metal tread plate. 10. Preformed channel pipe supports. 11. Stairs. 12. Miscellaneous metals. 13. Associated accessories to the above items.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 09_96_01 – High Performance Coatings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45: Designations from Start to Finish.

a. M12-C22-A41.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A 48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. A 53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded, and Seamless. 4. A 123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products.


5. A 240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels for General Applications.

6. A 276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 7. A 307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI

Tensile Strength. 8. A 325 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 9. A 380 – Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of

Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. 10. A 489 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes. 11. A 490 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated ,

150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 12. A 500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 13. A 501 – Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing. 14. A 635 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness

Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, General Requirements for.

15. A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

16. A 992 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 17. B 209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate. 18. B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded

Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 19. B 308 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard

Structural Profiles. 20. B 429 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe

and Tube. 21. F 593 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and

Studs.

D. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A2.4 – Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive

Examination.

E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual.

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Passivation: Removal of exogenous iron or iron compounds from the surface of a stainless steel by means of chemical dissolution resulting from treatment with an acid solution that removes the surface contamination but does not significantly affect the stainless steel itself.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Aluminum grating stair tread. 2. Aluminum stair nosing. 3. Cast iron stop plank grooves. 4. Handrail and guardrail. 5. Manhole frames and covers. 6. Metal grating.

B. Shop drawings: 1. Handrails and guardrails:

a. Including details on connection attachments, gates, kick plates, ladders, and angles.

b. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.

c. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. d. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols.

Indicate net weld lengths. 2. Ladders. 3. Metal grating. 4. Metal tread plate. 5. Stairs. 6. Miscellaneous metals.

C. Samples: 1. Guardrails with specified finishes.

D. Quality control submittals: 1. Design data. 2. Test reports:

a. Guardrails: 3 copies of certified tests performed by an independent testing laboratory certifying that guardrails meet current State and OSHA strength requirements.

b. Gratings: 1) Grating manufacturers' calculations showing that gratings will meet

specified design load, stress, and deflection requirements for each size grating for each span.

2) Reports of tests performed. c. Planks:

1) Plank manufacturers' calculations showing that planks will meet specified load-bearing and deflection requirements for each size plank for each span.

2) Reports of tests performed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Structural and miscellaneous metals in accordance with the standards of the ASTM, including the following:


Item ASTM

Standard No. Class, Grade

Type or Alloy No.

Cast Iron:

Cast Iron A 48 Class 40B

Steel:

Galvanized sheet iron or steel A 653 Coating G90

Coil (plate) A 635 --

Structural plate, bars, rolled shapes, and miscellaneous items (except W shapes).

A 36 --

Rolled W shapes A 992 Grade 50

Standard bolts, nuts, and washers A 307 --

High strength bolts, nuts, and hardened flat washers

A 325 A 490

--

Eyebolts A 489 Type 1

Tubing, cold-formed A 500 --

Tubing, hot-formed A 501 --

Steel pipe A 53 Grade B

Stainless Steel:

Plate, sheet, and strip A 240 Type 304* or 316**

Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304* or 316**

Bolts (Type 304) F593 Group 1 Condition CW

Bolts (Type 316) F593 Group 2 Condition CW

Aluminum:

Flashing sheet aluminum B 209 Alloy 5005-H14, 0.032 inches minimum

thickness

Structural sheet aluminum- B 209 Alloy 6061-T6

Structural aluminum B 209 B 308

Alloy 6061-T6

Extruded aluminum B 221 Alloy 6063-T42

* Use Type 304L if material will be welded. ** Use Type 316L if material will be welded.

1. Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM. 2. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.


A. Aluminum grating stair tread: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. IKG Borden Industries, Aluminum Grating Stair Tread with Mebac nosing. b. McNichols Co., Type A-Standard with Corrugated Angle Nosing.


2. Material: Welded aluminum grating tread with non-slip nosing and integral end plates for bolt on attachment to stair stringers

3. Size: a. Tread width: To equal tread spacing plus 1 inch minimum. b. Tread length: Length to suit stringer-to-stringer dimension indicated on the

Drawings. c. Depth: 1-3/4 inches.

4. Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Aluminum stair nosing: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Wooster Products, Inc., Type 101 Nosing. b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc., Style 801 Nosing.

2. Material: Cast aluminum abrasive nosings with aluminum oxide granules integrally cast into metal, forming permanent, nonslip, long-wearing surface.

3. For installation in cast-in-place stairs. 4. Configuration: 4 inches wide, fabricated with integrally cast stainless steel

anchors at approximately 12-inch centers. Length to extend within 3 inches of stair edge on each side.

C. Cast iron stop plank grooves: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Neenah Foundry Company, R-7500 Series, Type A. b. McKinley Iron Works, Type L.

2. Size: 2-inch wide groove opening by 1-1/2 inch deep, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

3. Recess groove with the cast iron surface of the groove set flush with the concrete surface.

D. Concrete inserts: 1. Concrete inserts for supporting pipe and other applications are specified in

Section 40_05_07.01.

E. Handrails and guardrails: 1. General:

a. Design and fabricate assemblies to conform to current local, State, and OSHA standards and requirements.

b. Coordinate layout of assemblies and post spacings to avoid conflicts with equipment and equipment operators. 1) Indicate on the shop drawings locations of such equipment. 2) Highlight locations where railings cannot be made continuous, and

obtain Owner’s directions on how to proceed before fabricating or installing railings.

2. Aluminum handrails and guardrails (nonwelded pipe): a. Rails, posts, and fitting-assembly spacers:

1) In accordance with ASTM B 429, 6005, 6063 or 6105, minimum Schedule 40, extruded aluminum pipe of minimum 1.89-inch outside diameter and 0.14-inch wall thickness.

b. Kick plates: 6061 or 6105 aluminum alloy. c. Fastenings and fasteners: As recommended or furnished by the

manufacturer. Concrete anchors shall be epoxy as specified in 03_21_17.


d. Other parts: 6063 extruded aluminum, or F214 or F514.0 aluminum castings: 1) Fabrications: In accordance with ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221

extruded bars: a) Bases: 6061 or 6063 extruded aluminum alloy.

2) Plug screws or blind rivets: Type 305 stainless steel. a) Other parts: Type 300 series stainless steel.

e. Finish of aluminum components: 1) Anodized finish, 0.7 mil thick, applied to exposed surfaces after

cutting. Aluminum Association Specification M12-C22-A41, mechanical finish non specular as fabricated, chemical finish-medium matte, anodic coating-clear Class I Architectural.

2) Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before anodizing.

f. Fabrication and assembly: 1) Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length. 2) Perform without welding. 3) Do not epoxy bond the parts. 4) Maximum clear opening between assembled railing components as

indicated on the Drawings. g. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Moultrie Manufacturing Company, Wesrail. 2) Golden Railings, Golden, CO, Riveted System. 3) Craneveyor Corporation Enerco Metals, C-V Rail.

3. Steel pipe handrails and guardrails: a. Schedule 40 black steel pipe with minimum 1.9-inch outside diameter. b. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length. c. Kick plates: Galvanized steel. d. Attachment devices: Provide clip angles and other fasteners necessary for

securing handrails and guardrails to other construction.. e. Continuously weld joints and grind smooth. f. Bend rails to profile without sharp bends or flat spots. Rails shall be round

after bending. g. Neatly weld intersection of rails and posts, and grind surfaces smooth.

4. Stainless steel pipe handrails and guardrails: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) R & B Wagner, Inc. 2) Julius Blum and Company.

b. General: Prefabricated shop-assembled type, field welded type, or mechanically joined type.

c. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel posts, rails, brackets, and accessory parts: 1) Railings and posts: Nominal 1-1/2 inch, Schedule 5 pipe with

minimum 1.90-inch outer diameter and 0.065-inch wall thickness. 2) Post insert reinforcing for all posts: 1.750 inch outside diameter pipe,

of 0.083-inch wall thickness, and 26 inches long. 3) Fasteners, connection plates, splice bars, and fittings: Type 304 or

Type 316 stainless steel. 4) Stainless steel finish: Number 4 satin finish in accordance with

NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual. d. Fabrication:

1) Fabricate guardrails and posts to be in same plane.


2) Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length. 3) Make handrail and guardrail sections with 20 feet maximum between

splices. 4) Form bends in pipe without use of fittings where practical. Form with

internal mandrels on power benders. 5) Where handrail and guardrail are welded, make intersections and

joints with continuous 360-degree welds and grind welds smooth. 6) Where handrail and guardrail are mechanically joined, make joints

with mechanical connections utilizing stainless steel machine screws with lock washers and threaded tubular rivets.

5. Guardrail gates: a. Supplied by guardrail manufacturer:

1) Of same material, quality, and workmanship as specified for guardrail system in which they will be installed.

2) Of design similar to that of handrail or railing system in which they will be installed.

b. Components: Gate frame, stainless steel self-closing device, hinges, gate stops, and durable self-locking type latch. Fabricate components in conformance with OSHA minimum strength requirements.

6. Fastenings and fasteners: As recommended or furnished by guardrail manufacturer for use with this system.

F. Ladders: 1. General:

a. Type: Safety type conforming to local, State, and OSHA standards as minimum. Furnish guards for ladder wells.

b. Size: 18 inches wide between side rails of length, size, shape, detail, and location indicated on the Drawings.

2. Aluminum ladders: a. Materials: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. b. Rungs:

1) 1-inch minimum solid square bar with 1/8-inch grooves in top and deeply serrated on all sides.

2) Capable of withstanding 1,000 pound load without failure. c. Side rails: Minimum 4-inch by 1/2-inch flat bars. d. Finish of aluminum components:

1) Anodized finish, 0.7 mil thick, applied to exposed surfaces after cutting. Aluminum Association Specification M12-C22-A41, mechanical finish non specular as fabricated, chemical finish-medium matte, anodic coating-clear Class I Architectural.

2) Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before anodizing.

e. Fabrication: 1) Welded construction, of size, shape, location, and details indicated

on the Drawings. 2) For ladders over 20 feet high, furnish standard ladder cages or fall

prevention system designed in accordance with State and OSHA requirements.

f. Fall prevention system: Include but not limit to railing, brackets, clamps, 2 sleeves, and 2 belts, satisfying OSHA safe climbing requirements: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) North Consumer Products, Saf-T-Climb.


b) Swager Communications, Climbers Buddy System.

G. Manhole frames and covers: 1. Material: Gray iron castings, in accordance with ASTM A 48, Class 30-B. 2. Type: Heavy-duty traffic type, with combined minimum set weight of

265 pounds. 3. Machine horizontal and vertical bearing surfaces to fit neatly, with easily

removable cover bearing firmly in frame without rocking. 4. Frame:

a. Bottom flange type. b. Approximately 4-1/2 inches frame height. c. Dimensions as specified.

1) Minimum inside clear dimension may not be smaller than nominal diameter minus 2 inches.

5. Cover: a. Skid-resistant grid pattern design stamped with name of utility service

provided by manhole, such as "ELECTRICAL," "SEWER," "TELEPHONE," or "WATER."

b. Solid type without ventilation holes. 6. Finish: Unpainted.

H. Metal gratings: 1. General:

a. Fabricate grating to cover areas specified. b. Grating over an opening shall cover entire opening. c. Make cutouts in grating where required for equipment access or

protrusion, including valve operators or stems, and gate frames. d. Band ends of grating and edges of cutouts in grating:

1) End banding: 1/4 inch less than height of grating, with top of grating and top edge of banding flush.

2) Cutout banding: Full-height of grating. 3) Use banding of same material as grating. 4) Panel layout: Enable installation and subsequent removal of grating

around protrusions or piping. 5) Openings 6 inches and larger: Lay out grating panels with edges of

2 adjacent panels located on centerline of opening. 6) Openings smaller than 6 inches: Locate opening at edge of single

panel. 7) Where an area requires more than 1 grating section to cover area,

clamp adjacent grating sections together at 1/4-points with fasteners acceptable to Owner.

8) Fabricate grating sections in units weighing not more than 50 pounds each.

e. When requested by Owner, test 1 section of each size grating for each span length involved on the job under full load: 1) Furnish a suitable dial gauge for measuring deflections.

f. Grating shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise specified. 2. Aluminum grating:

a. Material for gratings, shelf angles, and rebates: 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, except crossbars may be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.

b. Shelf angle concrete anchors: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.


c. Grating rebate rod anchors: 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. d. Bar size and spacing: As determined by manufacturer to enable grating to

support design load. e. Design live load: A minimum of 100 pounds per square foot uniform live

load on entire grating area, but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where grating is located.

f. Maximum fiber stress for design load: 12,000 pounds per square inch. g. Maximum deflection due to design load: 1/240 of grating clear span. h. Maximum spacing of main grating bars: 1-1/8 inches clear between bars. i. Minimum grating height: 1-1/2 inches. j. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) IKG Borden Industries, grooved aluminum I-bar. 2) Brodhead Steel Products, Inc., grooved aluminum I-bar.

3. Aluminum grating planks: a. Materials: Meet requirements previously specified for aluminum grating. b. Fabrication:

1) Meet requirements previously specified for aluminum grating. c. Have unpunched surface with cross hatched anti-skid surface. d. Minimum weight of 3-1/4 pounds per square foot. e. Provide 1 inch diameter hole with smooth edges at each end for each

plank. f. Furnish planks in 2 foot widths. g. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) IKG, Heavy Duty Aluminum Plank Grating HD-P. h. Planks shall not lock with adjacent planks allowing the removal of

individual planks without disturbing the adjacent planks. 4. Steel gratings:

a. Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. b. Bar size and spacing: As determined by the manufacturer to support

design load. c. Design live load: A minimum of 100 pounds per square foot uniform live

load on the entire area of the grating area, but not less than the live load indicated on the Drawings for the area where the grating is located.

d. Maximum fiber stress for design load: 18,000 pounds per square inch. e. Maximum deflection under design load: 1/240 of grating clear span. f. Bar spacing: Maximum of 1-1/8 inches clear between bars. g. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) IKG Borden Industries, IKG Weldforged. 2) Brodhead Steel Products, Inc., Type 19 W 4.

5. Heavy-duty steel grating: a. Heavy-duty type, fabricated from structural steel and designed in

accordance with AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, using H-20 loading.

b. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Reliance Steel Products Company, Heavy-Duty Steel Grating. 2) Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc., equivalent product.

I. Metal tread plate: 1. Plate having a raised figured pattern on 1 surface to provide improved traction.


J. Stairs: 1. Aluminum stairs:

a. Stringers: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy. b. Stair treads:

1) Aluminum of same type specified under Aluminum Grating. 2) Of sizes indicated on the Drawings, and 1-3/4 inch minimum depth

with cast abrasive type safety nosings. c. Provide a vertical close piece between each riser. Fabricate, install, and

fasten close pieces as indicated on the Drawings. d. Handrails and guardrails: Aluminum pipe specified under Aluminum

Handrails and Guardrails (Nonwelded Pipe). e. Fasteners: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.

2. Steel stairs: a. Ships ladders shall conform to local, State, and OSHA as minimum. b. Stringers: Structural steel channels or plates. c. Treads: Open type attached to stringers with support angles and clips:

1) Borden, "Welded Tread" with Algrip nosing.

d. Railings: Steel pipe, sized as indicated on the Drawings. e. Anchors: Welded or bolted brackets designed for support and anchorage

at top and bottom. f. Finish: Prime paint finish for interior locations.

K. Miscellaneous aluminum: 1. Fabricate aluminum products, not covered separately in this Section, in

accordance with the best practices of the trade and field assemble by riveting or bolting.

2. Do not weld or flame cut.

L. Miscellaneous cast iron: 1. General:

a. Tough, gray iron, free from cracks, holes, swells, and cold shuts. b. Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on rectangular

edge of casting without flaking metal. c. Before leaving the foundry, clean castings and apply 16-mil dry film

thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy, unless otherwise specified.

M. Miscellaneous stainless steel: 1. Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified in this Section

specified elsewhere. a. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade.

2. Cleaning and passivation. a. Following shop fabrication of stainless steel members, clean and

passivate fabrications. b. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale and

other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. c. Provide quality control testing to verify effectiveness of cleaning agents

and procedures and to confirm that finished surfaces are clean and passivated. 1) Conduct sample runs using test specimens with proposed cleaning

agents and procedures as required to avoid adverse effects on surface finishes and base materials.


d. Following shop fabrication, cleaning, and passivation of stainless fabrications is required: 1) Clean (pickle) and passivate in accordance with ASTM A 380 or A

967. 2) All fabricated stainless steel surfaces (except machined surfaces)

shall be abrasive blast cleaned with maximum 80 mesh size sand that has been certified clean and free of ferrous materials, to a uniform finish and until all heat tint and embedded iron are removed. Blasting shall be followed by testing for embedded or free iron by spraying the stainless steel with phosphoric acid. Twenty-four (24) hours after spraying the stainless steel shall be rinsed with water containing a maximum total solid content of 200 ppm and allowed to dry. Any signs of iron contamination after the stainless steel is dry shall require the phosphoric acid spraying and rinsing to be repeated until a chemically clean passive finished surface is obtained

e. After cleaning, inspect using methods specified for “gross inspection” in ASTM A 380.

f. Improperly or poorly cleaned and passivated materials shall not be shipped and will not be accepted at the job site.

N. Miscellaneous structural steel: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified in this Section as indicated

specified elsewhere. a. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: 1. Examine work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the work of this

Section. 2. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this work until such conditions

have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install products as specified, and in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions, as applicable except where specified otherwise.

B. Aluminum stair nosing: 1. Install stair nosings on treads of concrete stairs, including top tread on upper

concrete slab. 2. Omit stair nosings where concrete is submerged. 3. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete as specified in

Section 09_96_01. 4. Cast stair nosings in fresh concrete, flush with tread and riser faces. Install

nosing in center of step approximately 3 inches from each stair edge.

C. Cast iron stop plank grooves: 1. Recess stop plank grooves with cast iron surfaces of groove set flush with

concrete surface.


D. Handrails and guardrails: 1. General:

a. Fasten pipe rails to fittings with Series 300 stainless steel pop rivets or flush set screws.

b. Make pipe cuts clean and straight, free of burrs and nicks, and square and accurate for minimum joint-gap.

c. Drill and countersink holes to proper size, as required for a tight flush fit of screws and other component parts.

d. Space attachment brackets as indicated in the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Aluminum pipe handrails and guardrails: a. During construction, keep exterior surfaces of handrails and guardrails

covered with 0.4 millimeters, minimum, heat shrink polyethylene film. b. Do not remove protective film before handrails and guardrails have been

accepted by Owner nor before other work in proximity of handrails and guardrails has been completed.

c. Discontinue handrails and guardrails at lighting fixtures. d. Provide 1/8-inch diameter weep hole at base of each post. e. Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials

electrolysis, make application such that none of the protective material is visible in the completed assembly.

f. Space posts as indicated on the Drawings. g. Anchor posts into concrete by grouting posts into formed holes in

concrete, into stainless steel sleeves cast in concrete; or bracket mount to face of concrete surfaces as specified and indicated on the Drawings.

h. Space rails as indicated on the Drawings. i. Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of kick plates and

rails. 1) Make provisions for removable sections where indicated on the

Drawings. j. Make lower rails a single, unspliced length between posts, or continuous. k. Make top rails continuous whenever possible, and attach single, unspliced

lengths to 3 posts minimum. l. Draw up fasteners tight with hand wrench or screw driver. m. Space attachment brackets as indicated on shop drawings or in

manufacturer's installation instructions. n. Completed installation shall have handrails and railings rigid and free of

play at joints and attachments. o. Protect handrail and guardrail finish from scratches, gouges, dents, stains,

and other damage. p. Replace damaged or disfigured handrails and guardrails with new. q. Shortly before final acceptance of the work, and after removal of

protective polyethylene film, clean handrails and guardrails with mild detergent or with soap and water. 1) After cleaning, thoroughly rinse handrails and guardrails and wipe

with soft cloth. r. Erect guardrail straight, level, plumb, and true to the positions as indicated

on the Drawings. Correct deviations from true line of grade, which are visible to the eye.

3. Stainless steel pipe handrails and guardrails: a. During construction, keep exterior surfaces of handrails and guardrails

covered with 0.4 millimeters, minimum, heat shrink polyethylene film.


b. Do not remove protective film before handrails and guardrails have been accepted by Owner nor before other work in proximity of handrails and guardrails has been completed.

c. Discontinue handrails and guardrails at lighting fixtures. d. Provide 1/8-inch diameter weep hole at base of each post. e. Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials

electrolysis, make application such that none of the protective material is visible in the completed assembly.

f. Space posts as indicated on the Drawings. g. Anchor posts into concrete by grouting posts into formed holes in

concrete, into stainless steel sleeves cast in concrete; or bracket mount to face of concrete surfaces as specified and indicated on the Drawings.

h. Space rails as indicated on the Drawings. i. Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of kick plates and

rails. 1) Make provisions for removable sections where indicated on the

Drawings. j. Make lower rails a single, unspliced length between posts, or continuous. k. Make top rails continuous whenever possible, and attach single, unspliced

lengths to 3 posts minimum. l. Draw up fasteners tight with hand wrench or screw driver. m. Space attachment brackets as indicated on shop drawings or in

manufacturer's installation instructions. n. Completed installation shall have handrails and railings rigid and free of

play at joints and attachments. o. Protect handrail and guardrail finish from scratches, gouges, dents, stains,

and other damage. p. Replace damaged or disfigured handrails and guardrails with new. q. Shortly before final acceptance of the work, and after removal of

protective polyethylene film, clean handrails and guardrails with mild detergent or with soap and water. 1) After cleaning, thoroughly rinse handrails and guardrails and wipe

with soft cloth. r. Erect guardrail straight, level, plumb, and true to the positions as indicated

on the Drawings. 1) Correct deviations from true line of grade that are visible to the eye.

4. Steel pipe handrail and guardrail: a. Anchor posts into concrete by grouting posts into galvanized steel sleeves

embedded in concrete as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Do not cut reinforcing bars in concrete. 2) Where required to fasten guardrail to other construction, fasten as

indicated on the Drawings. 5. Guardrail gates:

a. Install gate to be a vertical plane with the guardrail when in the closed position.

b. Install hinges so that each gate can swing 180 degrees from the closed position to the fully open position.

c. Install so that the gates swing to the walkway side of the guardrail only. 1) Install gate stops on the stationary railing posts to prohibit gates from

swinging in the wrong direction. d. Install gate frames, hinges, stops, and latches in conformance with OSHA

minimum strength requirements.


E. Ladders: 1. Secure to supporting surface with bent plate clips providing minimum 8 inches

between supporting surface and center of rungs. 2. Where exit from ladder is forward over top rung, extend side rails 3 feet

3 inches minimum above landing, and return the rails with a radius bend to the landing.

3. Where exit from ladder is to side, extend ladder 5 feet 6 inches minimum above landing and rigidly secure at top.

4. Erect rail straight, level, plumb, and true to position indicated on the Drawings. a. Correct deviations from true line or grade which are visible to the eye.

F. Metal gratings: 1. General:

a. Allow 1/8-inch maximum clearance between ends of grating and inside face of vertical leg of shelf angles.

b. Horizontal bearing leg of shelf angles shall be 2 inches minimum. c. Install Type 316 stainless steel plate or angles where necessary to fill

openings at changes in elevation and at openings between equipment and grating.

d. Install angle stops at ends of grating. e. Installed grating shall not slide out of rebate or off support. f. Weld stops in place, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the

Drawings. g. Top surfaces of grating sections adjacent to each other shall lie in same

plane. 2. Aluminum grating:

a. Coat surfaces of aluminum shelf angles, rebates, and rod anchors in contact with concrete as specified in Section 09_96_01.

b. Aluminum grating: Support on aluminum shelf angles or rebates. 3. Aluminum grating planks:

a. Support and install planks as specified for aluminum grating. 4. Steel grating:

a. Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel shelf angles or rebates. 5. Heavy-duty steel grating:

a. Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel rebates embedded and anchored in concrete.

b. Use for roadways, traffic areas, and where indicated on the Drawings.

G. Stairs: 1. General:

a. Install guard railings around stair wells as indicated on the Drawings or specified.

H. Stainless Steel 1. Welding.

a. Passivate field-welded surfaces. 1) Provide cleaning, pickling and passivating as specified in this

Section. 2) Clean using Derustit Stainless Steel Cleaner, or equal.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 06_80_17

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Fiberglass reinforced plastic fabrications including: 1. Weirs. 2. Baffles.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. F 102 - Matched-Die-Molded, Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Weir Plates, Scum

Baffles, and Mounting Brackets.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of

Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 2. D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 3. D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 4. D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation of Hardness of Rigid Plastics by

Means of a Barcol Impressor. 5. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

C. United States, Department of Agriculture (USDA).

D. United States, Department of the Interior: 1. Bureau of Reclamation (USBR):

a. ISO 9826 - Water Measurement Manual, Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channel.


A. Not Used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WEIR PLATES AND SCUM BAFFLES

A. General: 1. In accordance with AWWA F 102, and as specified in this Section.

B. Materials: 1. Laminate construction: Glass fiber-reinforced, chemical-resistant polyester

resin.


a. Glass content of laminate: Minimum 20 percent by weight. b. Resin fillers: Minimum 40 percent.

2. Physical properties of laminate: Equal to or exceeding the tensile, flexural, impact, hardness, and water absorption properties specified in AWWA F 102.

3. Performance criteria: a. Chemical resistance: Classification: AWWA F 102 Type II (chemical-

resistant resin, filler and fabrications) and suitable for long term exposure to process water.

4. Color: Manufacturer’s standard aqua/turquoise.

C. Fabrications: 1. Fabricated to the shapes, dimensions, and details as specified to match

existing, and using processes as specified in this Section. 2. Dimensions:

a. Conform to tolerances in accordance with AWWA F 102, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Final laminate thickness: Plus or minus 10 percent of nominal thickness. 3. Fabricate weir plates with oversize holes to allow vertical adjustment. 4. Seal cut edges of non-standard lengths, and edges of drilled and countersunk

holes in fiberglass reinforced plastic fabrications with resin. 5. Furnish fiberglass reinforced plastic lapped plate splices at joints.

D. Rectangular plate and V-notch weirs: 1. Fabrication:

a. Compression molded in matched metal die molds. Fabrications from plate stock with cut-in edges, ends, or V-notches will not be accepted.

b. Tolerances: In accordance with AWWA F 102, except as follows: 1) Deviation between top elevations of V-notches in a line: Maximum

1/16 inch in 6-foot length of weir plate. 2) Deviations between bottom elevations of V-notches in a line:

Maximum 1/16 inch in 6-foot length of weir plate. 3) Deviations in depth of V-notches in a line: Maximum 1/16 inch in 6

foot length of weir plate. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. MFG Water Treatment Products. b. Warminster Fiberglass.

E. Accessories: 1. Washers: Of same material as weirs, with surfaces smooth, free of voids, and

without dry spots and crazes. 2. Assembly hardware: Concrete anchors as specified in Section 05_05_24 -

Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products as specified in Section 01_60_00 - Product Requirements.


3.02 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.03 WEIRS AND BAFFLE PLATES

A. Carefully install weirs and baffle plates, aligning and leveling to match existing elevations.

B. Installation tolerances: 1. V-notch weirs. In the completed installation:

a. The variation in elevation between any 2 notches of the weir plate in a tank shall not exceed 1/8 inch.

b. In a round tank, the variation from elevation between any one quadrant of the weir and that of any other quadrant shall not exceed 1/16 inch.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09_96_01

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Field-applied coatings.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_14_00 – Work Restrictions. b. Section 01_33_00 – Submittal Procedures. c. Section 01_35_16 – Alteration Project Procedures. d. Section 01_60_00 – Product Requirements. e. Section 01_77_00 – Closeout Procedures.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 16 – Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications. 2. D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using

Portable Adhesion Testers.

B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): 1. Guideline 310.2R – Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for

Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair.

C. NACE International (NACE): 1. SP0178 – Design, Fabrication, and Surface Finish Practices for Tanks and

Vessels to Be Lined for Immersion Service. 2. SP0188 – Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings.

D. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF): 1. 500-03 – Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings.

E. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects.


F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SP COM – Surface Preparation Commentary for Steel and Concrete

Substrates. 2. SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning. 3. SP 2 – Hand Tool Cleaning. 4. SP 3 – Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SP 5 – White Metal Blast Cleaning. 6. SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning. 7. SP 7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 8. SP 10 – Near-White Blast Cleaning. 9. SP 13 – Surface Preparation of Concrete.

G. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): 1. Method 24 – Surface Coatings.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Submerged metal: Steel or iron surfaces below tops of channel or structure walls that will contain water even when above expected water level.

B. Submerged concrete and masonry surfaces: Surfaces that are or will be: 1. Underwater. 2. In structures that normally contain water. 3. Below tops of walls of water-containing structures.

C. Exposed surface: Any metal or concrete surface, indoors or outdoors, that is exposed to view.

D. Dry film thickness (DFT): Thickness of fully cured coating, measured in mils.

E. Volatile organic compound (VOC): Content of air polluting hydrocarbons in uncured coating product measured in units of grams per liter or pounds per gallon, as determined by EPA Method 24.

F. Ferrous: Cast iron, ductile iron, wrought iron, and all steel alloys except stainless steel.

G. Where SSPC surface preparation standards are specified or implied for ductile iron pipe or fittings, the equivalent NAPF surface preparation standard shall be substituted for the SSPC standard.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coating materials shall be especially adapted for use in wastewater treatment plants.

B. Coating materials used in contact with potable water supply systems shall be certified to NSF 61.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00.


B. Shop drawings: 1. Schedule of proposed coating materials. 2. Schedule of surfaces to be coated with each coating material.

C. Product data: Include description of physical properties of coatings including solids content and ingredient analysis, VOC content, temperature resistance, typical exposures and limitations, and manufacturer's standard color chips: 1. Regulatory requirements: Submit data concerning the following:

a. VOC limitations. b. Coatings containing lead compounds and polychlorinated biphenyls. c. Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques, and disposal. d. NSF certification of coatings for use in potable water supply systems.

D. Samples: Include 8-inch square drawdowns or brush-outs of topcoat finish when requested. Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number, sheen name, and gloss units.

E. Certificates: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data.

F. Manufacturer's instructions: Include the following: 1. Special requirements for transportation and storage. 2. Mixing instructions. 3. Shelf life. 4. Pot life of material. 5. Precautions for applications free of defects. 6. Surface preparation. 7. Method of application. 8. Recommended number of coats. 9. Recommended DFT of each coat. 10. Recommended total DFT. 11. Drying time of each coat, including prime coat. 12. Required prime coat. 13. Compatible and non-compatible prime coats. 14. Recommended thinners, when recommended. 15. Limits of ambient conditions during and after application. 16. Time allowed between coats (minimum and maximum). 17. Required protection from sun, wind, and other conditions. 18. Touch-up requirements and limitations. 19. Minimum adhesion of each system submitted in accordance with ASTM D

4541. 20. Material Safety Data Sheet.

G. Manufacturer's Representative’s Field Reports.

H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit as specified in Section 01_77_00. 1. Reports on visits to project site to view and approve surface preparation of

structures to be coated. 2. Reports on visits to project site to observe and approve coating application

procedures. 3. Reports on visits to coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation

and coating application on items that are “shop coated.”


I. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Quality assurance plan. 2. Qualifications of coating applicator including List of Similar Projects.

J. Certifications: 1. Submit notarized certificate that:

a. All paints and coatings to be used on this project comply with current federal, state, and local VOC regulations.


A. Applicator qualifications: 1. Minimum of 5 years of experience applying specified type or types of coatings

under conditions similar to those of the Work: a. Provide qualifications of applicator and references listing 5 similar projects

completed in the past 2 years. 2. Manufacturer-approved applicator when manufacturer has approved applicator

program. 3. Approved and licensed by polymorphic polyester resin manufacturer to apply

polymorphic polyester resin coating system. 4. Approved and licensed by elastomeric polyurethane (100-percent solids)

manufacturer to apply 100-percent solids elastomeric polyurethane system. 5. Applicator of off-site application of coal-tar epoxy shall have successfully

applied coal-tar epoxy on similar surfaces in material, size, and complexity as on the Project.

B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with governing agencies regulations by using coatings that do not exceed permissible VOC limits and do not contain lead: 1. Do not use coal-tar epoxy in contact with drinking water or exposed to

ultraviolet radiation.

C. Certification: Certify that applicable pigments are resistant to discoloration or deterioration when exposed to hydrogen sulfide and other sewage gases and product data designates coating as suitable for wastewater service.

D. Field samples: 1. Prepare and coat a minimum 100-square-foot area between corners or limits

such as control or construction joints of each system. 2. Approved field sample may be part of the Work. 3. Obtain approval before painting other surfaces.

E. Compatibility of coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats, intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface, unless specified otherwise.

F. Services of coating manufacturer’s representative: Arrange for coating manufacturer’s representative to attend pre-installation conferences. Make periodic visits to the project site to provide consultation and inspection services during surface preparation and application of coatings, and to make visits to coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation procedures and coating application of items to be “shop-primed and coated.”


1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products as specified in Section 01_60_00.

B. Remove unspecified and unapproved paints from Project site immediately.

C. Deliver new unopened containers with labels identifying the manufacturer's name, brand name, product type, batch number, date of manufacturer, expiration date or shelf life, color, and mixing and reducing instructions. 1. Do not deliver materials aged more than 12 months from manufacturing date.

D. Store coatings in well-ventilated facility that provides protection from the sun weather, and fire hazards. Maintain ambient storage temperature between 45 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Take precautions to prevent fire and spontaneous combustion.


A. Surface moisture contents: Do not coat surfaces that exceed manufacturer-specified moisture contents, or when not specified by the manufacturer, with the following moisture contents: 1. Plaster and gypsum wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, concrete, and concrete block: 12 percent. 3. Interior located wood: 15 percent. 4. Concrete floors: 7 percent.

B. Do not apply coatings: 1. Under dusty conditions or adverse environmental conditions, unless tenting,

covers, or other such protection is provided for structures to be coated. 2. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles. 3. When ambient or surface temperature is less than 55 degrees Fahrenheit

unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature. 4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent. 5. When surface temperature is less than 5 degrees Fahrenheit above dew point. 6. When surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendation. 7. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless

manufacturer allows a higher temperature. 8. Apply clear finishes at minimum 65 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Provide fans, heating devices, dehumidifiers, or other means recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application of last coat.

D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain minimum 55 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes.


E. Dehumidification and heating for coating of digester interiors, wet wells, and high humidity enclosed spaces: 1. Provide dehumidification and heating of digester interior spaces in which

surface preparation, coating application, or curing is in progress according to the following schedule: a. October 1 to April 30: Provide continuous dehumidification and heating as

required to maintain the tanks within environmental ranges as specified in this Section and as recommended by the coating material manufacturer. For the purposes of this Section, “continuous” is defined as 24 hours per day and 7 days per week.

b. May 1 to September 30: Provide temporary dehumidification and heating as may be required to maintain the tanks within the specified environmental ranges in the event of adverse weather or other temporary condition. At Contractor’s option and at his sole expense, Contractor may suspend work until such time as acceptable environmental conditions are restored, in lieu of temporary dehumidification and heating. Repair or replace any coating or surface preparation damaged by suspension of work, at Contractor’s sole expense.

2. Equipment requirements: a. Capacity: Provide dehumidification, heating, and air circulation equipment

with minimum capacity to perform the following: 1) Maintain the dew point of the air in the tanks at a temperature at least

5 degrees Fahrenheit less than the temperature of the coldest part of the structure where work is underway.

2) Reduce dew point temperature of the air in the tanks by at least 10 degrees Fahrenheit in 20 minutes.

3) Maintain air temperature in the tanks at 60 degrees Fahrenheit minimum.

b. Systems: 1) Site electrical power: Not available for Contractor’s use. 2) Dehumidification: Provide desiccant or refrigeration drying. Desiccant

types shall have a rotary desiccant wheel capable of continuous operation. No liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems will be allowed.

3) Heating: Electric, indirect combustion, or steam coil methods may be used. Direct-fired combustion heaters will not be allowed during abrasive blasting, coating application, or coating cure time.

3. Design and submittals: a. Contractor shall prepare dehumidification and heating plan for this project,

including all equipment and operating procedures. b. Suppliers of services and equipment shall have not less than 3 years

experience in similar applications. 1) Supplier: The following or equal:

a) Cargocaire Corporation (Munters) or equal. c. Submit dehumidification and heating plan for Owner’s review.

4. Monitoring and performance: a. Measure and record relative humidity and temperature of air, and

structure temperature twice daily (beginning and end of work shifts) to verify that proper humidity and temperature levels are achieved inside the work area after the dehumidification equipment is installed and operational. Test results shall be made available to the Owner upon request.


b. Interior space of the working area and tank(s) shall be sealed, and a slight positive pressure maintained as recommended by the supplier of the dehumidification equipment.

c. The filtration system used to remove dust from the air shall be designed so that it does not interfere with the dehumidification equipment’s ability to control the dew point and relative humidity inside the reservoir. 1) The air from the tank, working area, or dust filtration equipment shall

not be recirculated through the dehumidifier during coating application or when solvent vapors are present.

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence and Schedule: As specified in Section 01_14_00.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra materials: Deliver as specified in Section 01_77_00. Include minimum 1 gallon of each type and color of coating applied: 1. When manufacturer packages material in gallon cans, deliver unopened

labeled cans as comes from factory. 2. When manufacturer does not package material in gallon cans, deliver material

in new gallon containers, properly sealed and identified with typed labels indicating brand, type, and color.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Special coatings: One of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carboline, St. Louis, MO. 2. Ceilcote: International Protective Coatings, Berea, OH. 3. Dampney: The Dampney Company, Everett, MA. 4. Devoe: International Protective Coatings, Louisville, KY. 5. Dudick: Dudick, Inc., Streetsboro, OH. 6. GET: Global Eco Technologies, Pittsburg, CA. 7. Henkel: Henkel North America, Madison Heights, MI. 8. IET: Integrated Environmental Technologies, Santa Barbara, CA. 9. PPC: Polymorphic Polymers Corp., North Miami, FL. 10. PPG Amercoat: PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, Brea, CA. 11. Rustoleum: Rustoleum Corp., Sommerset, NJ. 12. Sanchem: Sanchem, Chicago, IL. 13. Superior: Superior Environmental Products, Inc., Addison, TX. 14. S-W: Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH. 15. Tnemec: Tnemec Co., Kansas City, MO. 16. Wasser: Wasser High Tech Coatings, Kent, WA.

2.02 PREPARATION AND PRETREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Metal pretreatment: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Henkel: Galvaprep 5. 2. International: AWLGrip Alumiprep 33.


B. Surface cleaner and degreaser: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline Surface Cleaner No. 3. 2. Devoe: Devprep 88. 3. S-W: Clean and Etch.

2.03 COATING MATERIALS

A. Alkali-resistant bitumastic: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Bitumastic No. 50. 2. S-W: Targuard. 3. Wasser: MC-Tar.

B. Wax coating: As manufactured by the following or equal: 1. Sanchem: No-Ox-Id A special.

C. High solids epoxy (self priming) not less than 72 percent solids by volume: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carboguard 891. 2. Devoe: Bar Rust 233H. 3. PPG Amercoat: Amerlock 2. 4. S-W: Macropoxy 646. 5. Tnemec: HS Epoxy Series 104.

D. Aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic polyurethane: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Carbothane 134 VOC. 2. Devoe: Devthane 379. 3. PPG Amercoat: Amershield VOC. 4. Non-submerged: S-W High Solids Polyurethane. 5. Tnemec: Endura-Shield II Series 1075 (U).

E. Polymorphic polyester resin coating system: 2-component, modified styrene based thermoset resin, EPA approved for potable water, with 100 percent solids and maximum 10 grams per liter VOC. As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. IET: IET Prime Coat DS-101, Intermediate Coat DS-301, and Finish Coat DS

401. 2. PPC: PPC Prime Coat, IC-Filler Coat, and FC-Final Coat.

F. High-temperature coating 150 to 350 degrees Fahrenheit: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Thermaline 4900. 2. Dampney: Thermalox 245 Silicone – Zinc Dust. 3. PPG Amercoat: Amerlock 2/400 GFK.

G. Asphalt varnish: AWWA C 500.

H. Protective coal tar: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Bitumastic No. 50. 2. PPG Amercoat: 78HB

I. Coal-tar epoxy: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: 300-M, Bitumastic.


2. PPG Amercoat: 78HB. 3. S-W: Tar Guard 100. 4. Tnemec: Series 46H-413.

J. Coal-tar epoxy substitute: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Devoe: Devtar 5A HS. 2. S-W : Macropoxy 646 Black.

K. Vinyl ester: Glass mat reinforced, total system 125 mils DFT. As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Semstone 870. 2. Ceilcote: 6640 Ceilcrete. 3. Dudick: Protecto-Flex 800. 4. Tnemec: Chembloc Series 239SC.

L. Elastomeric polyurethane, 100-percent solids, ASTM D 16, Type V, (Urethane P): As manufactured by the following or equal: 1. GET: Endura-Flex EF-1988.

M. Concrete floor coatings: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. Carboline: Semstone 140SL. 2. Devoe: Devran 124. 3. Dudick: Polymer Alloy 1000. 4. Tnemec: Tneme-Glaze Series 282.

N. Waterborne acrylic emulsion: As manufactured by one of the following or equal: 1. S-W: DTM Acrylic B66W1. 2. Tnemec: Tneme-Cryl Series 6.

2.04 MIXES

A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from coatings and damage. Repair damage resulting from inadequate or unsuitable protection.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated from spatter and droppings with drop cloths and other coverings: 1. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.

C. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being coated and, in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation areas.

D. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material that may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.


E. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings, and fastenings prior to application of coating operations. Carefully store, clean, and replace on completion of coating in each area. Do not use solvent or degreasers to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.

3.02 GENERAL PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions, unless more stringent requirements are specified in this Section.

B. Protect the following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking or other means: 1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems, grease fittings, and identification

plates. 2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact. 3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets. 4. Surfaces of shafting on which sprockets are to fit. 5. Surfaces of shafting on which bearings are to fit. 6. Machined surfaces of bronze trim, including slide gates. 7. Cadmium-plated items except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized

fasteners used in assembly of equipment requiring abrasive blasting. 8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.

C. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by entering sand or dust.

D. Concrete: 1. Allow new concrete to cure for minimum of 28 days before coating. 2. Clean concrete surfaces of dust, mortar, fins, loose concrete particles, form

release materials, oil, and grease. Fill voids so that surface is smooth. Prepare concrete surface for coating in accordance with SSPC SP 13. Provide ICRI 310.2 CSP-3 surface profile, or as recommended by coating manufacturer. All concrete surfaces shall be vacuumed clean prior to coating application.

E. Ferrous metal surfaces: 1. Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 2. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter, and prepare surfaces in

accordance with appropriate SSPC standard as specified. 3. Abrasive blast surfaces prior to coating.

a. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast surfaces again to remove rust and discoloration.

b. When metal surfaces are exposed because of coating damage, abrasive blast surfaces and feather in to a smooth transition before touching up.

c. Ferrous metal surfaces not to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP 10, unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, prohibited, or specified otherwise. Where not possible to abrasive blast, power tool clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3.

d. Ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged: Unless specified otherwise, abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP 5 to clean and provide roughened surface profile of not less than 2 mils and not more than 4 mils in depth when measured with Elcometer 123, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer.


4. All abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall be blown down with clean dry air and/or vacuumed.

F. Ductile iron pipe and fittings to be lined or coated: Abrasive blast clean in accordance with NAPF 500-03.

G. Sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces: Prepare in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.

H. Galvanized surface: 1. Degrease or solvent clean (SSPC SP 1) to remove oily residue. 2. Power tool or hand tool clean or whip abrasive blast. 3. Test surface for contaminants using copper sulfate solution. 4. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces

that cannot be thoroughly abraded physically, such as bolts, nuts, or preformed channels.

I. Shop-primed metal: 1. Certify that primers applied to metal surfaces in the shop are compatible with

coatings to be applied over such primers in the field. 2. Remove shop primer from metal to be submerged by abrasive blasting in

accordance with SSPC SP 10, unless greater degree of surface preparation is required by coating manufacturer’s representative.

3. Correct abraded, scratched, or otherwise damaged areas of prime coat by sanding or abrasive blasting to bare metal in accordance with SSPC SP 2, SP 3, or SP 6, as directed by the Owner. When entire shop priming fails or has weathered excessively (more than 25 percent of the item), or when recommended by coating manufacturer’s representative, abrasive blast shop prime coat to remove entire coat and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP 10.

4. When incorrect prime coat is applied, remove incorrect prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP 10.

5. When prime coat not authorized by Owner is applied, remove unauthorized prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP 10.

6. Shop applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish: Abrasive blast clean shop applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish from surfaces scheduled to receive non-bituminous coatings.

J. Cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners: 1. Abrasive blast in the same manner as unprotected metal when used in

assembly of equipment designated for abrasive blasting.

K. Abrasive blast components that are to be attached to surfaces that cannot be abrasive blasted before components are attached.

L. Grind sharp edges to approximately 1/16-inch radius before abrasive blast cleaning.

M. Remove and grind smooth all excessive weld material and weld spatter before blast cleaning in accordance with NACE SP0178.


N. Poly vinyl chloride (PVC) and FRP surfaces: 1. Prepare surfaces to be coated by light sanding (de-gloss) and wipe-down with

clean cloths, or by solvent cleaning in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.

O. Cleaning of previously coated surfaces: 1. Utilize cleaning agent to remove soluble salts such as chlorides and sulfates

from concrete and metal surfaces: a. Cleaning agent: Biodegradable non-flammable and containing no VOC. b. Manufacturer: The following or equal:

1) CHLOR*RID International, Inc. 2. Steam clean and degrease surfaces to be coated to remove oils and grease. 3. Cleaning of surfaces utilizing the decontamination cleaning agent may be

accomplished in conjunction with abrasive blast cleaning, steam cleaning, high-pressure washing, or hand washing as approved by the coating manufacturer's representative and the Owner.

4. Test cleaned surfaces in accordance with the cleaning agent manufacturer's instructions to ensure all soluble salts have been removed. Additional cleaning shall be carried out as necessary.

5. Final surface preparation prior to application of new coating system shall be made in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.03 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PREPARATION

A. Identify equipment, ducting, piping, and conduit as specified in the individual equipment Specification.

B. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical system from location and coat separately.

C. Prepare and finish coat primed equipment with color selected by the Owner.

D. Prepare and prime and coat insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are covered with prefinished coating.

E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when coated over or spattered.

F. Prepare and coat interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line.

G. Prepare and coat dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets to match face panels.

H. Prepare and coat exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces.

I. Prepare and coat both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them.


J. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork and apply color banding and identification, such as flow arrows, naming, and numbering, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.04 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coat metal unless specified otherwise: 1. Aboveground piping to be coated shall be empty of contents during application

of coatings.

C. Verify metal surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance with SSPC SP COM.

D. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting before coating.

E. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or prime with manufacturer's recommended special primer.

F. Prime shop-primed metal surfaces. Spot prime exposed metal of shop-primed surfaces before applying primer over entire surface.

G. Multiple coats: 1. Apply minimum number of specified coats. 2. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses. 3. Apply coats to thicknesses specified, especially at edges and corners. 4. When multiple coats of same material are specified, tint prime coat and

intermediate coats with suitable pigment to distinguish each coat. 5. Lightly sand and dust surfaces to receive high-gloss finishes, unless instructed

otherwise by coating manufacturer. 6. Dust coatings between coats.

H. Coat surfaces without drops, overspray, dry spray, runs, ridges, waves, holidays, laps, or brush marks.

I. Remove spatter and droppings after completion of coating.

J. Apply coating by brush, roller, trowel, or spray, unless particular method of application is required by coating manufacturer's instructions or these Specifications.

K. Plural component application: Drums shall be premixed each day. All gauges shall be in working order prior to the start of application. Ratio checks shall be completed prior to each application. A spray sample shall be sprayed on plastic sheeting to ensure set time is complete prior to each application. Hardness testing shall be performed after each application.

L. Spray application: 1. Stripe coat edges, welds, nuts, bolts, and difficult-to-reach areas by brush

before beginning spray application, as necessary, to ensure specified coating thickness along edges.


2. When using spray application, apply coating to thickness not greater than that recommended in coating manufacturer's instructions for spray application.

3. Use airless spray method, unless air spray method is required by coating manufacturer's instruction or these Specifications.

4. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. Protect adjacent construction and property from coating mist, fumes, or overspray.

M. Drying and recoating: 1. Provide fans, heating devices, or other means recommended by coating

manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application of last coat.

2. For submerged service, the Contractor shall provide a letter to the Owner that the lining system is fully cured and ready to be placed into service.

3. Limit drying time to that required by these Specifications or coating manufacturer's instructions.

4. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure, which may impair bond between coats.

5. Recoat epoxies within time limits recommended by coating manufacturer. 6. When time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast clean and de-gloss clean prior

to applying another coat. 7. When limitation on time between abrasive blasting and coating cannot be met

before attachment of components to surfaces that cannot be abrasive blasted, coat components before attachment.

8. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely integral at time of application of each succeeding coat.

9. Touch-up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.

10. Leave no holidays. 11. Sand and feather in to a smooth transition and recoat scratched,

contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating surfaces so damages are invisible to the naked eye.

N. Concrete: 1. Apply first coat (primer) only when surface temperature of concrete is

decreasing in order to eliminate effects of off-gassing on coating.

3.05 ALKALI-RESISTANT BITUMASTIC

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements.

B. Application: 1. Apply in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:

a. Apply at least 2 coats, 8 to 14 mils DFT each.

3.06 WAX COATING



B. Application: 1. Apply in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:

a. Apply at least 1/32-inch thick coat with 2-inch or shorter bristle brush. b. Thoroughly rub coating into metal surface with canvas covered wood

block or canvas glove.

3.07 HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY SYSTEM

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as

follows: a. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged at jobsite in

accordance with SSPC SP 5 prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 10.

b. Abrasive blast non-submerged ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in accordance with SSPC SP 10, prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6.

c. Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surfaces at jobsite in accordance with SSPC SP 7.

B. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as

follows: a. Apply minimum 2-coat system with minimum total DFT of 12 mils. b. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within time limits recommended

by manufacturer. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

c. Coat metal to be submerged before installation when necessary, to obtain acceptable finish, and to prevent damage to other surfaces.

d. Coat entire surface of support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners, and other metal devices bolted to concrete.

e. Coat surface of items to be exposed and adjacent 1 inch to be concealed when embedded in concrete or masonry.

f. For coatings applied in polymer containment areas, final topcoat on floors shall include non-skid surface, applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.08 HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY AND POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM

A. All carbon steel pipe and duct supports shall be coated with system below.

B. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as

follows: a. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with general preparation

requirements. b. Touch up shop-primed steel and miscellaneous iron. c. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite prior to coating. Abrasive

blast clean rust and discoloration from surfaces. d. Degrease or solvent clean, whip abrasive blast, power tool, or hand tool

clean galvanized metal surfaces.


e. Lightly sand (de-gloss) fiberglass and PVC pipe to be coated and wipe clean with dry cloths, or solvent clean in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.

f. Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surfaces.

C. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as

follows: a. Apply a 3-coat system consisting of:

1) Primer: 4 to 5 mils DFT high solids epoxy. 2) Intermediate coat: 4 to 5 mils DFT high solids epoxy. 3) Topcoat: 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic

polyurethane topcoat. 2. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within 30 days or within time limits

recommended by manufacturer, whichever is shorter. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.09 POLYMORPHIC POLYESTER RESIN SYSTEM


follows: 2. Prepare concrete to obtain clean, open pore with exposed aggregate in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Prepare ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 5, with coating

manufacturer's recommended anchor pattern. 4. Complete abrasive blast cleaning within 6 hours of applying prime coat. Dew

point shall remain 5 degrees above dew point 8 hours after application of coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 5.

5. When handling steel, wear gloves to prevent hand printing. 6. Adjust pH of concrete to within 5.5 to 8.0 before applying prime coat.


follows: a. Apply minimum DFT system consisting of primer, tie coat and top coat in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions as follows: 1) Steel: 35 mils. 2) Concrete: 45 mils.

3.10 HIGH-TEMPERATURE COATING


follows: a. Abrasive blast surface in accordance with SSPC SP 10.


follows: a. Apply number of coats in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


3.11 ASPHALT VARNISH



follows: a. Apply minimum 2 coats.

3.12 PROTECTIVE COAL TAR

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation of coal-tar

requirements.


follows: a. Apply minimum 20 mils DFT coating.

3.13 COAL-TAR EPOXY


follows: a. Abrasive blast iron or steel surfaces to be coated as submerged metal in

accordance with SSPC SP 5. Prepare other metal surfaces to be coated with coal-tar epoxy in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions.


follows: a. Waterproofing outside surfaces of concrete structures: Apply minimum 2

coats with total DFT of 40 mils. b. Apply 2 coats of 8 mils each for a total 16 mils DFT. c. Apply coal-tar epoxy on blasted steel on same day that steel is blasted. d. Apply succeeding coats over previous coat as soon as application does

not cause sagging, within the following times, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer, whichever is sooner.

Average Temperature degrees (Fahrenheit)

Maximum Time Between Coats (Hours)

50 to 60 36

60 to 70 24

70 to 80 12

80 to 120 4

e. Apply additional coats required to obtain specified thickness.


f. When previous coat has cured or set, or Maximum Time Between Coats has lapsed, abrasive blast previous coat until surface film is removed. Wash and clean surface with cleaning solvent. Apply succeeding coat within Maximum Time Between Coats or as recommended by coating manufacturer, whichever is sooner.

g. When succeeding coat is applied over previous coat that has cured or set, or Maximum Time Between Coats has lapsed, and surface has not been abrasive blasted, remove entire coating system to substrate, and apply new coating system.

h. Where coating system is applied to exterior concrete surfaces below grade, extend system at least 3 inches above finish grade in straight level. Step extended system down 3 inches when extended system reaches 6 inches above finish grade.

3.14 COAL-TAR EPOXY SUBSTITUTE

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and in

accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Application: 1. Apply 2 coats at 6 mils to 8 mils each, for a minimum total DFT of 12 mils.

3.15 VINYL ESTER

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations

and as directed and approved by coating manufacturer's representative.

B. Application: 1. Apply prime coat, as required by coating manufacturer, base coat, glass mat,

and topcoat to total dry film thickness of 125 mils minimum: a. Final topcoat on floors shall include non-skid surface, applied in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Perform high-voltage holiday detection test in accordance with NACE SP0188,

over 100 percent of coated surface areas to ensure pinhole-free finished coating system.

3. All work shall be accomplished in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and under direction of coating manufacturer's representative.

3.16 ELASTOMERIC POLYURETHANE (100 PERCENT SOLIDS)

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions

and as directed and approved by coating manufacturer's representative.

B. Application: 1. Apply epoxy primer at DFT of 1 to 2 mils, in strict accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply polyurethane coating at minimum total DFT as follows:

a. Steel: 60 mils DFT. b. Ductile iron and ductile iron pipe coating and lining: 30 mils DFT.


c. Concrete: 120 mils DFT. d. Or as recommended by the coating manufacturer and accepted by the

Owner. 3. For concrete application, provide saw cutting for coating terminations in strict

accordance with manufacturer's instructions: a. If concrete is damaged, contact Owner for structural concrete repair

requirements. 4. Perform high voltage holiday detection test in accordance with NACE SP0188,

over 100 percent of coated surface areas to ensure pinhole free finished coating system.

3.17 CONCRETE FLOOR COATINGS

A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general application requirements and in

strict accordance with coating manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Application: 1. Apply primer if required by coating manufacturer. 2. Apply 1 or more coats as recommended by coating manufacturer to receive a

minimum total DFT of 25 mils; color as selected by the Owner.

C. Final topcoat shall include non-skid surface, applied in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.

3.18 WATERBORNE ACRYLIC EMULSION

A. Preparation: 1. Remove all oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign material by solvent cleaning in

accordance with SSPC SP 1. 2. Lightly sand all surfaces and wipe thoroughly with clean cotton cloths before

applying coating.

B. Application: 1. Apply 2 or more coats to obtain a minimum DFT of 5.0 mils.


A. Each coat will be inspected. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces, and recoat. When approved, apply next coat.

B. Control and check DFT and integrity of coatings.

C. Measure DFT with calibrated thickness gauge.

D. DFT on ferrous-based substrates may be checked with Elcometer Type 1 Magnetic Pull-Off Gauge or PosiTector® 6000.

E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage sponge or high-voltage spark holiday detector, in accordance with NACE SP0188. Allow Owner to use detector for additional checking.


F. Check wet film thickness before coal-tar epoxy coating cures on concrete or non ferrous metal substrates.

G. Arrange for services of coating manufacturer's field representative to provide periodic field consultation and inspection services to ensure proper surface preparation of facilities and items to be coated, and to ensure proper application and curing: 1. Notify Owner 24 hours in advance of each visit by coating manufacturer's

representative. 2. Provide Owner with a written report by coating manufacturer's representative

within 48 hours following each visit.

3.20 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS NOT REQUIRING COATING

A. General: Unless specified otherwise, the following items do not require coating: 1. Items that have received final coat at factory and are not listed to receive

coating in field. 2. Aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, plastic (except PVC pipe), rubber, stainless

steel, chrome, Everdur, or lead. 3. Buried or encased piping or conduit. 4. Exterior concrete. 5. Galvanized steel wall framing, galvanized roof decking, galvanized electrical

conduits, galvanized pipe trays, galvanized cable trays, and other galvanized items: a. Areas on galvanized items or parts where galvanizing has been damaged

during handling or construction shall be repaired as follows: 1) Clean damaged areas by SSPC SP 1, SP 2, SP 3, or SP 7 as

required. 2) Apply 2 coats of a galvanizing zinc compound in strict accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Grease fittings. 7. Fiberglass ducting or tanks in concealed locations. 8. Steel to be encased in concrete or masonry.

3.21 SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE COATED IN THE FIELD

A. In general, apply coatings to steel, iron, galvanized surfaces, and wood surfaces unless specified otherwise. Coat concrete surfaces and anodized aluminum only when specified.

B. The following schedule is incomplete. Coat unlisted surfaces with same coating system as similar listed surfaces. Verify questionable surfaces.

C. Concrete: 1. High solids epoxy:

a. Safety markings. 2. Polymorphic polyester resin system:

a. None scheduled. 3. Coal-tar epoxy:

a. Exterior of underground structures. 4. Coal-tar epoxy substitute:

a. Exterior of underground structures. 5. Vinyl ester:


a. None scheduled. 6. Elastomeric polyurethane (100-percent solids):

a. None scheduled. 7. Concrete floor coating:

a. None scheduled. 8. Elastomeric polyurea:

a. None scheduled.

D. Metals: 1. Alkali-resistant bitumastic:

a. Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with wood, concrete, or masonry.

2. Wax coating: a. Sliding faces of sluice and slide gates and threaded portions of gate

stems. 3. High solids epoxy and polyurethane system: Interior and exterior non

immersed ferrous metal surfaces including: a. Doors, doorframes, ventilators, louvers, grilles, exposed sheet metal, and

flashing. b. Pipe, valves, pipe hangers, supports and saddles, conduit, cable tray

hangers, and supports. c. Motors and motor accessory equipment. d. Drive gear, drive housing, coupling housings, and miscellaneous gear

drive equipment. e. Valve and gate operators and stands. f. Structural steel including galvanized structural steel.

1) Exposed metal decking. g. Crane and hoist rails. h. Exterior of tanks and other containment vessels. i. Mechanical equipment supports, drive units, and accessories. j. Pumps not submerged. k. Other miscellaneous metals.

4. High solids epoxy system: a. Field priming of ferrous metal surfaces with defective shop-prime coat

where no other prime coat is specified; for non-submerged service. b. Bell rings, underside of manhole covers and frames. c. Sump pumps, including underside of base plates and submerged suction

and discharge piping. d. Exterior of submerged piping and valves other than stainless steel or PVC

piping. e. Submerged pipe supports and hangers. f. Stem guides. g. Other submerged iron and steel metal unless specified otherwise. h. Submerged piping.

5. Polymorphic polyester resin system: a. Not scheduled.

6. High-temperature coating 150 to 350 degrees Fahrenheit: a. Not scheduled.

7. High-temperature coating 400 to 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit: a. Not scheduled.

8. High-temperature coatings up to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit: a. Not scheduled.


9. Asphalt varnish: a. Underground valve boxes.

10. Protective coal tar: a. Underground pipe flanges, excluding pipe, corrugated metal pipe

couplings, flexible pipe couplings and miscellaneous underground metals not otherwise specified to receive another protective coating.

11. Coal-tar epoxy: a. Underground ductile iron piping. b. Underground valves.

E. Fiberglass and PVC pipe surfaces: 1. Waterborne acrylic emulsion.

a. Exterior of fiberglass ducting and fan housings. b. Fiberglass expose to sunlight. c. PVC piping exposed to view. d. ABS piping as determined by Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23_05_94

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Testing of mechanical equipment and systems.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_75_17 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up. b. Section 26_05_50 - NEMA Frame Induction Motors, 600 Volts and Below c. Section 26_00_00 - Electrical - General Provisions

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. S1.4 Specification for Sound Level Meters.

B. Hydraulic Institute (HI).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of factory tests and field tests as specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section.

B. Test instrumentation calibration data.

C. Start-up plan as specified in Section 01_75_17.

D. Test plan specified in this Section.

E. Test result reports.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND REPORTING

A. Scheduling and notification: 1. Witnessed source quality control tests: Schedule test date and notify Owner at

least 30 days prior to start of test. 2. Field quality control tests: Schedule test date and notify Owner at least 7 days

prior to start of test.

B. Testing levels: 1. Test equipment based on test levels specified in the equipment section of this

Project. 2. Requirements for Test Levels 1 to 4 are defined below. 3. Test levels apply for both Source (Factory) Quality Control Tests and Field

Quality Control Tests as specified in the equipment sections of this Project. 4. If testing is not specified in the equipment section, provide Level 1 testing. 5. Requirements of Section 01_75_17 apply to Test Levels.

C. Witnessing: Source Quality Control Tests not witnessed unless specified otherwise in the equipment section or Section 01_75_17; Field Quality Control Tests shall be witnessed.

D. Instrumentation: Provide necessary test instrumentation, which has been calibrated within 1 year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology, Washington, D.C. or approved source. Properly calibrated field instrumentation permanently installed as a part of the Work may be utilized for Field Quality Control Tests.

E. Temporary facilities and labor: Provide necessary fluids, utilities, temporary piping, temporary supports, temporary access platforms or access means and other temporary facilities and labor necessary to safely operate the equipment and accomplish the specified testing. With Owner's permission, some utilities may be provided by fully tested permanently installed utilities that are part of the Work.

F. Test fluids: 1. Factory tests: Use water or air as appropriate at ambient conditions unless

specified otherwise in the equipment section. 2. Field tests: Use specified process fluid at available conditions.

G. Pressure testing: Hydrostatically pressure test pressure containing parts in the factory at the appropriate standard or code required level above the equipment component specified design pressure or operating pressure, whichever is higher. Submit pressure test reports before shipping.

H. Test measurement and result accuracy: 1. Use test instruments with accuracies as recommended in the appropriate

referenced standards. When no accuracy is recommended in the referenced standard, use 1 percent or better accuracy test instruments. Improved (lower error tolerance) accuracies specified elsewhere prevail over this general requirement.


2. Do not adjust results of tests for instrumentation accuracy. Measured values and values directly calculated from measured values shall be the basis for comparing actual equipment performance to specified requirements.

I. Field testing: 1. Submit test plan as specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section. Indicate

test start time and duration, equipment to be tested, other equipment involved or required; temporary facilities required, number and skill or trade of personnel involved; safety issues and planned safety contingencies; anticipated effect on Owner's existing equipment and other information relevant to the test. Provide locations of all instruments to be used for testing. Provide calibration records for all instrumentation.

2. Perform general start-up and testing procedures as specified in Section 01_75_17.

3. Prior to testing, verify equipment protective devices and safety devices have been installed, calibrated, and tested.

J. Reports: Submit reports for source and field-testing. Submit Source Quality Control Test result reports before shipping equipment to the field. Report features: 1. Report results in a bound document in generally accepted engineering format

with title page, written summary of results compared to specified requirements, and appropriate curves or plots of significant variables in English units.

2. Include appendix with a copy of raw, unmodified test data sheets indicating test value, date and time of reading, and initials of person taking the data.

3. Include appendix with sample calculations for adjustments to raw test data and for calculated results.

4. Include appendix with the make, model, and last calibration date of instrumentation used for test measurements.

5. Include in body of report a drawing or sketch of the test system layout showing location and orientation of the test instruments relative to the tested equipment features.

3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING, GENERAL

A. Tests for pumps, all levels of testing: 1. Test in accordance with applicable HI Standards in addition to the

requirements in this and other Sections. 2. Test tolerances: In accordance with appropriate HI Standards, except the

following modified tolerances apply: a. From 0 to plus 5 percent of head at the specified flows. b. From 0 to plus 5 percent of flow at the rated design point head. c. No negative tolerance for the efficiency at the specified flows. d. No positive tolerance for vibration limits. Vibration limits and test methods

in HI Standards do not apply, use limits and methods specified in this or other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Tests for drivers: Test motors as specified in Division 26. Test other drivers as specified in the driver equipment section.


3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR VIBRATION TESTING

A. Definitions: 1. Peak-to-peak displacement: The root mean squared average of the peak-to-

peak displacement multiplied by the square root of 2. 2. Peak velocity: The root mean squared average of the peak velocity multiplied

by the square root of 2. 3. Peak acceleration: The root mean squared average of the peak acceleration

multiplied by the square root of 2. 4. High frequency enveloping: A process to extract very low amplitude time

domain signals associated with impact or impulse events such as bearing or gear tooth defects and display them in a frequency spectrum of acceleration versus frequency. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Rockwell Automation, Entek Group, "Spike Energy" analysis. 2) CSI, "PeakVue."

5. Low speed equipment: Equipment or components of equipment rotating at less than 600 revolutions per minute.

6. High speed equipment: Equipment and equipment components operating at or above 600 revolutions per minute.

B. Vibration instrumentation requirements: 1. Analyzers: Use digital type analyzers or data collectors with anti-aliasing filter,

12 bit A/D converter, fast fourier transform circuitry, phase measurement capability, time wave form data storage, high frequency enveloping capabilities, 35 frequency ranges from 21 to 1,500,000 cycles per minute, adjustable fast fourier transform resolution from 400 to 6,400 lines, storage for up to one hundred 3,200 line frequency spectra, RS232C data output port, circuitry for integration of acceleration data to velocity or double integration to displacement. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Entek-IRD, Division of Rockwell Automation, Enpac 1200 with applicable data analysis software or Entek Model 838 analyzer with built in printer.

2) Computational Systems Inc., (CSI) Division of Emerson Electric, Model 2120A, Data Collector/analyzer with applicable analysis software.

2. Analyzer settings: a. Units: English, inches/second, mils, and gravitational forces. b. Fast fourier transform lines: Most equipment 1,600 minimum; for motors,

enough lines as required to distinguish motor current frequencies from rotational frequencies, use 3,200 lines for motors with a nominal speed of 3,600 revolutions per minute; 3,200 lines minimum for High Frequency Enveloping; 1,600 lines minimum for low speed equipment.

c. Sample averages: 4 minimum d. Maximum frequency (Fmax): 40 times rotational frequency for rolling

element bearings, 10 times rotational frequency for sleeve bearings. e. Amplitude range: Auto select but full scale not more than twice the

acceptance criteria or the highest peak, whichever is lower. f. Fast fourier transform windowing: Hanning Window. g. High pass filter: Minus 3 dB at 120 cycles per minute for high speed

equipment. Minus 3 dB at 21 cycles per minute for low speed equipment.


3. Accelerometers: a. For low speed equipment: Low frequency, shear mode accelerometer,

500 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 10 gravitational force range, plus/minus 5 percent frequency response from 0.5 hertz to 850 hertz, magnetic mount. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) Wilcoxon Research, Model 797L. b) PCB, Model 393C.

b. For high speed equipment: General purpose accelerometer, 100 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 50 gravitational force range, plus/minus 3dB frequency response range from 2 hertz to 12,000 hertz when stud mounted, with magnetic mount holder. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) Wilcoxon Research, Model 793. b) Entek-IRD Model 943.

C. Accelerometer mounting: 1. Use magnetic mounting or stud mounting. 2. Mount on bearing housing in location with best available direct path to bearing

and shaft vibration. 3. Remove paint and mount transducer on flat metal surface or epoxy mount for

High Frequency Enveloping measurements.

D. Vibration testing results presentation: 1. Provide equipment drawing with location and orientation of measurement

points indicated. 2. For each vibration measurement take and include appropriate data on

equipment operating conditions at the time vibration data is taken; for pumps, compressors, and blowers record suction pressure, discharge pressure, and flow.

3. When Vibration Spectra Data required: a. Plot peak vibration velocity versus frequency in cycles per minute. b. Label plots showing actual shaft or part rotation frequency, bearing inner

and outer race ball pass frequencies, gear mesh frequencies and relevant equipment excitation frequencies on the plot; label probable cause of vibration peaks whether in excess of specification limits or not.

c. Label plots with equipment identification and operating conditions such as tag number, capacity, pressure, driver horsepower, and point of vibration measurement.

d. Plot motor spectra on a log amplitude scale versus frequency. 4. For low speed equipment, plot peak vibration displacement versus frequency

as well as velocity versus frequency. 5. Provide name of manufacturer and model number of the vibration

instrumentation used, including analyzer and accelerometer used together with mounting type.


3.04 TESTING LEVELS

A. Level 1 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test:

a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for 15 minutes minimum after components reach normal operating temperatures.

b. Operate at rated design load conditions. c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or

rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.

2. Level 1 Pump Performance Test: a. Measure flow and head while operating at or near the rated condition; for

factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.

b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Division 26 or the applicable equipment section. Use actual driver for field tests.

c. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and make observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels.

3. Level 1 Vibration Test: a. Test requirement:

1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component.

2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria.

b. Equipment operating condition: Test at specified maximum speed. 4. Level 1 Noise Test:

a. Measure unfiltered overall A-weighted sound pressure level in dBA at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment and at a mid-point of the equipment height.

B. Level 2 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 2 General Performance Test:

a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 2 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures.

b. Operate at rated design load conditions. c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or

rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.

2. Level 2 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 2 hours minimum for flow and head at the rated condition; for factory

testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.


b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Division 26. Use actual driver for field tests.

c. Test for flow and head at 2 additional conditions; 1 at 25 percent below the rated flow and 1 at 10 percent above the rated flow.

d. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels at each condition.

3. Level 2 Vibration Test: a. Test requirement:

1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency and measure vibration phase in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component; measure actual rotational speeds for each vibration spectra measured using photometric or other tachometer input connected directly to the vibration data collector.

2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria.

b. Equipment operating condition: Repeat test requirements at design specified maximum speed and at minimum speed for variable speed equipment.

c. Natural frequency test of field installed equipment: 1) Excite the installed equipment and support system in 3 perpendicular

planes, use same planes as operating vibration measurement planes, and determine the as-installed natural resonant frequency of the driven equipment, the driver, gears and supports.

2) Perform test at each bearing housing, at each support pedestal, and for pumps on the suction and discharge piping.

3) Perform with equipment and attached piping full of intended service or process fluid.

4. Level 2 Noise Test: a. Measure filtered A-weighted overall sound pressure level in dBA for each

of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz measured at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height of the noise source.

C. Level 3 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 3 General Equipment Performance Tests:


b. Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time.

c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration or temperatures are observed.

d. Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition.


e. Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity performance testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.

2. Level 3 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 4 hours minimum for flow and head at or near the rated condition; for

factory testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.

b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Division 26. Use actual driver for field tests.

c. Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 15 minutes; for factory testing, test at other speeds may be omitted if test driver at reduced speeds is used for rated condition testing.

d. Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices are not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels.

3. Level 3 Vibration Test: a. Requirements: Same as Level 2 vibration test except data taken at each

operating condition tested and with additional requirements below. b. Perform High Frequency Enveloping Analysis for gears and bearings.

1) Measure bearing element vibration directly on each bearing cap in a location close as possible to the bearing load zone that provides a smooth surface and direct path to the bearing to detect bearing defects.

2) Report results in units of acceleration versus frequency in cycles per minute.

c. Perform Time Wave Form analysis for gears, low speed equipment and reciprocating equipment; plot true peak amplitude velocity and displacement versus time and label the period between peaks with the likely cause of the periodic peaks (relate the period to a cause).

d. Plot vibration spectra on 3 different plots; peak displacement versus frequency, peak acceleration versus frequency and peak velocity versus frequency.

4. Level 3 Noise Test: Measure filtered, un-weighted overall sound pressure level in dB at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height and at 4 locations approximately 90 degrees apart in plan view; report results for each of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz.

D. Level 4 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 4 General Equipment Performance Test:


b. Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time.


c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration or temperatures are observed.

d. Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition.

e. Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.

2. Level 4 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 8 hours minimum for flow and head; begin tests at or near the rated

condition; for factory and field-testing, test with furnished motor at full speed.

b. Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 20 minutes or longer as necessary to measure required performance, vibration and noise data at each test condition.

c. Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels.

d. Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.

e. Perform efficiency and/or Net Positive Suction Head Required (NPSHr) and/or priming time tests when specified in the equipment section in accordance with the appropriate HI standard and as follows: 1) Perform NPSHr testing at maximum rated design speed, head and

flow with test fluids at ambient conditions; at maximum rated speed, test at 15 percent above rated design flow, and 25 percent below rated design flow.

2) Perform efficiency testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed. 3) Perform priming time testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed.

3. Level 4 Vibration Test: Same as Level 3 vibration test. 4. Level 4 Noise Test: Same as Level 3 Noise Test except with data taken at

each operating condition tested.

3.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test equipment as specified for each type of test at the test levels specified in equipment sections. Prepare and submit test reports as specified.

B. Inspection and balancing: 1. Statically and dynamically balance each of the individual rotating parts as

required to achieve the required field vibration limits. Statically and dynamically balance the completed equipment rotating assembly and drive shaft components.


2. Furnish copies of material and component inspection reports including balancing reports for equipment system components and for the completed rotating assembly.

C. Critical speed of rotating equipment: Satisfy the following: 1. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and

2-speed driven equipment that is considered rigid such as horizontal pumps, all non-clog pumps, blowers, air compressors, and engines shall be at least 25 percent above the equipment’s maximum operating speed.

2. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted such as vertical pumps (vertical in-line and vertical non-clog pumps excluded) and fans shall at least 25 percent below the equipment’s lowest operating speed.

3. The second lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum operating speed.


A. Test equipment as specified for each type of test at the test levels specified in equipment sections. Prepare and submit test reports as specified. Comply with latest version of applicable standards.

B. For variable speed equipment, conduct test to establish performance over the entire speed range and at the average operating condition. Establish performance curves for: 1. The speed corresponding to the rated maximum capacity. 2. The speed corresponding to the minimum capacity. 3. The speed corresponding to the average operating conditions.

3.07 VIBRATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

A. Testing of rotating mechanical equipment: Tests are to be performed by an experienced, factory trained, and independent authorized vibration analysis expert.

B. Vibration displacement limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds 600 revolutions per minute or less is not to exhibit unfiltered readings in excess of following:

Operating Speed (revolutions per minute)

Unfiltered (Overall) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude (mils)

All Rotating Equipment

0 - 300 6.5

301 - 600 4.5

Note: For all equipment, axial shaft displacements not to exceed 50 percent of the maximum radial shaft displacements shown in the table relative to the casing.


C. Vibration velocity limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds greater than 600 revolutions per minute is not to exceed the following peak velocity limits:

Item Unfiltered Overall Limit

(inches per second) Any Filtered Peak Limit

(inches per second)

Non-Clog Solids Handling Centrifugal Pumps

0.35 0.25

Horizontal and Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps (other than Non-Clog type)

0.18 (Input BHP 25 or less)


0.22 (Input BHP more than 25 but less than

100)

0.18 (Input BHP more than 25 but less than

100)

0.25 (Input BHP 100 or more)


Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and Propeller Pumps


0.22


0.25

Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and Propeller Short Set Pumps


0.21


0.24

Motors See Applicable Motor Specification

Gear Reducers, Radial Not to exceed AGMA 6000-A88 limits

Other Reducers, Axial 0.10 0.10

Centrifugal Fans and Blowers 0.15 0.10

Other Equipment, Radial 0.16 0.10

Other Equipment, Axial 0.10 0.10

D. Equipment operation: Measurements are to be obtained with equipment installed and operating within capacity ranges specified and without duplicate equipment running.

E. Additional criteria: 1. No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether

sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or synchronous multiple of running speed, are to exceed 40 percent of synchronous vibration amplitude component without manufacturer's detailed verification of origin and ultimate effect of such excitation.

2. The presence of discernible vibration amplitude peaks in Test Level 2 or 3 vibration spectra at bearing inner or outer race frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment.

3. For motors, the following shall be cause for rejection:


a. Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency that are more than 40 percent of the peak at rotational frequency.

b. Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra side bands at the pole pass frequency around the 2 times line frequency peak.

c. Other rotor problems evidenced by pole pass frequency side bands around operating speed harmonic peaks or 2 times line frequency side bands around rotor bar pass frequency or around 2 times the rotor bar pass frequency.

d. Phasing problems evidenced by 1/3 line frequency side band spectral peaks around the 2 times electrical line frequency peak.

4. The presence of peaks in a High Frequency Enveloping spectra plot corresponding to bearing, gear or motor rotor bar frequencies or harmonics of these frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment; since inadequate lubrication of some equipment may be a cause of these peaks, lubrication shall be checked, corrected as necessary and the high frequency envelope analysis repeated.

3.08 NOISE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTROL

A. Make measurements in relation to reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar.

B. Make measurements of emitted noise levels on sound level meter meeting or exceeding ANSI S1.4, Type II.

C. Set sound level meter to slow response.

D. Unless otherwise specified, maximum free field noise level not to exceed 85 dBA measured as sound pressure level at 3 feet from the equipment.

3.09 FUNCTIONAL AND OPERATIONAL TESTING OF EQUIPMENT

A. Functional testing as specified in Section 01_75_17 and this Section.

B. General checkout: Prior to operating equipment, inspect, test, and check supporting systems, including but not limited to power systems, control systems, piping systems, lubrication systems, and safety systems. 1. Test and calibrate instrumentation and electrical devices as specified in

Division 26. 2. Test and prepare piping. 3. As a minimum for control systems associated with the equipment, perform the

following: a. Individual Loop Tests: Test from field device to intermediate terminations

to controller and back to controlled element. b. End-to-end test: Simulate input at field device and observe control system

response at the final field control element. 4. Prior to testing, provide signed and dated certificates of calibration for test

instrumentation and equipment.

C. Operation of related existing equipment: Owner will operate related existing equipment or facilities necessary to accomplish the testing.


D. Acceptable tests: Demonstrate the equipment performance meets the requirements of this Section and the equipment section; when the equipment fails to meet the specified requirements, perform additional more detailed testing to determine the cause, correct, repair, or replace the causative components and repeat the testing that revealed the deficiency.

E. Operational testing: As specified in Section 01_75_17.

END OF SECTION

July 2019 26_00_00-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/GAI/26_00_00 Electrical - General Provisions.doc (BidSet)

SECTION 26_00_00

ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to install, test, and provide an operational, electrical system for replacement of the primary clarifiers and system.

B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division_26.

D. The work shall include furnishing, installing, and testing the equipment and materials detailed in each Section of Division_26.

E. The contractor shall inspect the existing facility to determine the electrical systems associated with the primary clarifiers and provide all necessary electrical equipment and devices for a complete operational system.

F. The contractor shall demolish all the existing conduit, wire, receptacles, disconnect switches, lights, etc. associated with the existing clarifier.

G. The existing starter for the clarifier drive is located inside the existing Motor Control Center. The contractor shall demolish the existing starter and associated controls and provide a new starter, overload, associated relay and controls to be installed in the same location in the motor control center.

H. On the MCC enclosure, provide a start/stop switch, run indicating light, overload light, high torque alarm lights and runtime indicator.

I. The starter shall be minimum size -1 and associated controls shall be coordinated with the clarifier system being furnished.

J. The contractor shall provide a control schematic for the new starter.

K. Furnish new wire and conduit for 480V power, 120V controls, 120V for lights and receptacles and 24V for PLC monitoring. Number of control wires shall be coordinated in the field with supplier. The wire shall be multi conductor cable for installation in a cable tray. The wire shall be installed in conduit and existing cable tray.

L. The 120V power for lights and receptacle shall be obtained from the existing panel board.

M. Furnish and install new WP/ GFI receptacles and two pole mounted LED light fixtures on the bridge.


N. On the clarifier bridge, coordinate with the manufacturer to furnish and install a local disconnect switch in Nema 4X 316 SS enclosure, E- stop and beacon alarm light and silence and acknowledge push button.

O. Connect power to the scum spray solenoid valve and associated switch. Provide 120V for the solenoid valve from existing source.

P. All wire and conduit shall be new.

Q. All electrical work on the clarifier bridge shall be as per NFPA 820 guidelines. The following points shall be monitored by the existing PLC: 1. Clarifier run status. 2. Clarifier overload alarm. 3. Clarifier high torque alarm.

R. The input signals to the PLC are operated at 24V. The above alarm points shall be wired between PLC and starter in the MCC.

S. Install new wires from MCC to PLC. Verify exact location for connecting the wires in field.

T. The contractor shall test the above points at HMI. Any modifications to the PLC or HMI shall be included.

U. Provide all electrical relocation work associated with the relocation of equipment for the existing and new facilities, including disconnecting all existing wiring and conduits and providing new wiring and conduit to the relocated equipment.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings, in accordance with Division 1 requirements, for equipment, materials and all other items furnished under each Section of Division 26, except where specifically stated otherwise. An individually packaged submittal shall be made for each Section, and shall contain all of the information required by the Section. Partial submittals will not be accepted and will be returned unreviewed.

B. Each Section submittal shall be complete, contain all of the items listed in the Specification Section, and shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet page. The Submittal shall list any exceptions to the Specifications and the reason for such deviation. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will be returned unreviewed.

C. The Contractor shall check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to submittal to the Owner/Engineer. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to Specifications. Only one Specification Section may be made per transmittal.


D. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED".

E. At the time of jobsite delivery of the equipment, the Contractor shall have an approved shop drawing in his possession for the Owner’s Inspector and Owner’s Engineer, for verification.

F. Up-to-date Record Drawings shall be promptly furnished when the equipment installation is complete. Payment will be withheld until Record Drawings have been furnished and approved.

1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 7. Instrument Society of America (ISA). 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 9. Factory Mutual (FM). 10. National Electrical Code 2011 with City of Garland Amendments.

B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

C. All material and equipment, for which a UL standard exists, shall bear a UL label. No such material or equipment shall be brought onsite without the UL label affixed.

1.04 HAZARDOUS AREAS

A. Equipment, materials, and installation in hazardous area shall comply with NEC Articles 500, 501, 502 and 503.

B. Equipment and materials installed in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for the appropriate hazardous area classification.

1.05 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES

A. Equipment, materials, and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction.

B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections.


C. The Owner will negotiate with the electric utility for the costs of new or revised services and make payment to the electric utility for such costs, but the Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination with the electric utility during the installation of such services.

1.06 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT

A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure.

B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.

1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS

As the work progresses contractor shall keep a set of drawings with changes made during construction.

A. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items: 1. One-line Diagram(s). 2. Raceways and pull boxes. 3. Conductor sizes and conduit fills. 4. Panel Schedule(s). 5. Control Wiring Diagram(s). 6. Lighting Fixture Schedule(s). 7. Lighting fixture, receptacle and switch outlet locations. 8. Underground raceway and duct bank routing. 9. Plan view, sizes and locations of switchgear, distribution transformers,

substations, motor control centers and panelboards.

B. Submit a typical example of a schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers, including the following information: 1. Circuit origin, destination and wire numbers. 2. Field wiring terminal strip names and numbers.

C. As an alternate, submit a typical example of point-to-point connection diagrams showing the same information, may be submitted in place of the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers.

D. Submit the record drawings and the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers (or the point-to-point connection diagram) to the Owner/Engineer.

E. The Contractor’s retainage shall not be paid until the point-to-point connection diagrams have been furnished to the Owner/Engineer.

1.08 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS

A. Review shop drawings of equipment furnished under other related Divisions and prepare coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables. Submit copies of wiring diagrams or tables with Record Drawings.


B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections.

1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment shall be new, except where specifically identified.

B. The Contractor shall not bring onsite, material, or equipment from a manufacturer, not submitted and approved for this project. Use of any such material or equipment, will be rejected, removed and replaced by the Contractor, with the approved material and equipment, at his own expense.

C. Material and equipment shall be UL listed, where such listing exists.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, product, equipment and workmanship being furnished by him for the duration of the project. He shall replace the equipment if it does not meet the Contract Documents.

1.10 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted.

B. Equipment and materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and as specified in the individual Specification Sections.

1.11 WARRANTIES

A. Manufacturer’s warranties shall be as specified in each of the Specification Sections.

1.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment (disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations, etc.) furnished under Division_26 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal boxes.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. Install each 3 phase circuit in a separate conduit.


B. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles prior to installation.

C. Exact locations of equipment to be installed shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Owner/Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Owner/Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner.

D. Raceways and conductors for lighting, switches, receptacles and other miscellaneous low voltage power and signal systems shall be provided as required for a complete and operating system.

E. Install conductors carrying low voltage signals (typically twisted shielded pair cables) in raceways totally separate from all other raceways containing power or 120 volt control conductors.

3.02 EQUIPMENT PADS AND SUPPORTS

A. Contractor shall provide electrical equipment pads and supports, of concrete or steel including structural reinforcing and lighting pole foundations.

B. No electrical equipment or raceways shall be attached to or supported from, sheet metal walls.

3.03 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS

A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured.

B. Exact locations are required for stubbing-up and terminating concealed conduit. Obtain shop drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other subcontractors and locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured.

C. Seal all openings, sleeves, penetration and slots as specified in Section 26_05_33.

3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required. The Contractor shall obtain written permission from the Owner/Engineer before core drilling any holes larger than 2 inches.

B. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching.

C. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, columns or any other structural members.

D. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit.

E. Patching shall be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed.

F. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better.


G. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed.

H. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises.

I. When existing conduits are cut at the floor line of wall line, they shall be filled with grout of suitable patching material.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Any work not installed according to the manufacturer and this Section shall be subject to change as directed by the Owner/Engineer. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes.

B. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades.

C. Electrical equipment shall be protected at all times against mechanical injury or damage by water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters as required by each Specification Section.

D. Do not install electrical equipment in its permanent location until structures are weather-tight. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and tested as directed by the Owner/Engineer, or shall be replaced at no additional cost at the Owner/Engineer's discretion.

E. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the Owner/Engineer's discretion.

F. Repaint any damage to the factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. If the metallic portion of the panel or section is damaged, the entire panel or section shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.06 TESTS AND SETTINGS

A. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division_26 and repair or replace all defective work. Make adjustments to the systems as specified and/or required.

B. Prior to energizing electrical equipment, make all tests as required by the individual specification Sections. Submit a sample test form or procedure and submit the required test reports and data to the Owner/Engineer for approval at least two weeks prior to the startup of the tested equipment. Include names of all test personnel and initial each test.

C. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage. Check bearings for proper lubrication.

D. Check wire and cable terminations for tightness.


E. Check rotation of motors prior to energization. Disconnect driven equipment if damage could occur due to wrong rotation. If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the rotation shall be immediately corrected, or tagged and locked out until rotation is corrected.

F. Verify all terminations at transformers, equipment, capacitor connections, panels, and enclosures by producing a 1 2 3 rotation on a phase sequenced motor when connected to "A", "B" and "C" phases.

G. Mechanical inspection, testing and setting of circuit breakers, disconnect switches, motor starters, control equipment, etc for proper operation.

H. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system to prove that the system will function properly as indicated by schematic and wiring diagrams.

I. Check the ampere rating of thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the Owner/Engineer of same, including MCC cubicle location and load designation, motor service factor, horsepower, full load current and starting code letter. If inconsistencies are found, new thermal elements shall be supplied and installed.

J. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment.

K. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the systems.

END OF SECTION

July 2019 26_05_19-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/GAI/26_05_19 Wires and Cables (1,000 Volt Maximum).doc (BidSet)

SECTION 26_05_19

WIRES AND CABLES (1000 VOLT MAXIMUM)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish, install and test all wire, cable and appurtenances as specified herein for the equipment furnished.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26_00_00 Electrical General Provisions.

B. Section 26_05_33 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings.

C. Section 26_05_43 Underground System.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit catalog data of all wire and cable, connectors and accessories,

specified under this Section with all selections, options and exceptions clearly indicated.

B. Certified Tests: 1. Submit a test report of all installed wire insulation tests.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing installation and

maintenance instructions for splice and termination kits.


A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NEMA WC-5 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission

and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606A – Standard for telecommunications Infrastructure.


A. The general construction of the wire, cables, and the insulation material used shall be similar to that used for cable of the same size and rating in continuous production for at least 15 years and successfully operating in the field in substantial quantities.

B. Wire and cable with a manufacture date of greater than 12 months previous will not be acceptable.


C. Wire and cable shall be in new condition, with the manufacturer’s packaging intact, stored indoors since manufacture, and shall not have been subjected to the weather. Date of manufacture shall be clearly visible on each reel.

D. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.



B. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Do not drop reels from any height.

C. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the wire and cable.

D. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the wiring and installation to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the installation to new operating condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Wires and cables shall be of annealed, 98 percent conductivity, soft drawn tinned copper.

B. All conductors shall be stranded.

C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits, wire smaller than No. 12 AWG shall not be used.

2.02 BUILDING WIRE

A. All building wire shall be stranded copper conductors, Type XHHW-2, as manufactured by Southwire, General Cable or approved equal.


2.03 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CABLE

A. Cable for use with VFDs shall be symmetrical design, three stranded Class D, tinned copper, circuit conductors with XLPE insulation, three bare copper grounds, 100% shields with 50% overlap, and overall PVC jacket. Cable shall be 2000 volt, UL 1277 Type TC, XHHW-2 rated, 90 degree C., IEEE 1202/383. Cable shall be as manufactured by Belden, General Cable, or approved equal.

2.04 TRAY CABLE

A. Cable for tray use shall be stranded copper conductors, Type XHHW-2 insulation, rated as UL Type TC cable. Cable shall be sunlight resistant and approved for direct burial. Cable shall be as manufactured by Southwire, General Cable or approved equal.

2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be stranded copper conductor, Type XHHW-2 with green insulation, as manufactured by Southwire, General Cable, or approved equal.

2.06 BONDING JUMPER

A. Bonding Jumper shall be bare tinned stranded copper conductor, as manufactured by Southwire, General Cable, or approved equal.

2.07 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE

A. Control wire shall be NEC Type XHHW-2 as manufactured by Southwire or approved equal.

B. Multi-conductor control cable, shall be stranded, No.14 AWG 1000V, XHHW-2, insulated, PVC outer jacket overall, Type TC, UL rated for underground wet location, as manufactured by Southwire, Okonite, General Cable or approved equal.

2.08 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE

A. Cables for 4-20 ma, R.T.D., potentiometer and similar signals shall be PLTC rated and shall be: 1. Single pair cable:

a. Conductors: 2 #16 stranded, tinned and twisted on 2-in lay. b. Insulation: PVC with 600 volt, 90 degrees C rating. c. Shield: 100 percent Mylar tape with drain wire. d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer’s identification. e. Misc: UL1685 listed for underground wet location use. f. Manufacturers: Okonite, Belden or approved equal.

2. Three conductor (triad) cable: a. Conductors: 3 #16 stranded, tinned and twisted on 2-in lay. b. Insulation: PVC with 600 volt, 90 degrees C rating. c. Shield: 100 percent Mylar tape with drain wire. d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer’s identification. e. Misc: UL1685 listed for underground wet location use. f. Manufacturers: Okonite, Belden or approved equal.


3. Multiple pair cables a. Conductor: Multiple pairs, #16 stranded, tinned and twisted on a 2-in lay. b. Insulation: PVC with 600 volt, 90 degrees C rating. c. Shield: Individual pairs shielded with 100 percent Mylar tape and drain

wire. d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer’s identification. e. Misc: UL1685 listed for underground wet location use. f. Manufacturers: Okonite, Belden or approved equal.

2.09 TERMINATION MATERIALS

A. Power Conductors: Termination materials, of conductors at equipment, shall be as specified in the relevant equipment Section.

B. Control and Instrumentation Conductors: Termination connectors shall be of the set screw, tongue type, as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, Entrelec, Allen Bradley, or equal.

C. Motor Conductors: Motor connections shall be ring type compression terminations on the motor leads and secured with bolt, nut and spring washer. Connections shall be -30C rubber insulated, half lap, and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 or equal vinyl tape.

D. Lugs and Connectors: 1. All lugs and connectors shall be tin plated copper and shall be crimped type,

with standard industry tooling. Lugs and connectors shall match the wire size where used, and shall be clearly identified and color coded on the connector. All connections shall be made for stranded wire and shall be made electrically and mechanically secured. The lugs and connectors shall have a current carrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and meet UL 486 requirements for 75 degrees C. Lugs larger than 8 AWG shall be two-hole lugs with NEMA spacing. The lugs shall be of closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor.

2.10 SPLICE MATERIALS

A. Power Conductors: Circuits shall be pulled from terminal to terminal, without splicing, except where approved by owner. No other splicing will be permitted. For wires sizes #8 and smaller, provide color coded wire nuts, with metal inserts, 3M or Ideal, rubber insulated with half lap and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 tape. For wires greater than #8 AWG, provide a heat shrink insulated, color-coded, die-crimped splice lug, T&B 54XXX, or equal, rubber insulated, with half lap and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 tape.

B. Control and Instrumentation Conductors: No splicing of control and instrumentation conductors will be permitted.

2.11 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS

A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with "FLAME-SAFE" as manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Corp. or equal.


2.12 WIRE AND CABLE TAGS

A. The Contractor shall use the tagging formats for wire and cable as specified herein.

B. Wire tags for wire sizes, #2 AWG and smaller, shall be heat shrink type Raychem TMS-SCE, or approved equal with the tag numbers typed with an indelible marking process. Character size shall be a minimum of 1/8" in height. Hand written tags shall not be acceptable. Where ends are not available, attach cable tags with nylon tie cord.

C. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable.

2.13 WIRE COLOR CODE

A. All wire shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes #8 or greater, where colored insulation is not available. Where tape is used as the identification system, it shall be applied in all junction boxes, manholes and other accessible intermediate locations as well as at each termination.

B. The following coding shall be used:

System Wire Color

1-Phase, 3 Wire Phase A Phase B Neutral

Black Blue White

208Y/120, Volts

3-Phase, 4 Wire

Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral

Black Red Blue White

480/277, Volts

3-Phase, 4 Wire

Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral

Brown Orange Yellow Gray/White with one or more colored stripes

2.14 CABLE TAG COLOR CODE

A. All cable tags shall be white in color with black printing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. No wire shall be installed between outlet points, junction points or splicing points, until raceway sections are complete, and raceway covers installed for protection of conductors from damage or exposure to the elements. The occurrence of wire installed in an incomplete installation, shall require the removal of such conductors from the project site, and completion and inspection of such raceway sections, before new conductors are installed.


B. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation.

D. Pull all conductors into a raceway at one time, using wire pulling lubricant as needed to protect the wire.

E. Except for hand-pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation shall be installed with tension-monitoring equipment. Where conductors are found to have been installed without tension–monitoring, the conductors and cables shall be immediately removed from the raceways, permanently identified as rejected material, and removed from the jobsite. New conductors and cables shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed, all at no expense to the Owner.

F. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. Where pulling compound is used, use only UL listed compound compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved.

G. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to the inch-pound requirements of the NEC and UL.

H. Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and fireproofing tapes, bundle throughout their exposed length all conductors entering from each conduit with nylon, self-locking,, releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 4 inches on centers.

I. All wire and cable installed in cable trays shall be UL Listed as Type TC, for cable tray use.

3.02 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW

A. Provide conductor sizes required for the equipment furnished.

B. Use crimp connectors on all stranded conductors.

C. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable.

D. Arrange wiring in cabinets and panels neatly cut to proper length, remove surplus wire, and bridle and secure in an acceptable manner. Identify all circuits entering motor control centers or other control cabinets in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein.

E. Terminate control and instrumentation wiring with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions.

F. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated with the UL listed end caps.


G. Where conductors pass through holes or over edges in sheet metal, remove all burrs, chamfer all edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors.

H. No splices shall be allowed, unless approved by the owner.

3.03 GROUNDING

A. Conduits and other raceways shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. Wire connected to the ground rods of the ground mat shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process.

3.04 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES

A. Instrumentation cables shall be installed in raceways as specified. All instrumentation circuits shall be installed as single shielded twisted pair cables or single shielded twisted triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are required.

B. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junction boxes, and all circuits shall be identified at such junctions.

C. Shielded instrumentation wire, coaxial cable, data highway cable, discrete I/O, multiple conductor cable, and fiber optic cables shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run.

D. Shields shall be grounded at the PLC/RTU. Terminal blocks shall be provided for inter-connecting shield drain wires at all junction boxes. Individual circuit shielding shall be provided with its own block.

E. Shield wire shall be wrapped and taped at the transmitter end of the signal run. Before termination, peel back the outer sheath, leaving the shield intact. Wrap the drain wire around the conductors, leaving approximately two inches exposed. Wrap the drain wire with two layers of Scotch 33 tape.

3.05 WIRE TAGGING

A. All wiring shall be tagged at all termination points and at all major access points in the electrical raceways. A termination point in defined as any point or junction where a wire or cable is physically connected. This includes terminal blocks and device terminals. A major access point to a raceway is defined as any enclosure; box or space designed for wire or cable pulling or inspection and includes pull boxes, manholes, and junction boxes.

B. Wire tags shall show both origination and destination information to allow for a wire or cable to be traced from point in the field. Information regarding its origination shall be shown in parenthesis.


C. For multi-conductor cables, both the individual conductors and the overall cable shall be tagged. Conductors that are part of a multi-conductor cable shall reference the cable identification number that they are a part of, as well as a unique conductor number within the cable.

3.06 CABLE TAGGING

A. All cables shall be tagged at all termination points and at all major access points in the electrical raceways as defined in the wire tag section of this Specification.

B. The cable tag shall be installed where the cable enters and leaves each access point (e.g., junction box, manhole, etc.). In cases of limited access space, a single tag may be used that shows both equipment tag origination and destination. In the case where the jacket is stripped for terminations, the tag shall be installed at the end of the jacket.

3.07 RACEWAY SEALING

A. Where raceways enter junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant, or approved equal.

B. This requirement shall be strictly adhered to for all raceways in the conduit system.

3.08 FIELD TESTS

A. Conductors under 1000 Volts: 1. Perform insulation resistance testing of all power circuits below 1000 volts with

a 1000-volt megger, in accordance with the recommendations of the wire manufacturer.

2. Prepare a written test report of the results and submit to the Owner/Engineer prior to final inspection.

3. Minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 100 megohms for cable lengths 40 feet or less. Lower values shall be acceptable only by the Owner/Engineer's specific written approval. For lengths longer than 40 feet, the minimum megohm value shall be 2000 megohms per foot.

4. Disconnect equipment that might be damaged by this test. Perform tests with all other equipment connected to the circuit.

B. Tests: After instrumentation cable installation and conductor termination by the instrumentation and control supplier, perform tests to ensure that instrumentation cable shields are isolated from ground, except at the grounding point in the instrumentation control panel. Remove all improper grounds.

END OF SECTION

July 2019 26_05_26-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/GAI/26_05_26 Grounding and Bonding System.doc (BidSet)

SECTION 26_05_26

GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install a complete Grounding and Bonding System, in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), and as specified herein.

B. The system shall include ground wires, ground rods, exothermic connections, mechanical connectors, structural steel connections, as specified herein, to provide a bonding to earth ground of all metallic materials likely to become energized.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26_00_00 Electrical – General Provisions.

B. Section 26_05_19 Wire and Cables (1000 Volt Maximum).

C. Section 26_05_29 Electrical Support Hardware.

D. Section 26_05_33 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1and Section 26 00 00, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Grounding conduit hubs. 3. Waterpipe ground clamps. 4. Buried grounding connections. 5. Compression lugs. 6. Exothermic bonding system.


A. All products and components listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. UL 467-2007 --Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 3. NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories.



A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.


A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted.

B. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment, or materials, shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAYS

A. Conduit shall be as specified under Section 26_05_33.

B. All raceways, conduits and ducts shall contain equipment grounding conductors sized in accordance with the NEC. Minimum sizes shall be No. 12 AWG.

2.02 CONDUCTORS

A. Wire shall be as specified under Section 26_05_19 Ground wire shall be uninsulated tinned copper, in all cases where a single ground wire is to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate the ground wire with green insulation as specified for low voltage wire.

2.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground rods shall be 3/4 in by 10 ft copper clad steel and constructed in accordance with UL 467. The minimum copper thickness shall be 10 mils. Ground rods shall be as manufactured by ERICO, Copperweld or approved equal.


2.04 CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS

A. Waterpipe ground clamps shall be cast bronze, Thomas & Betts Co. Cat. JPT, similar by Burndy; O.Z. Gedney Co. or equal, and of the correct size for the pipe.

B. Grounding connections shall be by an exothermic weld process, T&B Furseweld SCR1, or equal.

C. Grounding connections in a Class 1 Division 1 Area shall use a Burndy Hyground Irreversible Compression System, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Run grounding electrode conductors in rigid conduits. Bond the protecting conduits to the grounding electrode conductors at both ends. Do not allow water pipe connections to be painted. If the connections are painted, disassemble them and remake them with new fittings.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all raceways for the power, control and instrumentation systems. Grounding conductors shall be independent conductors and shall be separate from all shield drain wires.

C. Conduits and other raceways shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets and other equipment shall be properly bonded in accordance with NEC requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid conduit.

D. Bond all steel building columns in new structures together with ground wire in rigid conduit and connect to the distribution equipment ground bus. Ground wire connections to structural steel columns shall be made with long barrel type one hole heavy duty copper compression lugs, bolted through 1/2 in maximum diameter holes drilled in the column web, with stainless steel hex head cap screws and nuts.

E. Where the grounding loop rises to bond to a column, an insulated jumper shall be installed. An insulated ground jumper shall be used. The jumper shall be shall be bonded to the grounding loop, rise up above the ground and make connection to the building column steel. All connections to the ground ring and the building steel shall be of the exothermic type as specified equal to the Cadweld process.

F. Metal conduits stubbed into a motor control center shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the motor control center ground bus. Bond boxes mounted below motor control centers to the motor control center ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with NEC Table 250.122, except that a minimum No. 12 AWG shall be used.

G. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2 in and larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps.


H. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with NEC Article 250.66.

I. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduits systems, cable tray, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC.

J. Seal exposed connections between different metals with no-oxide paint, Grade A or equal.

K. Lay all underground grounding conductors slack and, where exposed to mechanical injury, protect by pipes or other substantial guards. If guards are iron pipe, or other magnetic material, electrically connect conductors to both ends of the guard. Make connections as specified herein.

L. Care shall be taken to ensure good ground continuity, in particular between the conduit system and equipment frames and enclosures. Where necessary, jumper wires shall be installed.

M. All grounding type receptacles shall be grounded to the outlet boxes with a minimum, #12 XHHW green conductor, connected to the ground terminal of the receptacle and fastened to the outlet box by means of a grounding screw.

3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.

B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent test instrument to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method.

C. All test equipment shall be provided under this Section and approved by the Owner/Engineer.

D. Resistance to ground testing shall be preceded by no precipitation for a minimum of 5 days. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground.

E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the electrical distribution system.

F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system.

G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than five ohms.

END OF SECTION

July 2019 26_05_29-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/GAI/26_05_29 Electrical Support Hardware.doc (BidSet)

SECTION 26_05_29

ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install electrical support hardware, necessary for supporting the equipment furnished and as specified herein.

B. Hardware shall include anchor systems, adhesive anchor systems, metal framing systems, and other electrical support systems, as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 26 Specifications.

B. Process Equipment Division Specifications.

C. Instrumentation Equipment Division Specifications.

D. Mechanical Equipment Division Specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified

B. The submittal information, for anchor systems, shall contain manufacturer's specifications and technical data including: 1. Acceptable base material conditions (i.e. cracked, un-cracked concrete). 2. Acceptable drilling methods. 3. Acceptable bore hole conditions (dry, water saturated, water filled, under

water). 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions including bore hole cleaning

procedures and adhesive injection. 5. Cure and gel time tables. 6. Temperature ranges (storage, installation and in-service).


A. All products and components listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 70E Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 3. ASTM E 488-96 (2003); Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in

Concrete and Masonry Elements, ASTM International.


4. ASTM E 1512-93, Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond Performance of Adhesive-Bonded Anchors, ASTM International.

5. C308; Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete Elements, Latest revision.

6. SAE 316 Stainless Steel Grades.

B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications, having a UL standard, shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories.




A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted.

B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Adhesive Anchor Systems: 1. Deliver materials undamaged in Manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened

containers, identified with brand, type, and ICC-ES Evaluation Report number. 2. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date, minimizing

storage time at job-site. 3. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in

compliance with Manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions.

4. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable.

5. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 6. Storage restrictions (temperature range) and expiration date must be supplied

with product.

D. Metal Framing Systems: 1. Material shall be new and unused, with no signs of damage from handling.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ANCHORING SYSTEMS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following

Manufacturers are acceptable: a. HILTI Kwik Bolt 3. b. Approved equal.

2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.

B. Product Description: 1. Torque controlled expansion anchor consisting of anchor body, expansion

element (wedges), washer and nut. Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes less than 3/8 inch.

2. All parts shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel materials conforming to SAE 316.

3. UL 203 Rated.

2.02 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEMS


Manufacturers are acceptable: a. HILTI HIT-RTZ with HIT-HY 200 MAX. b. Approved equal.


B. Product Description: 1. Anchor body with helical cone shaped thread on the embedded end and

standard threads on the exposed end, with washer and nut, inserted into Injection adhesive. Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes 3/8 inch and larger.

2. All parts shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel materials conforming to SAE 316 standards.

2.03 U-CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEMS


Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Tyco Unistrut. b. Cooper B-Line. c. Super-Strut. d. Approved equal.



B. Product Description: 1. Metal framing system for use in the mounting or support of electrical systems,

panels and enclosures, and including lighting fixture supports, trapeze hangers and conduit supports.

2. Components shall consist of telescoping channels, slotted back-to-back channels, end clamps allthreads and conduit clamps.

3. Minimum sizes shall be 13/16” through 3-1/4”. 4. Components shall be assembled by means of flat plate fittings, 90 degree

angle fittings, braces, clevis fittings, U-fittings, Z-fittings, Wing-fittings, Post Bases, channel nuts, washers, etc.

5. Field welding of components will not be permitted. 6. Unless otherwise specified all parts shall be manufactured of 316 stainless

steel material conforming to SAE 316.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall install all equipment strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. The location of all devices shall be determined in the field based on manufacturers recommendations, and may be varied within reasonable limits so as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without extra cost, subject to the approval of the Owner. Coordinate the installation of the devices for piping and equipment clearance.

C. No electrical equipment or raceways shall be attached to or supported from, sheet metal walls.

D. Install required safety labels.


A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage.

B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 POST INSTALLED ANCHOR SYSTEMS

A. Prior to installation of the anchor systems, the hole shall be clean and dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.


3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the installation. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air.

END OF SECTION

July 2019 26_05_33-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/GAI/26_05_33 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings.doc (BidSet)

SECTION 26_05_33

RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown as specified herein. A raceway system shall consist of materials designed expressly for containing wires and cables, including but not limited to, conduit, device bodies, conduit bodies, raceway boxes, and related materials.

1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Section 26_05_19 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum).

C. Section 26_05_29 Electrical Support Hardware.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers of all materials specified.

B. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, certification that the electricians installing the PVC coated conduit shall have a five- year minimum experience, in the installation of the product.


A. All products and components listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 70E – Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 3. UL 6A – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit. 4. ANSI C80.5 – Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 5. UL 514B – Outlet Bodies.

B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories.




B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer.

C. The Contractor’s installer of materials specified herein shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in the installation of each type of material. Proof of experience shall be submitted, upon request of the Owner/Engineer, prior to installation.



B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Materials shall not be stored exposed to sunlight. Such materials shall be completely covered.

D. Materials showing signs of previous or jobsite, exposure will be rejected.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Raceways and fittings shall be as required for equipment being furnished, with a minimum 3/4″ trade size.

B. Where Equipment or Instrumentation device entries are less than 3/4 inch, provide an REA12SA, Cooper Crouse Hinds or equal, for aluminum raceways and ADAPT ADU302930, REDAPT or equal, for 316 stainless applications.

2.02 CONDUIT RACEWAY

A. PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit (CRMC): 1. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit shall have a minimum 0.040-in thick,

polyvinyl chloride coating permanently bonded to rigid aluminum conduit and an internal chemically cured urethane or enamel coating. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be as manufactured by the Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.; Wheatland Tube Co.; Triangle PWC Inc., T&B Ocal, or approved equal. The ends of all couplings, fittings, etc. shall have a minimum of one pipe diameter in length of PVC overlap. PVC coated conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Perma-Cote, Robroy Industries, Triangle PWC Inc. or Ocal.


2. Elbows and couplings shall be PVC coated by the same manufacturer supplying the conduit PVC coating system. Elbows and couplings used with PVC coated conduit shall be furnished with a PVC coating bonded to the aluminum, the same thickness as used on the coated aluminum conduit.

B. Liquidtight Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): 1. Liquidtight aluminum flexible metal conduit shall have an interlocked aluminum

core, PVC jacket rated for 60 degrees Canada meeting NEC Article 351, as manufactured by the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.; Southwire; Anaconda American Brass Co.; American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.; Universal Metal Hose Co.; ALFLEX or equal.

2. Fittings used with liquidtight flexible aluminum conduit shall be copper-free aluminum and shall conform to FEDSPEC AA50552, and UL-514B.

C. Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): 1. Aluminum flexible metal conduit shall have an interlocked aluminum core,

meeting NEC Article 348, UL 1and Federal Specification WW-C-566C, as manufactured by the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.; Southwire; Anaconda American Brass Co.; American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.; Universal Metal Hose Co. or approved equal.

2. Fittings used with aluminum flexible metal conduit shall be copper-free aluminum shall conform to FEDSPEC AA50552.

D. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RMC): 1. Rigid Aluminum conduit shall be extruded from AA 6063 alloy in temper

designation T-1 and shall conform to FED Spec WW-C-540C, ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. Rigid aluminum conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Wheatland Tube Company, Allied, or approved equal.

E. Rigid PVC Schedule 40 Conduit (RNC): 1. Schedule 40 PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC) shall be designed for use

underground as described in the NEC, resistant to sunlight. The conduits and fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-2, Federal Specification WC1094A and UL 651 specifications. Fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-3, Federal Specification WC1094A and UL 514B. Conduit shall have a UL Label. Conduit shall be Rocky Mountain Colby, Carlon, Kraloy, or approved equal.

F. Rigid PVC Schedule 80 Conduit (RNC).

2.03 WIREWAYS

A. All wireways shall be constructed of NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel, with gasketed hinged covers and stainless steel latches. Wireway shall have two Breather/Drains for each 10ft of wireway. Breather/Drain shall be located in the bottom, near the ends of the wireway. Wireway shall be as manufactured by Industrial Enclosure Corporation, Cooper B Line, or approved equal. Breather/Drains shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds Type ECD18-316 stainless steel, or approved equal.

2.04 RACEWAY BOXES

A. Boxes specified herein, including terminal boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes, are for use with raceway systems only, but include switch, receptacle and lighting housings. Boxes used for housing electrical and instrumentation equipment, other


than terminal boxes, shall be as described elsewhere in these Specifications. All raceway boxes shall be provided with a common ground point and UL rated.

B. NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel enclosures (for all locations): 1. Type 316 stainless steel, body and door. 2. Stainless steel continuous hinge. 3. Foam in-place gasket. 4. Single point quarter turn latches (20″x24″ and below). All others 3-point latch. 5. Mounting feet for self-standing enclosures. 6. Manufacturers:

a. Hoffman Concept Series. b. EMF Company. c. NEMA Enclosures Company. d. Hammond Company. e. Approved Equal.

C. NEMA 1 or NEMA 1A boxes shall not be used.

2.05 DEVICE BOXES

A. Device boxes, switch, receptacle, etc., shall be of copper free cast aluminum, and shall have tapered, threaded, hubs, with integral bushings. Boxes shall have internal grounding screw, and a minimum of two mounting feet. Boxes shall be type FD, Cooper Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or approved equal.

2.06 CONDUIT OUTLET BODIES

A. For conduits up to and including 2-1/2″, conduit outlet bodies and covers shall be copper-free aluminum, with captive screw-clamp cover, neoprene gasket and stainless steel screws and clamps, Cooper Crouse-Hinds Form 7 with Mark 7 wedge-nut cover, Appleton, or approved equal. For conduits larger than 2-1/2″, junction boxes shall be used.

2.07 CONDUIT HUBS

A. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or approved equal.

2.08 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Grounding bushings shall be insulated lay-in lug grounding bushings with tin-plated copper grounding path. Bushings shall have integrally molded noncombustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150°C. Each bushing shall be furnished with a plastic insert cap. The size of the lug shall be sufficient to accommodate the maximum ground wire size required by the NEC for the application. Bushings shall be O-Z/Gedney Type ABLG, or approved equal.

2.09 RACEWAY SEALANT

A. Raceway sealant for use in the sealing of raceway hubs, entering or terminating in boxes or enclosures where such sealing is shown or specified, shall be 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant, or approved equal.


2.10 CONDUIT PENETRATION SEALS

A. Conduit wall and floor seals shall be series CSM as manufactured by the O.Z./Gedney Co., or equal.

B. Type CSML-XXXP shall be used for all applications that do not require a recessed sealing bushing: 1. Type CSMI-XXXP shall be used for all applications that require a recessed

sealing bushing.

2.11 EXPANSION-DEFLECTION COUPLING

A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings with 3/4″ axial expansion and contraction movement, 3/4″ parallel misalignment movement, and up to 30 degrees of angular movement in any direction. It shall be of copper-free aluminum, with exterior bonding jumper of tinned copper braid and 316 stainless grounding straps, Cooper Crouse-Hinds Model XD as manufactured by the Crouse--Hinds Co., or equal. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable.

2.12 EXPANSION FITTINGS

A. Expansion fittings shall be 8″ movement, copper-free aluminum, with exterior bonding jumper of tinned copper braid and 316 stainless grounding straps, Type XJGSA as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Co., or approved equal, with internal grounding. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable.

2.13 EXPLOSION-PROOF SEALS, BREATHERS AND DRAINS

A. Explosion proof fittings shall be designed for Class 1 Division 1, Group D, hazardous locations. Fittings shall be of copper-free aluminum, consist of seals, breathers and drains of type ED, as required for the application. Fittings shall be as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; O.Z./Gedney Co., or equal.

2.14 KELLUMS GRIPS

A. Kellums grips to support cables shall be of 316 stainless steel.

2.15 CONDUIT MOUNTING EQUIPMENT

A. All pull and junction box supports, spacers, conduit support rods, clamps, hangers, channel, nut, bolts, washers, etc. and shall be made of 316 stainless steel. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable.

2.16 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION TAGGING

A. The Contractor shall tag all underground conduits at all locations exiting and entering from underground, including manholes and handholes.

B. Conduit identification plates shall be embossed stainless steel with stainless steel band, permanently secured to the conduit without screws. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable.


C. Identification plates shall be as manufactured by the Panduit Corp. or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the placement of raceway systems and related components with other trades and existing installations.

B. The raceway type installed with respect to the location shall be as follows, including all materials:

Raceway System Location

1. Rigid Galvanized (RSC) Type

Not acceptable for use on this Project except where specifically required by the utility company, for use on primary conductors. All other utility company’s raceways shall be Rigid Non-metallic Schedule 80 PVC as specified below.

2. PVC Coated Aluminum (CRMC) Type

All embedded raceway bends, underground duct bank bends of more than 20 degrees, and all raceway stub-ups to a minimum of 6″ above finished floor or grade and in Chlorine and Caustic rooms.

3. Liquidtight Flexible Aluminum (LFMC) Type

Raceway connection to vibrating equipment,

4. Rigid Non-metallic, Schedule 40 PVC (RNC) Type

Underground encased in red dyed reinforced concrete.

5. Aluminum Rigid Metal (RMC) Type

All above grade areas.

C. All conduit of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer.

3.02 BOX APPLICATIONS

A. All raceway junction, pull and terminal boxes shall have NEMA ratings for the location in which they are installed, and as specified herein.

B. For all raceway boxes, the distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box shall not be less than eight times the metric designator (trade size) of the largest raceway in a row. This distance shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the sum of the diameters of all other raceway entries in the same row on the same wall of the box. Each row shall be calculated individually, and the single row that provides the maximum distance shall be used.

C. Exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall be cast aluminum.

D. All boxes shall be provided with factory mounting lugs. Drilling through the back of any box or enclosure is prohibited, and if so installed, shall be removed and replaced, with no increase in the Contract Price or Construction Schedule.

E. No penetrations shall be made in the top of boxes in wet locations.


3.03 DEVICE BOX APPLICATIONS

A. Device boxes shall be used for mounting wiring devices such as receptacles, switches, thermostats, lighting and other permanently mounted devices.

3.04 CONDUIT HUB APPLICATIONS

A. Unless specifically stated herein all raceways shall terminate at an outlet with a conduit hub. Locknut or double locknut terminations will not be permitted.

B. When conduits contain equipment grounding conductors the wire shall be grounded to the hub(s) associated with that grounding conductor.

3.05 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHING APPLICATIONS

A. Insulated grounding bushings shall be used to terminate raceways where the raceways enter pad-mounted electrical equipment or switchgear from the bottom where there is no wall or floor pan on which to anchor or terminate the raceway.

B. All other raceways shall terminate on enclosures with a conduit hub, except for NEMA 7/4X areas.

C. Grounding bushing caps shall remain on the bushing until the wire is ready to be pulled.

3.06 CONDUIT FITTINGS APPLICATIONS

A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings shall be installed where conduits cross structure expansion joints, and where installed in exposed conduit runs such that the distance between expansion-deflection fittings does not exceed one hundred fifty (150) feet of conduit run.

B. Where combination expansion-deflection fittings with exposed non-metallic sections, are used on the exterior, an aluminum wrap shall be installed loosely over the non-metallic portion, extending at least 2″ beyond the ends. The wrap shall be loosely secured, to permit movement, with at least two 316 SS fasteners. Nylon tie-wraps are not acceptable.

3.07 CONDUIT PENETRATION SEALS APPLICATIONS

A. Conduit wall seals shall be used where underground conduits penetrate walls.

B. Conduit sealing bushings shall be used to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather and at other locations.

3.08 EXPLOSION-PROOF SEALS, BREATHERS AND DRAINS APPLICATIONS

A. Fittings consisting of sealing fittings, breathers, drains, with sealing compound and fiber, as specified herein, shall be used as required to meet all the requirements of the National Electrical Code.


3.09 CONDUIT TAG APPLICATIONS

A. All conduits shall be tagged within 1ft. of the entry of equipment, and wall and floor penetrations.

B. The Contractor shall tag all underground conduits and ducts at all locations, exiting and entering from underground, including manholes and handholes.

3.10 RACEWAY SEALING

A. Where raceways enter junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be of the hub type and sealed with Raceway Sealant, as specified herein.

B. This requirement shall be strictly adhered to for all raceways in the conduit system.

3.11 PVC RACEWAY TO PVC COATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY TRANSITIONS

A. Where a transition is made from PVC raceway to PVC coated aluminum raceway, the PVC raceway shall terminate in a female adapter. A PVC coated aluminum male threaded end, or fitted with a PVC coated aluminum male adapter, shall be threaded into the PVC raceway. After tightening securely, the transition shall be double layered with 2 in. vinyl electrical tape, for a distance of 2 inches each side of the threaded joint.

3.12 RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. No wire shall be installed between outlet points, junction points or splicing points, until raceway sections are complete, and raceway covers installed for protection of conductors from damage or exposure to the elements. The occurrence of wire installed in an incomplete installation, shall require the removal of such conductors from the project site, and completion and inspection of such raceway sections, before new conductors are installed.

B. No conduit smaller than 3/4-in electrical trade size, shall be used, nor shall any have more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends in any one run. Pull boxes shall be provided as necessary.

C. All raceways, installed underground, shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 05 43 Underground System, and be a minimum size of 2″C.

D. Where raceways enter or leave the raceway system, where the raceway origin or termination, could be subjected to the entry of moisture, rain or liquid of any type, particularly where the termination of such raceways terminate in any equipment, new or existing at a lower elevation, such raceways shall be tightly sealed, using Watertight Sealant, at the higher elevation, both before and after the installation of cables, such that there shall be no entry of water or moisture to the Raceway System at any time. Any damage to new or existing equipment, due to the entrance of moisture from unsealed raceways, shall be corrected by complete replacement of such equipment, at no cost to the Owner. Cleaning or drying of such damaged equipment will not be acceptable.


E. Conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, shall be spaced at intervals of 8-ft or less, as required to obtain rigid construction.

F. Single conduits shall be supported by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination with one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the surface. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported on trapeze type hangers with horizontal members and threaded hanger rods. The rods shall be not less than 3/8-in diameter. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc shall be supported by strut, to provide a minimum of 1/2-in clearance between wall and equipment.

G. Conduit hangers shall be attached to structural steel by means of beam or channel clamps.

H. No raceways or electrical equipment shall be attached to or supported from, sheet metal walls.

I. All conduits on exposed work shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding wall and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. All conduits shall be run perfectly straight and true.

J. Conduits terminated into enclosures shall be perpendicular to the walls where flexible liquidtight or rigid conduits are required. The use of short sealtight elbow fittings for such terminations will not be permitted, except for connections to instrumentation transmitters, where multiple penetrations are required.

K. Conduits shall be installed using threaded fittings. Running threads will not be permitted.

L. All conduit fittings on PVC conduit shall be of the glued type.

M. Liquidtight flexible aluminum conduit shall be used for the primary and secondary of transformers, generator terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. Use in other locations is not permitted, except for connections to instrumentation transmitters, where multiple penetrations are required. Liquidtight flexible aluminum conduit shall have a maximum length not greater than that of a factory manufactured long radius elbow of the conduit size being used. The maximum bending radius shall not be less than that shown in the NEC Chapter 9, Table 2, “Other Bends”. BX or AC type prefabricated cables will not be permitted.

N. Where conduits pass through openings in walls or floor slabs, the remaining openings shall be sealed against the passage of flame and smoke.

O. Conduit ends exposed to the weather or corrosive gases shall be sealed with conduit sealing bushings.

P. Raceways terminating in Control Panels or enclosures outdoors, containing electrical equipment, shall not enter from the top of the enclosure, and the raceway shall be sealed with a Watertight Sealant as specified herein.

Q. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed in areas designated as NEMA 4X or classified areas, and all building penetrations as specified.


R. A conduit identification plate shall be installed on all power, instrumentation, alarm and control conduits at each end of the run and at intermediate junction boxes, manholes, etc. Conduit plates shall be installed before conductors are pulled into conduits. Exact identification plate location shall be coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at the time of installation to provide uniformity of placement and ease of reading.

S. Mandrels shall be pulled through all existing conduits that will be reused and through all new conduits 2-in in diameter and larger prior to installing conductors.

T. 3/16-in polypropylene pull lines shall be installed in all new conduits noted as spares or designated for future equipment.

U. All conduit that may under any circumstance contain liquids such as water, condensation, liquid chemicals, etc, shall be arranged to drain away from the equipment served. If conduit drainage is not possible, conduit seals shall be used to plug the conduits at the point of attachment to the equipment.

V. Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, access hatches or vent duct openings. They shall be routed to avoid such present or future openings in floor or ceiling construction.

W. The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, a 3-piece union shall be used.

X. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces, cold air plenums, etc, shall be sealed with Watertight Sealant as specified herein.

Y. Conduits shall be located a minimum of 3-in from steam or hot water piping. Where crossings are unavoidable, the conduit shall be kept at least 1-in from the covering of the pipe crossed.

Z. Conduits terminating at a cable tray shall be supported independently from the cable tray. Provide a conduit support within 1-ft of the cable tray. The weight of the conduit shall not bear on the cable tray.

AA. All changes of direction on PVC coated aluminum conduit greater than 20 degrees shall be accomplished using long radius bends. Any field bends shall be made using equipment designed to prevent damage to the PVC coating.

BB. Rigid steel conduit installed in the ground shall have watertight joints and shall be painted the entire length with two coats of protective finish. The first shall be a 5 mils thick coat of PPG “Coal Cat Epoxy Coating.” All coating shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The entire length of metallic conduit, including fittings, in contact with the ground, to a point 6" above the ground (or concrete slab), shall be completely coated.

END OF SECTION

July 2019 26_05_50-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/GAI/26_05_50 NEMA Frame Induction Motors, 600 Volts and Below.doc (BidSet)

SECTION 26_05_50

NEMA FRAME INDUCTION MOTORS, 1000 VOLTS AND BELOW

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide electric motors, accessories, and appurtenances complete and operable, in conformance with the individual driven equipment specifications and other sections of the Contract Documents.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all low voltage NEMA Frame AC squirrel cage induction motors, except as indicated otherwise.

1.02 RELATED WORK


B. Section 26_05_19 Wires and Cables (1000 Volt Maximum).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein.

B. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned unreviewed.

C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification and described in the related sections listed in Related Work above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned as “INCOMPLETE SUBMITTAL – REJECTED. No portion of an INCOMPLETE SUBMITTAL will be Approved or reviewed.

D. The following information shall be submitted with the motor drawings for review: 1. Name of Drive. 2. Horsepower of Motor. 3. Phase. 4. Full Load Efficiency. 5. Voltage. 6. Full Load Power Factor. 7. Speed. 8. NEMA Design Starting Torque. 9. NEMA Frame and Dimensions. 10. Full Load Current. 11. Locked Rotor Current. 12. Insulation Class. 13. Temperature Rise at 1.0 SF. 14. Enclosure.


15. Bearing life design. 16. Special features (i.e., space heaters, RTDs, oversize conduit box and

corrosion resistant features). 17. Nameplate Drawing with Information as listed herein. 18. Lugs and connectors.

E. Suppliers of fractional horsepower motors below frame 143T will not be required to submit operational characteristics.

F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests as specified above.

G. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein.

H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:

a. Manufacturer’s contact address and telephone number for parts and service.

b. Instruction books and/or leaflets. c. Recommended renewal parts list. d. Record Documents for the information required by the submitted motor

information above.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Motors shall be designed, built, and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association Inc. (NEMA):

a. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. b. NEMA MG1 Part 9 – Sound Power Limits and Measurement Procedures. c. NEMA MG2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection,

Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators. d. NEMA MG3 - Sound Level Prediction for Installed Rotating Electrical

Machines. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA-70 - National Electrical Code. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. UL-1004 - Electric Motors. 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. IEEE Std 1 - General Principles for Temperature Limits in the Rating of Electric Equipment.

b. IEEE Std 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery.

c. NEMA MG1 Part 9 – Sound Power Limits and Measurement Procedures. d. IEEE Std 112 – Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors

and Generators. e. IEEE Std 275 - Recommended Practice for Thermal Evaluation of

Insulation Systems for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-wound Pre-insulated Stator Coils, Machines Rated 6,900 V and Below.

f. IEEE Std 429 - Standard Test Procedure for the Evaluation of Sealed Insulation Systems for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-wound Stator Coils.


g. IEEE Std 1349 – Guide for the Application of Electric Motors in Class 1, Div 2 Hazardous Locations.

5. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association Inc. (AFBMA): a. AFBMA-9 & 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

6. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Motors specified herein are three-phase, squirrel cage induction type for ½ HP and above, and single phase for less than ½ HP, except as specifically specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

B. The word "Drive" shall be construed to mean the driven equipment, i.e. pump, hoist, fan, compressor, or adjustable frequency drive connected with the motor.


A. Motor Compatibility. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the motor included with the drive is compatible with driven equipment and complies with these Specifications. In the event that the motors described in these Specifications cannot be applied to the application or equipment offered, the Contractor may submit an exception, stating clearly the deviations and the reasons for such deviations. The acceptance or rejection of such deviations shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner/Engineer.

B. When motors are furnished with driven equipment, the driven equipment supplier shall be responsible for mounting the motor and driven equipment as a complete unit, correctly aligned and coupled with the coupling or sheave specified on the driven equipment data sheet, and for designing vibration, special, or unbalanced forces resulting from equipment operation.

C. Motors manufactured more than 24 months prior to the date of this Contract will not be acceptable. Date of manufacture, of each motor shall be on the nameplate.



B. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry.

C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer.

D. If motors are shipped as an integral part of the associated mechanical equipment, the motors shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.


E. If motors are shipped separately, the motor shall be installed in its permanent, finished location within 14 calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within 14 calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor’s expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment.

F. Where space heaters are provided in motors, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters, during storage and after motors are installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service.

G. The motor shaft shall be rotated on a monthly basis, if such is recommended or required by the motor manufacturer; the date recorded, and copies of the record provided to the Owner/Engineer and the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall confirm receipt of the rotation record.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. For all other motors, the motor manufacturer shall warrant the motor to be free from defects in material and workmanship for not less than two years from date of final acceptance of the associated equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the motor to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the motor shall be performed by the motor manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. General Electric. 2. TECO – Westinghouse. 3. Toshiba. 4. Baldor.

B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Each motor provided shall have an Identification Tag Number, conforming to the numbering system and equipment name.

B. Specific motor data such as HP, RPM, enclosure type, etc., is specified under the detailed specification for the mechanical equipment with which the motor is supplied.


C. The motor manufacturer’s nameplates shall be engraved or embossed on stainless steel and fastened to the motor frame with stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate clearly all of the items of information enumerated in NEMA Standard MGI, as applicable, including but not limited to the following information: 1. Horsepower (output). 2. RPM at full load. 3. Time rating. 4. Frequency. 5. Number of phases. 6. Model number. 7. Rated voltage. 8. Service factor. 9. Full load amps. 10. Insulation class. 11. NEMA design letter. 12. NEMA code letter. 13. Temperature Rise at 1.0 SF. 14. NEMA Frame size. 15. Motor Weight. 16. Date of manufacture. 17. Thermal protection (if supplied).

D. Where frequent starting occurs, the design for frequent starting duty shall be equal to the duty service required by the driven equipment.

E. Altitude: Under 3300 FT. For applications above 3300 FT, motors shall be specifically designed and certified for operation at the specific altitude.

F. Motors shall have sufficient horsepower and torque capacity to drive the equipment without overloading under all conditions, without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor and without use of the service factor.

G. Motors shall have a breather drain in each end bracket of the TEFC motor enclosure. Stainless steel automatic breather drains shall be provided in the lowest part of both end brackets to allow drainage of condensation.

H. Motors shall be slide rail mounted for all belt or chain-driven applications.

I. Air inlets and outlets shall be protected by vermin-proof, corrosion resistant louvers. The air inlets shall be located on end or side as required by the application.

J. Motors shall have an oversized, gasketed, cast iron conduit box, field adjustable in 90-degree increments unless the box contains equipment, diagonally split with tapped NPT threaded conduit entrance hole, and shall exceed the minimum volumes defined in IEEE 841-2001. Neoprene conduit box cover gasket and neoprene lead seal gasket with flexible nipples to ensure the seal is maintained as the leads are moved shall be furnished. Provision for grounding shall be provided in the conduit box utilizing a mounted clamp-type lug.

K. Motor frames, end brackets, and conduit box shall be of cast-iron.

L. Provide lifting lugs on the motor frame.


M. Motors shall be NEMA Design B standard, unless otherwise specified in the process equipment division of these Specifications.

N. Service factor shall be 1.15 for all motors. 1. In sizing motors, no portion of a motor’s service factor above 1.0 shall be used

in normal continuous operation of the motor.

O. Motors shall be of the Energy Efficient type.

P. All motors shall be continuous time rated suitable for operation in a 40 degrees C ambient, unless specified otherwise in the process equipment division of these Specifications.

Q. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), for all applications. See the process equipment division of these Specifications for pumps and other equipment that require additional enclosure requirements.

R. All TEFC Motors shall have corrosion resistant enclosures, fan, cover, epoxy paint, corrosion resistant fittings and stainless steel or aluminum nameplates similar to “Mill and Chemical”, “Corro-Duty”, “Chemical Processing” motors, or equal.

S. Motors are to be bi-directional. If the fan must be unidirectional, it shall be the motor manufacturer's responsibility to obtain the direction required from the drive manufacturer.

T. Guards: 1. Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards in accordance with the

requirements of OSHA. Guards shall be fabricated of flattened expanded metal screen, 3/4-inch No. 10, to provide visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard.

2. Guards shall be galvanized after fabrication and shall be designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts. Windows shall be provided in the guard for access to the lubricating fittings.

2.03 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS – LESS THAN ½ HP

A. Motor voltage shall be single phase, 115 V, 60 Hz, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

B. Enclosures shall be TEFC or TENV.

C. Motors shall have a built-in manual or automatic reset thermal protector, or an integrally mounted, enclosed manual reset, motor overload switch.

2.04 MOTORS ½ HP AND LARGER

A. Motor voltage shall be 3 phase, single voltage, as shown on the Drawings, and in compliance with IEEE 841 (Mill & Chemical).

B. Motors shall have NEMA standard Class "F" insulation with a maximum temperature rise of 90 Deg C above a 40 Deg C ambient, on a continuous operation or intermittent duty, at nameplate horsepower.


C. Motors shall have non-hygroscopic encapsulated windings of copper. Motor leads shall be Class F rated, with permanent identification.

D. Motor rotors and assembly, shall be dynamically balanced.

E. Motors less than 15 HP shall have a locked rotor inrush not exceeding MG 1. Motors 15HP and larger shall have a locked rotor inrush kVA` not exceeding Code G (6.29 kVA/HP).

F. Motors shall meet or exceed the Minimum Guaranteed Efficiencies, listed in the Table of Part 4 of this Section, at the approximate nameplate current values at 460 volts.

G. The motor insulation system for motors controlled with VFD’s shall have full capability to handle the common mode voltage conditions imposed by the VFD. Motor insulation system shall conform to all of the requirements of the latest version of NEMA MG1, Part 31 for peak voltage withstand capability.

H. All motors controlled with AFD’s shall have 1600 Volt insulation systems.

I. The critical speed of the shaft and rotor assembly shall exceed the operating speed by a minimum of 10 percent.

J. The no-load sound pressure level, based on the A-weighted scale at 3 feet, when measured in accordance with NEMA MG1 Section 1 Part 9, shall not exceed the values listed in Table 9-1.

K. Vibration limits shall not exceed 0.2-in/sec at any frequency.

L. Motors shall have a minimum of one grounding pad on each motor frame. Motors larger than 75hp shall have a minimum of two brass grounding pads on each motor frame.

M. Bearings: 1. Motors 1/2 through 5 HP shall have permanently lubricated sealed antifriction

ball-bearings with L10 lifetime of 50,000 HRS. 2. Motors larger than 5 HP shall have oil or grease-lubricated antifriction ball-

bearings with L10 lifetime of 50,000 HRS. 3. Anti-friction motor bearings shall be designed to be regreasable and initially

shall be filled with grease suitable for the motor ambient temperature specified. 4. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed and

lubricated, shall be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes shall be used when necessary. Grease supply fittings shall be standard hydraulic type as manufactured by the Alemite Division of the Stewart Warner Corporation.

5. Sealed bearings shall be contact seal (lip) or non-contact labyrinth type.

N. Space Heaters: 1. Space heaters shall be supplied with all 3 phase motors and shall conform to

the following: a. Heaters shall be of the cartridge or flexible wrap around type installed

within the motor enclosure adjacent to core iron. Heaters shall be rated for 120 V, single phase with wattage as required. The heater wattage and


voltage shall be embossed on the motor nameplate. Power leads for heaters shall be brought out at the motor accessory lead junction box.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall install motors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Make a visual and mechanical inspection.

C. Check for physical damage.

D. Compare equipment nameplate information with single line diagram and report any discrepancies.

E. Inspect for proper mounting, grounding, connection, and lubrication.

F. Inspect each motor for the proper installation, rated voltage, phase and speed.

G. Check for proper phase and ground connections, Check to see that multi-voltage motors are connected for the proper voltage.

H. Motor connections shall be ring type compression terminations on the motor leads and secured with bolt, nut and spring washer. Connections shall be rubber insulated, half lap and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 tape.

I. All lugs and connectors shall be copper and shall be crimped type, with standard industry tooling. Lugs and connectors shall match the wire size where used, and shall be clearly identified and color coded on the connector. All connections shall be made for stranded wire and shall be made electrically and mechanically secured. The lugs and connectors shall have a current carrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and meet UL 486 requirements for 75 degrees C. Lugs larger than 4/0 AWG shall be two-hole lugs with NEMA spacing. The lugs shall be of closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor.

3.02 TESTS

A. Test for proper rotation prior to connection to the driven equipment.

B. Test the insulation (megger test) of all new motors, 10HP and above, in accordance with NEMA MG-1. Test voltage shall be 1000 VAC plus twice the rated voltage of the motor.

C. Perform a rotation test to ensure proper shaft direction.

D. Where a motor is inverter fed, the direction of rotation shall be checked by momentary application of voltage to the motor, to confirm that the phase sequence is the same as the incoming power to the inverter.


E. Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full load amperes.

F. Inspect for unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of overheating during initial test run.

G. Monitor motors during startup and commissioning to record operating amps, voltage and operating vibration levels.

H. Submit test report and all recorded field data. Submit copies of the raw data recorded in the field, signed by the person recording the data, and typewritten reports certified by the Contractor. The motors will not be accepted until the reports are submitted and approved.

END OF SECTION

July 2019 26_41_19-1 10925A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Garland/10925A10/Specifications/Primary Clarifiers 1&2/GAI/26_41_19 Electrical Demolition.doc (BidSet)

SECTION 26_41_19

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish, install and test all equipment, wiring and appurtenances as may be required to perform the electrical demolition.

1.02 SCHEDULES

A. Schedule with the Owner/Engineer for required shutdowns to accommodate system demolition and installation of temporary facilities.

1.03 STANDARDS

A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute / National Fire Protection Association

(ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 590 – Temporary Wiring.


A. Verify field existing conditions and measurements Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

B. Demolition shall be based on field observation and existing record documents. Discrepancies shall be reported to the Owner/Engineer before disturbing the existing installation.

C. By beginning demolition, the Contractor accepts the existing conditions and warrants that he will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.

2.02 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

A. If temporary electrical wiring and facilities are required, the Contractor shall provide such wiring and facilities to comply with the NEC.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceilings scheduled for removal.

B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

C. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner/Engineer at least one week in advance, before partially or completely disabling system.

3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit serving them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.

E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment that has been removed.

G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

H. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access to panels as appropriate.

I. Where the demolition or revision of any portion of a raceway or box in the raceway system, in an area, causes the raceway system of the area to no longer comply with the classification or specification requirements of the area, the Contractor shall provide and install such boxes, fittings, etc. as may be necessary to return the raceway system to compliance with Specifications.

J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work.

K. Carry out the work in an orderly and careful manner. Hold noise, dust, and vibration to a minimum and conduct the Work so as to avoid any damage to the surroundings. Remove all items and parts as shown and noted on the Drawings and as otherwise may be required to be removed to carry out the Work.


L. Salvaged Equipment and Materials: 1. The Owner shall have the right to retain any or all electrical and

instrumentation equipment shown or specified to be removed from the site. 2. Prior to starting demolition, the Contractor and Owner/Engineer shall jointly

visit the areas of demolition and the Owner/Engineer will designate those items that are to remain the property of the Owner.

3. Equipment and material designated by the Owner, as remaining the property of the Owner, shall be removed from the structure and hauled to a designated location on the site and stored for the Owner’s use. Store on wood runners raised above the surrounding grade and cover with weather resistant covering and tie securely or store inside Owner furnished storage as directed by the Owner/Engineer.

4. Take necessary precautions in removing Owner designated property to prevent damage during the demolition process. Remove steel structural members by unbolting, cutting welds, or cutting rivet heads and punching shanks through holes. Do not use a cutting torch to separate the Owner’s equipment or material unless approved by the Owner/Engineer.

5. Generally, items to be salvaged, shall be removed in one piece or in a manner that does not impact their reuse. Loose components may be removed separately. Controls and electrical equipment may be removed from the equipment and handled separately. Large units may be handled separately. Salvaged piping shall be taken apart at flanges or fittings and removed in sections.

M. Material removed from the construction site during demolition, and any equipment not otherwise designated to remain the property of the Owner in accordance with the pre-demolition identification process shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be promptly removed from the construction site.

N. The Contractor shall refurbish and replace any existing facility to be left in place which is damaged by the demolition operations at no additional expense to the Owner. The repair of such damage shall leave the parts in a condition at least equal to that found at the start of the Work.

3.03 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 46_05_10

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Basic design and performance requirements for mechanical equipment.




3. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01_75_17 – Commissioning and Process Start-up. b. Section 01_77_00 – Closeout Procedures. c. Section 01_78_23 – Operating and Maintenance Data. d. Section 01_81_01 – Project Design Criteria. e. Section 01_81_02 – Seismic Design Criteria. f. Section 05_05_24 – Mechanical Anchoring And Fastening To Concrete

And Masonry. g. Section 05_12_05 – Structural Steel. h. Section 09_96_01 – High-Performance Coatings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA) Standards: 1. 6001-E08 – Design and Selection of Components for Enclosed Gear Drives.

B. American Bearing Manufactures Association (ABMA) Standards: 1. 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 682 – Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A 48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. A 125 – Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated. 4. A 536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 5. A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 6. B 61 – Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.


7. B 62 – Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

8. B 505 – Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings. 9. B 584 – Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications.

E. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

F. Hydraulic Institute (HI).

G. NSF International (NSF).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Special tools: Tools that have been specifically made for use on unit of equipment for assembly, disassembly, repair, or maintenance.

B. Resonant frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an ever-larger vibration if no dampening exists.

C. Rotational frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as revolutions per minute.

D. Critical frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the installed machine and base.

E. Peak vibration velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the vibrational movement times the square root of 2 inches per second.

F. Rotational speed: Same as rotational frequency.

G. Maximum excitation frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a particular machine.

H. Critical speed: Same as critical frequency.

I. Free field noise level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an idealized situation); sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified otherwise.

J. Operating weight: The weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids normally contained in unit during operation.


A. General: 1. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over

and supersede conflicting provisions as specified in this Section. 2. Provide equipment and parts that are suitable for stresses, which may occur

during fabrication, transportation, erection, and operation. 3. Provide equipment that has not been in service prior to delivery, except as

required by tests.


4. Like parts of duplicate units are to be interchangeable. 5. When 2 or more units of equipment for the same purpose are required, provide

products of same manufacturer. 6. Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of

gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries required for proper operation.

7. When necessary, modify manufacturer's standard product to conform to specified requirements or requirements indicated on the Drawings and contained in Laws and Regulations.

B. Material requirements: 1. Materials: Suitable for superior corrosion resistance and for services under

conditions normally encountered in similar installations. 2. Dissimilar metals: Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material.

C. Power transmission systems: 1. Power transmission equipment: V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains,

sprockets, mechanical variable-speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting, intermediate bearings, and U-joints are to be rated for 24 hour-a-day continuous service or frequent stops-and-starts intermittent service, whichever is most severe, and sized with a minimum service factor of 1.5: a. Apply 1.5 service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime

source of power and not to actual equipment loading. b. Apply service factors higher than 1.5 when recommended for continuous

24 hour per day operation and shock loadings in accordance with AGMA 6001-E08, other applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable referenced standards.

c. When manufacturer recommends service factor greater than 1.5, manufacturer's recommendation takes precedence.

D. Vibration: 1. Resonant frequency:

a. For single speed equipment, ensure there are no natural resonant frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be excited by the equipment design.

b. For variable speed equipment, ensure there are no natural resonant frequencies within 25 percent above or below the range of operating frequencies.

2. Design, balance, and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in Section 23_05_94.

E. Equipment mounting and anchoring: 1. Mount equipment on cast iron or welded steel bases with structural steel

support frames. a. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges between steel

members. b. Grind welds smooth.

2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment of mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits.


3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over 1,000 pounds.

4. Anchorage of equipment to concrete: Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of anchor bolts or other connections.

5. Provide bolt sleeves for anchor bolts for heavy equipment. a. Adjust bolts to final location and fill sleeve with non-shrink grout.

6. Anchorage of equipment to metal supports: Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of bolts used to connect equipment to metal supports.

7. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections for dead load, running loads, loads during commissioning and process start-up, seismic load, and other loads as required for proper operation of equipment.

F. Seismic design: 1. Design equipment anchorage and related details for seismic design criteria as

specified in Section 46_05_10. 2. For equipment with operating weight of 400 pounds or more, provide

calculations for: a. Determine operating weight and centroid of equipment. b. Calculate forces and overturning moments. c. Calculate shear and tension forces in equipment anchorages, supports,

and connections. d. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections based on

calculated shear and tension forces.

G. Equipment units weighing 50 pounds or more: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to allow removal with hoist or other lifting device.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data: 1. For each item of equipment:

a. Design features. b. Load capacities. c. Efficiency ratings. d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and

Grade. e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. f. Catalog data. g. Name plate data. h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and

accessories or options being furnished. 2. Gear reduction units:

a. Engineering information in accordance with applicable AGMA standards. b. Gear mesh frequencies.

B. Shop drawings: 1. Drawings for equipment:

a. Drawings that include outline drawings, cut-away drawings, parts lists, material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements.


2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal, motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U-joints, couplings, drive arrangement, gears, base plate or support dimensions, anchor bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components.

3. Installation instructions including leveling and alignment tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial Installation Testing procedures.

4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer based controls.

5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and pressures.

6. Alarm and shutdown set points for all controls furnished.

C. Calculations: 1. Calculations and other information to substantiate equipment base plates,

supports, bolts, anchor bolts, and other connections meet minimum design strength requirements and seismic design criteria specified in Section 46_05_10.

2. ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 L10 life for bearings calculation methods for drivers, pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other driveline components with bearings.

3. Calculations and other information to substantiate that operating rotational frequencies meet the requirements of this Section.

4. Torsional analysis of power transmission systems: When torsional analysis specified in the equipment sections, provide: a. Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics

including mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness. b. Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of

system components and complete system. 5. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer

registered to practice in the state where the Project is located.

D. Quality control submittals: 1. Source quality control reports and certified test data as specified in

Section 23_05_94. 2. Submit factory test reports before shipment. 3. Certified static and dynamic balancing reports for rotating equipment. 4. Field quality control reports and test data as specified in Section 23_05_94. 5. Submit material test reports a specified in the equipment sections.

E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. As specified in Section 01_78_23. 2. Submit prior to training of Owner's personnel. 3. Make available at project site complete copy of manuals for use by field

personnel and Owner during commissioning and process start-up of equipment.

4. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing; include calculated ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for both the inner and outer raceways.

5. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies.

F. Commissioning and process start-up submittals: As specified in Section 01_75_17.

G. Project closeout documents: As specified in Section 01_77_00.



A. Manufacturer's field service: 1. Furnish services of authorized representative specially trained in installation of

equipment: a. Visit project site and perform tasks necessary to certify installation as

specified in Section 01_75_17.


A. Packing and shipping: 1. Equipment: Pack in boxes, crates, or otherwise protect from damage and

moisture, dust, or dirt during shipment, handling, and storage. 2. Bearings: Separately pack or otherwise suitably protect during transport. 3. Spare parts: Deliver in boxes labeled with contents, equipment to which spare

parts belong, and name of Contractor.

B. Storage: 1. Equipment having bearings:

a. Store in enclosed facilities. b. Rotate units at least once per month or more often as recommended by

the manufacturer to protect rotating elements and bearings. 2. Gear boxes: Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating.

C. Protection: 1. Equipment: Protect equipment from deleterious exposure. 2. Painted surfaces: Protect against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other

damage.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Equipment anchoring: Obtain anchoring material and templates or setting drawings from equipment manufacturers in adequate time for anchors to be cast-in-place when concrete is placed.

B. Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible.

C. Commissioning and process start-up submittals: As specified in Section 01_75_17: 1. Perform general commissioning and process start-up and testing procedures

after operation and maintenance manuals for equipment have been received and accepted.

2. Conduct functional testing of mechanical or electrical systems when each system is substantially complete and after general Installation testing procedures have been successfully completed.

3. Functional testing requirements as specified in Sections 01_75_17, 23_05_94, Division 26 and the equipment sections.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Special tools: 1. When specified, provide special tools required for operation and maintenance.


2. Mark or tag and list such tools in maintenance and operations instructions. Describe use of each tool.

B. Spare belts: 1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type

and size of belt-driven unit: a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets. b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size,

and use. c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents.

C. Spare parts: 1. Assume responsibility until turned over to Owner. 2. Store in enclosed facilities. 3. Furnish itemized list and match identification tag attached to every part. 4. List parts by generic title and identification number. 5. Furnish name, address, and telephone number of supplier and spare parts

warehouse.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work as specified in each applicable equipment section..

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Ferrous materials: 1. Steel for members used in fabrication of assemblies: ASTM A 36. 2. Iron castings: ASTM A 48, tough, close-grained gray iron, free from blowholes,

flaws, and other imperfections. 3. Ductile iron castings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, free from flaws and

imperfections. 4. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 653, minimum 0.0635 inch (16 gauge). 5. Expanded metal: ASTM A 36, 13 gauge, 1/2-inch flat pattern expanded metal.

B. Nonferrous materials: 1. Stainless steel: Type 304 or 316 as specified. Provide L grade where welding

required. 2. Bronze in contact with liquid: Composition of not more than 2 percent

aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C92200 or C93700 in accordance with ASTM B 61, B 62, B 505, or B 584, when not specified otherwise.

C. Dielectric materials for separation of dissimilar metals: 1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings,

nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials.

D. Anchor bolts: As specified in Section 05_05_24; minimum 0.5-inch diameter.


2.02 SHAFT COUPLINGS

A. General: 1. Type and ratings: Provide nonlubricated type, designed for not less than

50,000 hours of operating life. 2. Sizes: Provide as recommended by manufacturer for specific application,

considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service. 3. Use: Use of couplings specified in this Section does not relieve Contractor of

responsibility to provide precision alignment of driver-driven units as required by equipment manufacturer and alignment criteria specified elsewhere in this Section.

B. Shaft couplings – close coupled: Shaft couplings for close coupled electric motor driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to sudden torque reversals or shock loading: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. T.B. Woods, Dura-Flex, L-Jaw C-Jaw or G-Jaw. b. Lovejoy, S-Flex.

2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, and end float.

3. Manufacture flexible component of coupling from synthetic rubber, or urethane.

4. Provide service factor of 2.5 for electric motor drives and 3.5 for engine drives. 5. Do not allow metal-to-metal contact between driver and driven equipment. 6. Examples of loads where sudden torque reversals may be expected:

a. Reciprocating pumps, blowers, and compressors. b. Conveyor belts. c. Reversing equipment.

C. Shaft couplings – direct connected: Shaft couplings for direct connected electric motor driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to normal torque, non-reversing applications: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Rexnord – Falk. b. T.B. Woods, Dura-Flex, Sure-Flex or Form-Flex.

2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration, and shaft misalignment or offset.

3. Provide flexible connecting element of rubber and reinforcement fibers. 4. Connect stub shafts through collars or round flanges, firmly keyed to their

shafts with neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins.

D. Spacer couplings: Where cartridge type mechanical seals or non-split seals are specified, provide a spacer type coupling of sufficient length to remove the seal without disturbing the driver or driven equipment unless noted otherwise in the individual equipment specifications.

E. Specialized couplings: Where requirements of equipment dictate specialized features, supply coupling recommended for service by manufacturer.


2.03 STUFFING BOX, SEAL CHAMBER, AND SHAFT SEALS

A. General: 1. Unless otherwise noted in the equipment section, provide cartridge type,

double mechanical shaft seals for pumps. 2. Provide a stuffing box large enough for a double mechanical seal. 3. Where packing is specified, provide stuffing box large enough to receive a

double mechanical seal. 4. Provide seal or packing flush connections, (3/4-inch size unless another size is

indicated on the Drawings). 5. Provide and route leakage drain line to nearest equipment floor drain indicated

on the Drawings. 6. For pumps with packing, design packing gland to allow adjustment and

repacking without dismantling pump except to open up packing box. 7. Seal or packing flush requirements shall be in accordance with API Standard

682 requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, specified or required by the equipment and seal manufacturers, the following API flushing Plan arrangements shall be utilized as appropriate for the application: a. Single seal, clean water applications: Plan 11 (Discharge bypass to seal). b. Single seal, vertical pump applications: Plan 13 (Seal bypass to suction). c. Single seal, clean hot water (greater than 180 degrees Fahrenheit)

applications: Plan 23 (Seal cooler and pumping ring). d. Single seal, solids, or contaminants containing water applications: Plan 32

(External seal water- see Carollo typical detail # M262). e. Double seal applications: Plan 54 (External seal water- see Carollo typical

detail # M262).

B. Packing: When specified in the equipment section of the specifications, provide the following type of packing: 1. Wastewater, water, and sludge applications:

a. Asbestos free. b. PTFE (Teflon) free. c. Braided graphite. d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Chesterton, 1400. 2) John Crane Inc., equivalent product.

2. Drinking water service: a. Approved by the FDA or NSF. b. Asbestos free. c. Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon). d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Chesterton, 1725. 2) John Crane, Inc., equivalent product.

C. Mechanical seals: Provide seal types specified in the equipment sections and as specified. 1. Provide seal types meeting the following requirements:

a. Balanced hydraulically. b. Spring: Stationary, out of pumping fluid, Hastelloy C; Type Elgiloy or

17-7 PH stainless steel for split seals. c. O-ring: Viton 747. d. Gland: Type 316L stainless steel.


e. Set screws: Type 316L stainless steel. f. Faces: Reaction bonded, Silicon Carbide. g. Seal designed to withstand 300 pounds per square inch gauge minimum

differential pressures in either direction; no requirement for seal buffer pressure to be maintained when pump is not operational even though process suction head may be present in pump.

2. Cartridge type single mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, S10. b. John Crane, 5610 Series.

3. Cartridge type double mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, S20. b. John Crane, 5620 Series.

4. Split face single mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, 442. b. John Crane, 3740.

5. Cartridge type flushless mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, 156. b. John Crane, 5870.

2.04 GEAR REDUCTION UNITS

A. Type: Helical or herringbone, unless otherwise specified.

B. Design: 1. Made of alloys treated for hardness and for severe service. 2. AGMA Class II service:

a. Use more severe service condition when such is recommended by unit's manufacturer.

3. Cast iron housing with gears running in oil. 4. Anti-friction bearings. 5. Thermal horsepower rating based on maximum horsepower rating of prime

mover not actual load. 6. Manufactured in accordance with applicable AGMA standards.

C. Planetary gear units are not to be used.

2.05 BELT DRIVES

A. Sheaves: 1. Separately mounted on bushings by means of at least 3 pull-up bolts or cap

tightening screws. 2. When 2 sheave sizes are specified, provide separate belts sized for each set

of sheaves. 3. Statically balanced for all; dynamically balanced for sheaves that operates at

peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute. 4. Key bushings to drive shaft.

B. Belts: Anti-static type when explosion-proof equipment or environment is specified.


C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Dodge, Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Taper-Lock

bushings. 2. T.B. Wood's, Ultra-V belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Sure-Grip

bushings.

2.06 BEARINGS

A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard manufacture.

B. Oil lubricated bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil reservoir splash type system: 1. Size oil lubrication systems to safely absorb heat energy generated in bearings

when equipment is operating under normal conditions and with the temperature 15 degree Fahrenheit above the maximum design temperature as specified in Section 01_81_01.

2. Provide an external oil cooler when required to satisfy the specified operating conditions. a. Provide air cooled system if a water-cooling source is not indicated on the

Drawings. b. Equip oil cooler with a filler pipe and external level gauge.

C. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed: Fit with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings. 1. Lubrication lines and fittings:

a. Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel tubing. b. Multiple fitting assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible

location. c. Use standard hydraulic type grease supply fittings:

1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Alenite. b) Zerk.

D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 L10 life for bearings rating life of not less than 50,000 hours: 1. Higher ratings, when specified in other Sections, supersede preceding

requirement.

2.07 SAFETY GUARDS

A. Drive assemblies: Enclose sprockets, belts, drive chains, gearings, couplings, and other moving parts on drive assemblies in safety enclosures that are in compliance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

B. Shafts: Provide guards that protect personnel from rotating shafts or components within 7.5 feet of floors or operating platforms.

C. Hot surfaces: Insulate all surfaces with normal operating temperatures above 120 degrees Fahrenheit when surface is within 7.5 feet height from any operating floor or level; insulation thickness such that temperature is below 120 degrees Fahrenheit; cover insulation with moisture-proof protective jacket. Submit to Owner for approval.


D. Guard requirements: 1. Allow visual inspection of moving parts without removal. 2. Allow access to lubrication fittings. 3. Prevent entrance of rain or dripping water for outdoor locations. 4. Size belt and sheave guards to allow for installation of sheaves 15 percent

larger and addition of 1 belt.

E. Materials: 1. Sheet metal: Carbon steel, 12 gauge minimum thickness, hot-dip galvanized

after fabrication. 2. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel.

2.08 SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Design requirements: 1. Telescopic top and bottom housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and

vertical forces. 2. Use steel coil springs. 3. Design vibration isolators in accordance with seismic design criteria as

specified in Section 46_05_10.

B. Performance requirements: Minimum spring deflection of 1 inch under static load and capable of limiting transmissability to 10 percent maximum at design operating load.

C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD. 2. Mason Industries, equivalent product.

D. Materials: 1. Fabricate isolators using welded steel or shatterproof ductile iron in

accordance with ASTM A 536 Grade CS-45-12. 2. Spring steel: ASTM A 125.

2.09 WARNING SIGNS

A. Provide for equipment that starts automatically or remotely.

B. Material and size: Match existing.

C. Colors: Match existing.

D. Text: Match existing.

2.10 CHEMICAL DIFFUSERS

A. Not used.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Structural steel members: As specified in Section 05_12_05.

B. Nameplates:


1. Engraved or stamped on Type 304 stainless steel and fastened to equipment at factory in an accessible and visible location.

2. Indicate following information as applicable: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Equipment model number and serial number. c. Maximum and Normal rotating speed. d. Horsepower. e. Rated capacity. f. Service class per applicable standards.

3. Nameplates for pumps: Include: a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid. b. Rated flow in gallons per minute. c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size.

4. Gear reduction units: Include: a. AGMA Class of service. b. Service factor. c. Input and output speeds.

C. Bolt holes in equipment support frames: 1. Do not exceed bolt diameter by more than 25 percent, up to limiting maximum

diameter oversize of 1/4 inch.

D. Shop finishing: 1. Provide factory and field coating as specified in Section 09_96_01. If not

specified in Section 09_96_01, provide coating as follows: a. Bases and support frames in contact with concrete or other material: Coat

contacting surfaces with minimum of 2 coats of zinc chromate primer before installation or grouting.

b. Shop primer for steel and iron surfaces, unless specified otherwise: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) Ameron, Amercoat 185 Universal Primer. b) Cook, 391-N-167 Barrier Coat. c) Kop-Coat, Pug Primer. d) Tnemec, 37-77 Chem-Prime. e) Valspar, 13-R-28 Chromox Primer.

c. Coat machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted with rust-preventive compounds: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) Houghton, Rust Veto 344. b) Rust-Oleum, R-9.

d. Coating for ferrous metal surfaces, except stainless steel: High solids polyamine epoxy.

e. Finish painting of motors: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's standard coating, unless otherwise specified in Section 09_96_01.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. As specified in Section 23_05_94 for testing requirements and the individual equipment sections of the Specifications.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all components for shipping damage, conformance to specifications, and proper torques and tightness of fasteners.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Metal work embedded in concrete: 1. Accurately place and hold in correct position while concrete is being placed. 2. Clean surface of metal in contact with concrete immediately before concrete is

placed.

B. Concrete surfaces designated to receive non-shrink grout: 1. Heavy sandblast concrete surface in contact with non-shrink grout. 2. Clean concrete surfaces of sandblasting sand, grease, oil, dirt, and other

foreign material that may reduce bond to non-shrink grout. 3. Saturate concrete with water. Concrete shall be saturated surface damp at

time non-shrink grout is placed.

C. Field measurements: 1. Prior to fabrication of equipment, take measurements for installation of

equipment and verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 2. Ensure equipment and ancillary appurtenances fit within available space.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

B. Lubrication lines and fittings: 1. Lines from fittings to point of use: Support and protect. 2. Fittings:

a. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards.

b. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and protected from damage.

c. Fittings for underwater bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and mount on edge of structure above.

C. Alignment of drivers and equipment: 1. Where drive motors or other drivers are connected to driven equipment by

flexible coupling, disconnect coupling halves and align driver and equipment after complete unit has been leveled on its foundation.

2. Comply with procedures of appropriate HI, AGMA Standards, alignment tolerances of equipment manufacturers and the following requirements to bring components into angular and parallel alignment: a. Maximum total coupling offset (not the per plane offset): Not to exceed

0.5 mils per inch of coupling length for spacer couplings based on coupling length (not dial separation).


b. Utilize jacking screws, wedges, or shims as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as specified in the equipment sections.

3. Use reverse-indicator arrangement dial type or laser type alignment indicators: Mount indicators on the driver/coupling flange and equipment/coupling flange. Alignment instrumentation accuracy shall be sufficient to read angular and radial misalignment at 10 percent or less of the manufacturer's recommended acceptable misalignment.

4. Alignment and calculations shall include measurement and allowance for thermal growth, spacer coupling length, indicator separation, and axial spacing tolerances of the coupling.

5. When alignment satisfies most stringent tolerance of system components, grout between base and foundation. a. Allow minimum 48 hours for grout to harden. b. After grout hardens, remove jacking screws, tighten anchor bolts and

other connections, and recheck alignment. c. Correct alignment as required.

6. After operational testing is complete, dowel motor or drivers and driven equipment. a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Grouting equipment bases and baseplates with non-shrink grout: 1. Grout with non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03_60_01. 2. Comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions for grouting

spaces, and tolerances for level and alignments, both vertical and horizontal. 3. Grout after piping connections are complete and in alignment with no strain

transmitted to equipment. 4. Grout base when equipment is leveled and in alignment. 5. Place grout, filling voids under equipment bases and other supports including

recesses between anchor bolts and sleeves: a. Extend grout to edge of equipment bases or baseplates and bevel at

45 degrees around units. b. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching

initial set. 1) Provide a 45-degree angle cut back.

c. Finish surfaces with slope that prevents ponding water within grouted areas.

E. Special techniques: Use applicable special tools and equipment, including precision machinist levels, dial indicators, and gauges as required in equipment installations.

F. Tolerances: 1. Completed equipment installations: Comply with requirements for intended use

and specified vibration and noise tolerances.

G. Warning signs: Mount securely with stainless fasteners at equipment that can be started automatically or from remote locations.


A. Test equipment as specified in Section 23_05_94 and the individual equipment section of the Specifications.


3.05 COMMISSIONING AND PROCESS START-UP

A. Perform commissioning and process start-up: As specified in Section 01_75_17.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 46_43_20

CIRCULAR PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Sludge collector equipment for installation in circular primary clarifiers of center

feed, peripheral overflow design.

B. As specified in Section 23_05_94 – Mechanical Equipment Testing.

C. Tag number: 1. Circular Primary Clarifier 1 Unit No. PC-2001. 2. Circular Primary Clarifier 2 Unit No. PC-2002.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA): 1. 908 - Information Sheet - Geometry Factors for Determining the Pitting

Resistance and Bending Strength of Spur, Helical, and Herringbone Gear Teeth.

2. 915-1 - Inspection Practices - Part 1: Cylindrical Gears - Tangential Measurements.

3. 915-2 - Inspection Practices - Part 2: Cylindrical Gears - Radial Measurements.

4. 2001 - Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth.

5. 2004 - Gear Materials, Heat Treatment and Processing Manual. 6. 2009 - Bevel Gear Classification, Tolerances and Measuring Methods. 7. 2011 - Cylindrical Wormgearing Tolerance and Inspection Methods. 8. 2015-1 - Accuracy Classification System - Tangential Measurements for

Cylindrical Gears. 9. 2015-2 - Accuracy Classification System - Radial Measurements for Cylindrical

Gears. 10. 6013 - Standard for Industrial Enclosed Gear Drives. 11. 6022 - Design Manual for Cylindrical Wormgearing. 12. 6034 - Practice for Enclosed Cylindrical Wormgear Speed Reducers and

Gearmotors. 13. 9005 - Industrial Gear Lubrication.

C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):


1. B29.1M - Precision Power Transmission Roller Chains, Attachments, and Sprockets.

E. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code for Steel. 2. D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.

F. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A36 - Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. A148 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural

Purposes. 4. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 5. A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 6. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

G. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. 53 - Cylindrical Gears for General and Heavy Engineering - Standard Basic

Rack Tooth Profile.

H. NACE International (NACE).

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

J. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SP 1 -Solvent Cleaning. 2. SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. 3. SP 10 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Continuous operation: 24 hour-per-day operation for design life of not less than 20 years which equals 175,200 hours.

B. Continuous running torque: 1. The 100 percent AGMA torque, assumed to be continuously applied, 24 hours

a day, to the drive system. 2. Bearing life, gear strength, gear durability, gear rating, mechanism structural

design, and alarm and shutdown setpoints are specified as a percentage of the continuous running torque.

C. Fabricator: 1. Firm responsible for the fabrication of sludge collection equipment conforming

to the manufacturer’s design.

D. Intermittent operation: Periodic operation, including starts and stops, and prolonged periods of resting.

E. Manufacturer: 1. Firm responsible for the design, operation, delivery, installation certification,

and warranty of sludge collection equipment.


2. Manufacturer shall also provide sludge collector drive mechanism.

Momentary peak torque: 3. The maximum torque for rating yield strength or ultimate strength of center

drive mechanism components. 4. The numerical value for momentary peak torque shall be 2.0 times continuous

running torque.

F. NEMA: 1. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.

G. Set: Equipment necessary to completely furnish 1 clarifier.

H. Subassemblies: Includes, but may not be limited to, complete center column, drive cage, drive assembly, truss arms, and scum skimming system: 1. Manufacturer may also be the fabricator if fabrication of all components is self-

performed.


A. Equipment will replace the existing primary clarifier mechanisms at Primary Clarifiers No. 1 and 2. Equipment will be installed with the existing anchors and odor control covers and ducts.

B. Contractor is responsible for field verifying all existing dimensions, elevations, diameters, sizes, etc. Nominal clarifier dimensions: 1. Diameter: 110 feet. 2. Side water depth: 14 feet. 3. Height of wall: 21 feet and 11 inches. 4. Bottom slope: 12 to 1

C. Sludge collector mechanism: 1. Supply as a complete and operational system by a single manufacturer. 2. Equipment to include, but not be limited to, the following components:

a. Walkways and access bridges with guardrail and grating. b. Center column. c. Influent well. d. Center drive cage. e. Sludge collector truss arms with segmented plow-type scrapers. f. Scum skimming system. g. Center drive mechanism. h. Drive motor. i. Electrical local control panels. j. Overload devices and alarms. k. Alarms. l. Other components necessary to provide a complete system.


3. Process conditions:

Parameter (per clarifier) Minimum Average Maximum

Month Peak

Influent Flow, million gallons per day

6 8 5.33 15

Primary Sludge Underflow, gallons per minute

95 125 75 250

a. Maximum allowable headloss through the center column and influent well at peak flow equals 7.5 inches.

4. Process description: a. The sludge collector mechanisms include a central driving mechanism

mounted on a center support pier which supports and rotates a center cage with 2 truss arms and 2 surface skimmers.

b. Sludge accumulated in the clarifier is scraped to a center well for continuous removal.

c. Scum from the surface of the clarifier is collected and deposited into a scum collection hopper using skimming arms with articulated blades.

D. Mechanical design: 1. Use no chains, sprockets, bearings, or gears below the water surface. 2. Design for a continuous running torque of 30,250 foot pounds. 3. Design collector mechanism to operate at a tip speed, measured at the ends

of the truss arms, of approximately 10 feet per minute. 4. Provide and install new weir plates per M216/TYP and new scum baffles per

M210/TYP.

E. Structural design: 1. The overall mechanism weight and load supported by the center column shall

not exceed the existing equipment weight. 2. Design the sludge collector mechanism in accordance with AISC 360 except:

a. Provide a 3/16-inch minimum thickness for all members, except where specifically modified for specified equipment components.

b. Include stresses in members caused by bending and twisting due to eccentricities in members.

3. Slenderness ratio (KL/R) using K value of 1.0 shall not exceed the values specified below: a. Tension members not greater than 240. b. Compression members not greater than 200.

4. Base member weights used for design on final full member thickness. 5. Full member thickness may be used for performing deflection calculations. 6. Design the center cage and the truss arms as an integral structure. Design the

center cage and the connections to the truss arms for the reactions from the truss arms.

7. Do not include live load where its inclusion results in lower stresses in a member under investigation.

8. Seismic loads: Seismic loads in accordance with the building code as specified in Section 01_41_00 - Regulatory Requirements where load and resistance factor design (strength design) is used. a. Hydrodynamic loads:


1) The influent well, center coluimn, and all other elements shall be designed for hydrodynamic loads applied to both the inside and outside surfaces.

2) Hydrodynamic loads as determined using the seismic criteria specified in Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria.

b. Hydrodynamic loads for allowable stress design (alternate design method) shall be equal to the load and resistance factor design loads divided by 1.4.

c. Seismic loads due to weight of mechanism; as determined using the seismic criteria specified in Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria. Include the water inside the center column as part of the weight of the center column.

9. Load combinations: Design each structural member of the sludge collector mechanism shall for the most critical load combination resulting from the following load combinations: a. Dead load plus live load plus continuous running torque. b. Dead load plus live load plus continuous running torque plus seismic load:

1) Seismic load shall include seismic load from the water inside the clarifier acting on members of the clarifier mechanism.

2) For elements of the clarifier such as the center column and the influent well, impulsive and convective seismic loads from the water shall be applied appropriately on both the inside and outside surfaces.

3) These seismic loads shall be in addition to the seismic loads due to the dead loads of the elements.

c. Dead load plus live load plus torque due to screening grout topping on slab using sludge collector mechanism.

d. Dead load plus live load plus torque due to cutout torque test. e. Other load combinations selected by the manufacturer. f. Truss arm load cases: Use the following load cases on the truss arms for

load combinations: 1) Equal uniform horizontal load along the full length of both truss arms

which results in a combined torque equal to the continuous running torque.

2) Uniform horizontal loads along the full length of both truss arms which results in 70 percent of the torque from 1 truss arm and 30 percent of the torque from the other truss arm for a combined torque equal to the continuous running torque.

3) Load on truss arms due to spreading grout topping on slab using sludge collector mechanism.

4) Load on truss arms due to cutout torque load test. 10. Deflections:

a. The horizontal deflection of the truss arm, due to truss deflection plus rotational deflection of the center cage for load cases which contain continuous running torque, shall not exceed a deflection equal to the radius of the clarifier divided by 400 (L/400): 1) Not more than 60 percent of the total allowable horizontal deflection

shall be due to center cage rotation (L/500). 2) Horizontal deflection of the truss arm shall be measured at the end of

the sludge collection header furthest from the center column. b. The vertical deflection of the truss arm due to equipment dead load shall

not exceed the length divided by 800 (L/800).


11. Seismic design criteria: As specified in Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01_33_00 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Record of field verified dimensions.

C. Product data: As specified in Section 23_05_94 - Mechanical Equipment Testing: 1. Certified motor data sheets. 2. Shop primer and coating data. 3. Control system data, schematics, and wiring diagrams. 4. Spare parts lists.

D. Shop drawings: As specified in Section 23_05_94 - Mechanical Equipment Testing: 1. Detailed drawings:

a. Sludge collector mechanism indicating dimensions, member sizes and thicknesses, welding, and connection details.

b. Drive mechanism showing sizes, dimensions, and arrangement of each drive component.

c. For gears, except those contained in the gearmotor speed reducer, detailed drawings with the following minimum data for each gear: 1) Number of teeth. 2) Net face width. 3) Outside diameter of external gears. 4) Inside diameter of internal gears. 5) Normal diameter pitch or axial pitch for worms. 6) Normal generating pressure angle. 7) Lead angle (for worms). 8) Operating center distance. 9) Addendum modification coefficient. 10) Tooth thickness or pin or span measurements. 11) Quality numbers in accordance with AGMA 915-1, 915-2, 2009,

2011, 2015-1, and 2015-2. 12) Material alloy. 13) Type of heat treatment. 14) Tooth surface hardness. 15) Tooth core hardness. 16) For case hardened gears, effective case depth to Rc 50. 17) Lubricant type (mineral/synthetic/EP). 18) Lubricant viscosity.

E. Calculations: As specified in Section 23_05_94 - Mechanical Equipment Testing: 1. Substantiate continuous running torque rating and overload torque loading of

each component of drive mechanism: a. Calculations shall be in accordance with AGMA 908. b. Calculations shall clearly specify all design parameters used in developing

the ratings, including materials in accordance with AGMA 2004. c. All ratings shall be in strict conformance with the latest revisions of AGMA

6034 and AGMA 2011.


2. Demonstrate that each bearing in drive mechanism complies with life requirements of this Section.

3. Demonstrate that headloss through the equipment is below the maximum allowable.

4. Calculations demonstrating compliance with the structural design criteria as specified in paragraph 1.04.D and Section 01_81_02 - Seismic Design Criteria signed and sealed by a Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Texas.

F. Field test: 1. Submit method of conducting cutout torque test and verification that method of

testing will not impose stresses in any member which exceeds maximum allowable stresses specified in this Section.

G. Provide draft vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data.

H. Commissioning submittals: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance

as specified in Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning.

I. Project closeout documents: 1. Provide final vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in

Section 01_78_23 - Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Environmental project conditions: 1. As specified in Section 01_81_01 - Project Design Criteria. 2. Installation in a wastewater treatment plant. 3. Moderate quantities of commercial and industrial waste. 4. Exposure to industrial solvents and petroleum products. 5. Wastewater temperature:

a. Maximum 95 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Minimum 60 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The Primary Clarifier Equipment Manufacturer shall warrant all equipment supplied to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from Substantial Completion. Warranty shall cover all labor and material necessary for repairs for all system components and controls furnished by the Primary Clarifier Equipment Manufacturer.

B. The Contractor shall guarantee all Work for a period of two years from Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall furnish at his sole expense, all labor, material, and equipment necessary to correct any defect in material, equipment, installation, and/or workmanship which becomes evident within two year of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sludge collector mechanism: 1. All equipment components of the sludge collector mechanism including the

walkways and access bridges, center column, influent well, center drive cage, sludge collector truss arms, scum skimming system, segmented scraper blades, center drive mechanism, drive motor, electrical local control panel, and overload devices and alarms, shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.

2. The starter for the clarifier drive will be installed in the electrical room motor control center as specified in Division 26.

3. Equipment may require modification from the manufacturer's standard. 4. Exercise care to ensure that the electrical, mechanical, structural, and

miscellaneous systems comply with the requirements specified or in other referenced sections.

5. Manufacturers: One of the following: a. Walker-Process Equipment b. Ovivo USA. c. Westech, Inc. d. Envirodyne Systems, Inc.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. For all components, unless otherwise specified, use the materials of construction specified below.

B. Structural steel: 1. ASTM A276, Type 316L stainless steel.

C. Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316: 1. Components or structural shapes which are welded:

a. Materials: Type 316L stainless steel. b. Manufacturer's shop welds, welding procedures, and welders:

1) Qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.6.

D. Anchor bolts: Type 316 stainless steel.

E. Weir plate: Fiberglass reinforced plastic as specified in Section 06_80_17 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Fabrications.

F. Scum baffles: Fiberglass reinforced plastic as specified in Section 06_80_17 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Fabrications.

G. Fasteners and washers: Type 316 stainless steel, except for bolts which will be removed during installation and any high strength bolts.

H. High strength bolts: Use Type 316 stainless steel high strength bolts in attaching truss arms to cage, and cage to center drive gear casting.

I. Fasteners and washers: Type 316 stainless steel. Do not use cadmium plated parts and fasteners.


J. Dissimilar metals: All dissimilar components shall be isolated as specified in Section 05_50_00 - Metal Fabrications to prevent electrolysis.

2.03 SLUDGE COLLECTOR MECHANISM

A. Walkways and access bridges: 1. Materials:

a. A36 Welded steel truss construction. 2. Design:

a. Composed of 2 main members laterally braced together. b. Minimum live load of 100 pounds per square foot. c. Maximum deflection not to exceed span length divided by 360 (L/360) for

dead plus live loads. d. Provide new LED light fixtures as indicated in DIVISION 26. Match the

number and location of the existing access bridge light fixtures. e. Supported using:

1) Center column at one end and the outer concrete clarifier wall at the other.

2) Make allowance at outer concrete wall for expansion and contraction of walkway due to temperature changes: a) Use self-lubricating bearings. b) Do not use non-lubricated metal-to-metal slide plates or direct

metal-to-concrete bearing. c) Prevent lateral movement of bridge at outer wall.

f. Provide additional structural support as required to support scum spray and other piping on the bridge.

g. Walkway width = 4 feet. 3. Platform at the center turntable: Provide a minimum clearance of 2 feet

6 inches around all sides of drive mechanism and provide uninhibited access to all parts of the drive unit.

4. Guardrail with kickplate: a. On both sides of walkway and all around center turntable platform. b. Provide aluminum guardrail and kickplate as specified in Section

05_50_00 - Metal Fabrications and matching other railing supplied for Project.

5. Walking surface: a. Materials: Aluminum grating as specified in Section 05_50_00 - Metal

Fabrications. b. Location: Over entire bridge and center turntable platform.

B. Center column: 1. Materials:

a. Vertically mounted cylindrical Type 316L stainless steel center column. 1) Inside diameter: 48 inches. 2) Wall thickness: 1/4-inch minimum.

2. Design: a. Support the entire sludge collector mechanism including inboard end of

bridge. The load shall not exceed the load on the existing mechanism. b. Size and anchor the entire assembly to be capable of resisting overturning

moments when tank is empty or full. Contractor is responsible for coordinating existing anchor bolt locations with Supplier.


3. Center column anchorage: Mount center column over influent port at center of clarifier. Connect the base flange of the center column to the concrete foundation using anchor bolts: a. Use a rigid steel template of minimum 1/4-inch thickness to accurately

locate anchor bolts for the center column. b. Supplier shall coordinate with the Contractor to ensure proper anchor bolt

location. c. Center column base anchor bolts:

1) Anchor bolt size and location shall be coordinated with the existing anchor bolt locations. Submit calculations per Section 23_05_94 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.

2) Minimum edge distance for anchor bolts shall be the larger of 6 inches or 6 anchor bolt diameters, and as required to clear reinforcing bars located around opening.

d. Center column base mounting flange: 1) Size and reinforce using gussets or other stiffeners as necessary to

adequately transfer loads from the sludge collector mechanism to clarifier structure.

2) Bolt holes in flange to accommodate anchor bolts shall not exceed 1/8-inch plus bolt diameter.

4. Center column outlet ports: Provide outlet ports to disperse influent flow into the feedwell, including the following: a. Total of 6 ports. b. An open area of each port not less than 450 square inches. c. Each port shall be a minimum of 14 inches wide. d. Appropriately reinforced port openings. e. Top of opening shall be 3 inches below weir crest elevation.

5. Flange and stiffen the top of the center column for supporting the sludge collector mechanism, the drive mechanism, and the access bridge: a. Attach the center column to the drive assembly using bolts. b. Attach center column to drive assembly using bolts.

6. Drain holes: Provide two 2-inch holes at bottom to allow column to drain within the tank.

7. Provide Type 316 stainless steel vent tube from center column above water level to above the cover.

C. Influent well: 1. Materials:

a. 3/16-inch minimum thickness stainless steel plate. b. Reinforced with steel stiffening angles where necessary.

2. Design: a. Supported around the outside of the center drive cage using rigid

connection. Other methods of connection such as swinging or breakaway supports are not permitted.

b. Reduce influent flow energy in a contained area and prevent short-circuiting of flow.

c. Diameter: 30 feet. d. Equip with a minimum of 12 baffled slots to allow for removal of floating

material in the well. e. An open area of slot not less than 75 square inches. f. Each port shall be a minimum of 12 inches wide.


D. Center drive cage: 1. Materials: Structural steel members, Type 316L stainless steel. 2. Design:

a. Box truss design. b. Design to carry load from the truss arms plus its own dead load. c. Fasten center drive cage to spur gear assembly using bolted connection. d. Center drive cage shall support and rotate the truss arm assemblies with

the attached continuous spiral blade scrapers and surface skimming arms.

E. Sludge collector truss arms: 1. Materials: Structural steel, Type 316L stainless steel. 2. Design:

a. Truss design. Tie rods not permitted. b. Design with sufficient structural strength to sweep in a layer of grout on

the clarifier bottom under its own power. c. Ensure alignment and proper connection. d. Connect truss arms to center drive cage. e. Conform truss arms to slope of tank floor. f. Use the truss arm to support the continuous spiral scraper blades and

scum skimmer arms.

F. Tapered spiral scraper blades: 1. General:

a. Manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the design of the spiral scraper blades.

b. Provide blades to transport sludge away from center column to withdrawal point. 1) 7" minimum blade depth from perimeter. 2) 21" minimum blade depth from center column.

2. Blades: a. Materials: Structural steel, Type 316L stainless steel. b. Thickness and stiffeners as required to limit blade deflection.

1) Taper blades as required to match floor slope. c. Sized and spaced so entire circular portion of tank is scraped twice for

each revolution of the mechanism. 3. Squeegees:

a. Materials: Type 316L stainless steel, spring type, not less than 26 gauge thickness.

b. Projecting approximately 2 inches below the bottom of the segmented scraper blades.

c. Attach squeegees to blades utilizing stainless steel hardware. Squeegees shall be designed to allow 2 inches of vertical adjustment.

G. Scum skimming system: Consisting of a scum skimmer assembly that pushes floating scum to a scum trough for removal. Basic components of skimmer assembly include scum deflector blades and skimmer device. 1. Scum deflector blades:

a. Material: Structural steel plate, Type 316L stainless steel. b. Designed to collect and push floating scum radially outward toward the

circumferential scum baffle. c. Extends from the flocculating well to the scum skimmer device.


d. Attached to the rotating collector mechanism at the flocculating well, supported with skimmer assembly supports from the sludge collector truss arms.

e. Attach inner end of deflector blade tangentially to the flocculating well where practicable. Otherwise, provide maximum angle of approach of scum deflector blade to the scum in order to drift the scum to circumferential baffle.

2. Scum skimmer device: a. Materials: Structural steel plate and members, Type 316L stainless steel. b. Attach to outer end of the scum deflector blade to trap scum for discharge

into scum trough. c. Size: Full length of the scum trough. d. Design:

1) Maintain continuous contact and proper alignment with scum baffle and inclined scum ramp to positively rake scum to the scum trough.

2) Use a hinged blade to move entrapped scum up the scum beach to the scum trough.

3) Provide a replaceable wear block on the outer edge of each scum skimmer device.

e. Hinged blade: 1) Adjustable vertically to control the dewatering of scum as it travels up

the inclined ramp to the scum trough. 2) Adjustable vertically over the length to ensure contact with the scum

trough even though the trough may not be level. 3) Capable of being raised and locked out above the water level or held

horizontally against the circumferential scum baffle when skimming is not required.

4) Equipped with replaceable scum skimmer wipers on the bottom inner and outer edges to seal the entrapped scum and water when moving up the inclined approach ramp to the scum trough.

f. Scum skimmer wipers: Oil resistant neoprene. g. Wear block:

1) Material: Polyvinyl chloride. 2) Wear block constantly forced against circumferential scum baffle to

keep baffle clean using a coiled spring arrangement. 3) Force between baffle and wear block adjustable between 1 to

5 pounds. h. Wear block coiled springs:

1) Material: Type 18-8 stainless steel. 2) Enclosed to protect them from the weather. 3) Spring enclosures:

a) Material: Welded steel or cast iron housing. b) Bronze bushed and grease lubricated for easy movement of

hinged blades. 3. Scum trough and scum beach:

a. Fabricated from 3/16-inch minimum thickness stainless steel plate. b. Supported from clarifier wall by structural steel members. c. Scum trough and beach dimensions shall be equal to or greater than what

is existing. d. Scum trough:

1) No internal stiffeners or structural members which obstruct scum flow.


2) Standard pipe flanged connection for scum discharge pipe. Match existing diameter.

3) Replace scum piping on the interior of the clarifier with Type 316 stainless steel pipe. If connecting to a dissimilar metal, provide fittings with insulated gaskets and hardware especially designed for the prevention of dielectric or galvanic corrosion.

4) Scum trough width = 4-ft. e. Scum beach (inclined approach ramp):

1) Shaped to contain scum as it is moved up the incline to the trough by the scum skimmer.

4. Skimmer assembly supports: a. Material: Structural Type 316L stainless steel members. b. Attached to the sludge collector truss arms. Do not support scum skimmer

assembly from the scum baffle. c. Space supports, brought up from the truss arm, at not greater than 10 feet

apart. 5. Equipment manufacturer shall size and locate counterweights to be installed

by the Contractor. 6. Threaded fasteners: Type 18-8 stainless steel.

H. Center drive mechanism: Provide a center drive mechanism consisting of a primary speed reducer driven by electric motor, through a roller chain using an intermediate gearset consisting of a cylindrical-worm and helical-wormgear, and a low speed gearset consisting of a spur pinion and internal spur gear supported within a cast iron housing by a circular main bearing featuring replaceable bearing race inserts. Center drive mechanisms utilizing housings and internal spur gears featuring integral gothic arch style bearing races are not acceptable: 1. Gear motor speed reducer:

a. Type: Cylindrical-worm or helical-wormgear motor. Planetary gear units will not be acceptable.

b. Speed reducer in accordance with AGMA 6013 and 6034. c. Service factors: Minimum speed reducer service factor of 2.0 minimum

based on continuous running torque. d. Connect speed reducer output shaft to drive sprocket of chain drive. e. Speed reducer overhung load rating:

1) Exceed the chain pull (based on continuous running torque) by 1.50 minimum.

f. Oil bath lubrication: 1) Lubricant in accordance with AGMA 9005. 2) Provide oil fill, drain, and oil level indicator devices. 3) Oil bath protection seal: Felt.

g. All gears supported by anti-friction bearings. 2. Intermediate gearset:

a. Type: Cylindrical-worm and wormgear. b. Materials:

1) Worm: Alloy steel, hardened, ground, and polished. 2) Wormgear: Centrifugally cast bronze. 3) Washers: Hardened steel to prevent embedding of bolt head or nut. 4) Bushings: Bronze. 5) Housing: Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A48, Class 30

minimum. c. Load capacity: Rated in accordance with AGMA 6034.


d. Service factor: Minimum of 1.25 based on continuous running torque. e. Wormgear shaft:

1) Drives pinion of low-speed gearset. 2) Support shaft by anti-friction bearings or combination of anti-friction

bearings and bushing. f. Wormgear: In accordance with AGMA 6022. g. Worm shaft: Support by anti-friction bearings. If the wormgear is bolted to

a drive hub, it shall be piloted for concentricity. h. Worm and wormgear shaft: Anti-friction bearings shall have ABMA 9,

L-10 life of 180,000 hours minimum based upon continuous running torque.

i. Provide oil bath lubrication. 1) Lubricant in accordance with AGMA 9005. 2) Provide oil fill, drain, and oil level indicator devices.

3. Low-speed gearset: a. Provide low-speed gearset using spur pinion and internal spur gear. b. Spur pinion shall be:

1) Integral with its shaft or keyed to a shaft: a) If keys are used, the pinion shall be secured to the shaft with a

shrink fit. b) Set screws will not be acceptable.

2) Welded spur pinion and shafts will not be acceptable. 3) Keyed spur pinions shall have a wall thickness above the keyway

equal to 1 tooth whole depth minimum: a) Keyway and keyseat shall have 0.02-inch minimum inside radii. b) Keys shall have 0.04-inch minimum chamfer on all edges.

4) Manufactured to have a minimum AGMA Quality Class 8 in accordance with AGMA 915-1, 915-2, 2015-1, and 2015-2.

c. Provide full depth teeth in accordance with ISO 53: 1) Stub pitch gear teeth will not be accepted. 2) Undercut gear teeth will not be accepted.

d. Load capacity rated according to AGMA 2001. e. Power rating based on continuous service and the lower of the:

1) Pitting resistance for the pinion and gear. 2) Bending strength for the pinion and gear.

f. Minimum service factor of 1.25 based on continuous running torque. g. Overload torque capacity (based on yielding of the pinion or gear teeth)

exceeding the momentary peak torque by 1.8 minimum. h. Internal spur gear:

1) Material: Ductile (nodular) iron in accordance with ASTM A536 or cast steel in accordance with ASTM A148, or heat-treated alloy steel.

2) Minimum AGMA Quality Class 6 in accordance with AGMA 915-1, 915-2, 2015-1, and 2015-2.

3) Internal spur gear bolted to the center drive cage. i. Turntable base:

1) Material: a) Ductile (nodular) iron in accordance with ASTM A536 or cast

iron in accordance with ASTM A48, Class 40 minimum. b) Fabricated steel bases will not be accepted.

2) Bolted to the center column to provide support for the internal spur gear, entire rotating collector mechanism, and one end of the access bridge.


j. Raceways, ball bearings, and oil bath: 1) Raceways and ball bearings:

a) Raceways: Heat-treated alloy steel. b) Ball bearings: Heat-treated alloy steel.

2) Provide replaceable annular raceways to support vertical and horizontal forces transmitted by ball bearings on turntable base and internal spur gear: a) Raceway 40 inches minimum in diameter. b) Size the raceways using the following equation:

31

2*466,59

DN

Pq

Where: q = Contact stress, pounds per square inch (maximum = 300,000 pounds per square inch). P = Total rotating (hung) load, pounds, including truss arms, center cage, internal spur gear, influent well, skimmers, tapered spiral scraper blades, counterweights, and any other rotating weight. N = No. of balls. D = Ball diameter, inch.

c) Replacement accomplished without removing or backing up the access bridge.

3) Design raceway and ball bearings for ABMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000 hours minimum.

4) Provide oil bath for turntable base and internal spur gear: a) Include felt seal and dust shield protection. b) Provide oil fill, oil drain, and oil level indicator devices in readily

accessible locations. c) Lubricant in accordance with AGMA 9005.

4. Chain drive: a. Material:

1) Sprockets: Steel. b. Type: Standard roller chain in accordance with ASME B 29.1M connecting

drive sprocket of the gear motor speed reducer to the driven sprocket. c. Drive sprocket: Minimum of 12 teeth. d. Chain and sprockets enclosure: Enclose roller chain and sprockets in

weatherproof fabricated steel guard with service openings. e. Chain:

1) Minimum tensile strength greater than 4 times chain pull based on momentary peak torque.

2) Power rating exceeding the transmitted power (based on continuous running torque) by 1.50 minimum.

5. Drive motor: a. Motor design:

1) Drive motor shall be a squirrel-cage indication type. 2) Motor characteristics:

a) Minimum continuous horsepower not less than 0.5. b) Voltage: 480-volts. c) Phase: 3. d) Frequency: 60-hertz. e) Insulation: Class B, moisture resistant.


f) Service factor: 1.15. g) Maximum ambient temperature: 40 degrees centigrade. h) Enclosure: TEFC, suitable for installation in a Class I, Division 2

environment. i) Synchronous speed: 1,800 revolutions per minute.

3) Nameplate: Include all information listed above under subparagraph "Motor Characteristics."

4) As specified in Section 26_05_50 - NEMA Frame Induction Motors, 600 Volts and Below.

I. Electrical controls: 1. Local control panel:

a. As indicated in Division 26. 2. Electrical wiring as specified in Section 26_05_19 - Wires and Cables (1,000

Volt Maximum). 3. Overload device and alarms:

a. Torque overload device: Incorporate into drive assembly: 1) Mechanical overload device shall be actuated by torque from the

rotation of the wormgear. 2) Torque indicator:

a) Provide a visual torque indicator oriented so that it may be read from the walkway at all times during operation.

b) Calibrate torque indicator from 0 to 160 percent of the continuous running torque.

3) Include with the overload device, 2 independently adjustable switches as follows: a) Alarm switch: An alarm switch that shall be adjusted to activate

an alarm when load reaches 90 percent of the continuous running torque.

b) Cutout switch: A cutout switch that shall be adjusted to shut-off the motor when load reaches 100 percent of the continuous running torque.

c) Alarm circuit to sound an alarm horn and illuminate a red lamp, both mounted at the local control panel.

d) Alarm contacts of the maintained type rated at 10 amps continuous pilot duty.

e) Overload device indicating meter enclosure: Weather proof steel.

f) NEMA Type 4X. b. Additional protection:

1) Provide shear pins in the drive assembly for additional protection above the shut-off torque rating. a) This additional protection device shall function at approximately

125 percent of continuous running torque. b) Shear pins: Corrosion resistant material.

2) Provide limit switch that indicates breakage of the shear pin due to any circumstance. Shear pin limit switch shall be interlocked with motor controls to prevent mechanism from operating with a broken shear pin: a) Materials: Corrosion resistant. b) Electrical enclosure: NEMA Type 4X.

c. Alarm horn:


1) Suitable for outdoor installation. 2) Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a) Federal Horn, Catalog Number 350W. d. Alarm lamp:

1) Provide vapor-tight red alarm lamp suitable for outdoor installation. e. Equipment identification plates: Provide 16-gauge stainless steel

identification plate, securely mounted on equipment in readily visible location, bearing equipment identification tag number.

4. Scum Flush Water: a. A scum trough-flushing device shall be located at the inners end of the

trough. b. The flushing device shall be activated with a solenoid valve at each pass

of a skimmer blade by a limit switch rated for the application. The device shall include capability to adjust the start and the duration of the flush cycle.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Shop finishing: 1. Center drive mechanism: Prime and finish paint before shipping to project site.

2.05 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Spare parts: Furnish the following spare parts suitably packaged and marked. Include a price list and name, address, and telephone number of local supplier: 1. 2 sets of scum skimmer blade wear strips. 2. 1 set of brass squeegees for each clarifier furnished. 3. 4 sets of shear pins. 4. 1 set neoprene scum skimmer wipers. 5. 1 set each of oil seals for the worm shaft and pinion shaft.

B. Special tools: Provide the following special tools: 1. Tools required to assemble, disassemble, repair, and maintain equipment, and

that have been specifically made for use on the equipment. 2. Necessary eyebolts, hooks, and rods for handling equipment parts. 3. List of tools with the maintenance and operation data describing the uses of

the tools.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Field welding: 1. Field welding is permitted only for the bridge splice. 2. Field weld components as required for installation. 3. Use welding procedures, welders, and welding operators qualified and certified

in accordance with AWS D1.1. 4. Shielded arc welding is required for all field welding and shall conform to the

shop drawing requirements.

B. Finishes: 1. Protect motors prior, clean equipment prior to coating.


2. Coating systems: a. As specified in Section 09_96_01 - High-Performance Coatings b. Submerged surfaces: High solids epoxy. c. Other surfaces: Epoxy-polyurethane. d. Shop apply or field apply primer.

3. Shop applied primer: Use shop-applied primer compatible with the specified field coating system: a. Smooth welds and prominences with power tools before applying

coatings. b. Provide SSPC SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform

surface profile between 2.0 and 2.5 mils before coating. c. Visit coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation

procedures and coating application of items to be shop primed: 1) Coordinate plant visits with Owner's inspector. 2) Notify Owner a minimum of 2 weeks prior to shop priming and plant

visits. d. Provide NACE III inspector's reports from visits to coating plants to

observe and approve surface preparation and primer application. e. Provide data sheets identifying the shop primer to on-site coating

application personnel. f. Perform adhesion tests on the shop primer. g. Field preparation of shop-primed surfaces:

1) Smooth welds and prominences with power tools. 2) Remove and recoat damaged, deteriorated, and poorly applied shop

coatings. 3) Clean and dry shop-primed ferrous metal surfaces and fabricated

assemblies before applying field coats. 4) Prepare shop epoxy primed surfaces with light abrasive blasting or

abrading and then vacuum before applying finish coats. h. Damaged shop primer or rust bleeding: Clean in accordance with SSPC

SP1 (Solvent Cleaning), spot blast in accordance with SSPC SP 10 (Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile between 2.0 and 2.5 mils before recoating.

4. Field primer: apply in the field. 5. Finish coats: apply finish coats in the field.

C. Guardrail with kickplate: Install on both sides of walkway and around center turntable as specified in Section 05_50_00 - Metal Fabrications.

D. Scum skimming system: Install counterweights designed and located by manufacturer.

E. Center column: Mount center column vertically over influent port at center of basin floor.

F. Odor control covers: Reinstall existing odor control cover panels.

3.02 COMMISSIONING

A. As specified in Section 01_75_17 - Commissioning and this Section.

B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide certificates:


a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. 2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements:

a. Installation: 1 trip, 2-day minimum. b. Functional Testing: 2 trips, 2-day minimum each.

3. Training: a. Maintenance: 4 hours per session, 2 sessions. b. Operation: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.

C. Functional testing: 1. Clarifier drive:

a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Cutout torque test:

1) Perform cutout torque test prior to placement of grout topping on concrete slab.

2) Provide test results. c. Adjustments and settings to overload device:

1) Adjustments and settings: Perform necessary adjustments and settings to overload device to ensure that sludge collector mechanism will sound an alarm and switch off drive motor when specified overload conditions occur in tank.

2) Test run: Perform test run following completion of adjustments and settings of overload device to confirm effectiveness of overload device.

d. Dry test run of equipment: 1) Special attention: Give attention during dry test run of equipment to

operation of scum skimming device. 2) Settings of skimmer boom to scum box lip and rubber wiping and

sealing strips: Set as required to ensure that adequate volume of scum is discharged under normal operating conditions.

D. Required results: 1. Sludge collector mechanism:

a. In the event the mechanism fails to meet field quality control test requirements of this Section, make necessary changes and retest mechanism.

b. If mechanism remains unable to meet test requirements to satisfaction of the Owner, remove and replace such mechanism with satisfactory mechanism at no additional cost.

END OF SECTION

Date post:	12-Jan-2022
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	2 times
Download:	0 times